Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Cleaning8Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Symbols for safety precautions10Electricity and Safety11Installation and Safety12Operation14Correct posture to use the product18Preparations191.1 Checking the Contents191.1.1 Removing the Packaging191.1.2 Checking the Components201.2 Parts211.2.1 Reverse Side231.3 Installation241.3.1 Attaching the Stand241.3.2 Removing the Stand251.3.3 Adjusting the Product Tilt261.3.4 Anti-theft Lock27Connecting and Using a Source Device282.1 Before Connecting282.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints282.2 Connecting the Power282.3 Connecting and Using a PC292.3.1 Connection Using the D-SUB Cable (Analogue Type)292.3.2 Connection Using the HDMI Cable302.3.3 Connection Using an HDMI-DVI Cable302.3.4 Driver Installation312.3.5 Setting Optimum Resolution322.3.6 Changing the Resolution Using a PC33Screen Setup373.1 Brightness373.1.1 Configuring Brightness373.2 Contrast383.2.1 Configuring Contrast383.3 Sharpness393.3.1 Configuring Sharpness393.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright403.4.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright403.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale423.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale423.6 Image Size433.6.1 Changing the Image Size433.7 HDMI Black Level453.7.1 Configuring the HDMI Black Level Settings453.8 Response Time463.8.1 Configuring Response Time463.9 H-Position & V-Position473.9.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position473.10 Coarse483.10.1 Adjusting Coarse483.11 Fine493.11.1 Adjusting Fine49Configuring Tint504.1 Red504.1.1 Configuring Red504.2 Green514.2.1 Configuring Green514.3 Blue524.3.1 Configuring Blue524.4 Color Tone534.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings534.5 Gamma544.5.1 Configuring Gamma54Coordinating OSD555.1 Language555.1.1 Configuring Language555.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position565.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position565.3 Display Time575.3.1 Configuring Display Time575.4 Transparency585.4.1 Changing Transparency58Setup and Reset596.1 Reset596.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)596.2 Eco Saving606.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving606.3 Off Timer616.3.1 Configuring Off Timer616.4 Turn Off After626.4.1 Configuring Turn Off After626.5 PC/AV Mode636.5.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode636.6 Key Repeat Time646.6.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time646.7 Source Detection656.7.1 Configuring Source Detection656.8 Customized Key666.8.1 Configuring Customized Key66INFORMATION Menu and Others677.1 INFORMATION677.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION677.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen68Installing the Software698.1 MagicTune698.1.1 What is "MagicTune"?698.1.2 Installing the Software698.1.3 Removing the Software708.2 MultiScreen718.2.1 Installing the Software718.2.2 Removing the Software72Troubleshooting Guide739.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center739.1.1 Testing the Product739.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency739.1.3 Check the following.749.2 Q & A76Specifications7810.1 General7810.2 PowerSaver8010.3 Standard Signal Mode Table81Appendix83Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE83Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)89Not a product defect89A Product damage caused by customer's fault89Others89Correct Disposal91Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)91Terminology92Index94Taille: 4,1 MoPages: 95Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster BX1950/BX1950N/BX2050/BX2050N/BX2250/BX2250N/BX2350/ BX2450/BX2450L/BX2450N1Índice21 Principales precauciones de seguridad41-1 Antes de comenzar41-2 Conservación y mantenimiento51-3 Precauciones de seguridad62 Instalación del producto132-1 Contenido del embalaje132-2 Instalación del soporte142-3 Conexión con un PC152-4 Conexión de un cable HDMI172-5 Bloqueo Kensington183 Uso del producto193-1 Configuración de la resolución óptima193-2 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar203-3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar213-4 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar223-5 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar233-6 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar243-7 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar263-8 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar283-9 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar303-10 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar323-11 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar343-12 Instalación del controlador del dispositivo363-13 Botones de funcionamiento del producto373-14 Uso del menú de ajuste de la pantalla (OSD: presentación en pantalla)394 Instalación del software484-1 Natural Color484-2 MagicTune494-3 MultiScreen515 Solución de problemas525-1 Autodiagnóstico de monitor525-2 Antes de solicitar un servicio535-3 Preguntas habituales566 Más información586-1 Instrucciones586-2 Función de ahorro de energía596-3 Instrucciones606-4 Función de ahorro de energía616-5 Instrucciones626-6 Función de ahorro de energía636-7 Instrucciones646-8 Función de ahorro de energía656-9 Instrucciones666-10 Función de ahorro de energía676-11 Instrucciones686-12 Función de ahorro de energía696-13 Instrucciones706-14 Función de ahorro de energía716-15 Instrucciones726-16 Función de ahorro de energía736-17 Instrucciones746-18 Función de ahorro de energía756-19 Instrucciones766-20 Función de ahorro de energía776-21 Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE786-22 Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos) - Sólo Europa81Taille: 2,2 MoPages: 81Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster BX1950/BX1950N/BX2050/BX2050N/BX2250/BX2250N/BX2350/BX2450/ BX2450L/BX2450N1차례21 주요 안전 사항41-1 사용설명서를 읽기 전에41-2 보관 및 관리51-3 안전을 위한 주의사항62 설치하기122-1 구성품 확인122-2 받침대 조립하기132-3 PC와 연결142-4 HDMI와 연결162-5 도난 방지용 잠금 장치173 사용하기183-1 최적해상도 설정183-2 표준신호모드표193-3 표준신호모드표203-4 표준신호모드표213-5 표준신호모드표223-6 표준신호모드표233-7 표준신호모드표253-8 표준신호모드표273-9 표준신호모드표293-10 표준신호모드표313-11 표준신호모드표333-12 제품 드라이버 설치353-13 제품 조작 버튼 설명363-14 화면 조정 메뉴(OSD:On Screen Display) 사용하기384 소프트웨어 설치474-1 Natural Color474-2 MagicTune484-3 MultiScreen505 문제 해결515-1 모니터 자체 진단하기515-2 고장 신고 전 확인사항525-3 궁금해요546 기타정보556-1 제품규격556-2 절전 기능566-3 제품규격576-4 절전 기능586-5 제품규격596-6 절전 기능606-7 제품규격616-8 절전 기능626-9 제품규격636-10 절전 기능646-11 제품규격656-12 절전 기능666-13 제품규격676-14 절전 기능686-15 제품규격696-16 절전 기능706-17 제품규격716-18 절전 기능726-19 제품규격736-20 절전 기능746-21 고객 등록756-22 서비스 센터 안내766-23 재활용 정보77Taille: 2,2 MoPages: 77Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto10Copyright10Iconos utilizados en este manual10Limpieza11Seguridad en el espacio de instalación12Precauciones de almacenamiento12Precauciones de seguridad13Símbolos de precauciones de seguridad13Electricidad y seguridad14Instalación15Funcionamiento17Postura correcta para utilizar el producto21Preparativos221.1 Comprobación del contenido221.1.1 Extracción del embalaje221.1.2 Comprobación de los componentes231.2 Partes (S19C350NW)241.2.1 Botones delanteros241.2.2 Guía de teclas directas261.2.3 Guía de teclas de función271.3 Partes (S22C350B / S23C350B / S24C350BL / S22C350H / S23C340H / S23C350H / S24C340HL / S24C350H / S24C350HL / S27C350H)291.3.1 Botones delanteros291.3.2 Guía de teclas directas311.3.3 Guía de teclas de función321.3.4 Parte posterior "(S19C350NW)"341.3.5 Parte posterior "(S22C350B / S23C350B / S24C350BL)"351.3.6 Parte posterior "(S22C350H / S23C340H / S23C350H / S24C340HL / S24C350H / S24C350HL / S27C350H)"361.4 Instalación371.4.1 Instalación del soporte371.4.2 Extracción del soporte381.4.3 Ajuste de la inclinación del producto391.4.4 Bloqueo antirrobo40Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente412.1 Antes de conectar412.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión412.2 Conexión y uso de un PC422.2.1 Conexión mediante el cable D-SUB (tipo Analógico)422.2.2 Conexión mediante el cable DVI "(S22C350B / S23C350B / S23C350BL)"432.2.3 Conexión mediante un cable DVI-HDMI "(S22C350B / S23C350B / S23C350BL)"432.2.4 Conexión mediante un cable HDMI "(S22C350H / S23C340H / S23C350H / S24C340HL / S24C350H / S24C350HL / S27C350H)"442.2.5 Conexión mediante un cable HDMI-DVI "(S22C350H / S23C340H / S23C350H /S24C340HL / S24C350H / S24C350HL / S27C350H)"442.2.6 Conexión de auriculares o altavoces "(S22C350H / S23C340H / S23C350H /S24C340HL / S24C350H / S24C350HL / S27C350H)"452.2.7 Conexión de la alimentación452.2.8 Sujeción de los cables conectados462.2.9 Cambiar la configuración del sonido en Windows.472.2.10 Instalación de controladores482.2.11 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima492.2.12 Cambio de la resolución mediante un PC50Configuración de pantalla "(S19C350NW)"543.1 Brillo543.1.1 Configuración de Brillo543.2 Contraste553.2.1 Configuración de Contraste553.3 Nitidez563.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez563.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright573.4.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright573.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle583.5.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle583.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale603.6.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale603.7 Tamaño de imagen613.7.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen613.8 Posición-H y Posición-V623.8.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V623.9 Grueso633.9.1 Ajuste de Grueso633.10 Fino643.10.1 Ajuste de Fino64Configuración de pantalla "(S22C350B / S23C350B / S24C350BL)"654.1 Brillo654.1.1 Configuración de Brillo654.2 Contraste664.2.1 Configuración de Contraste664.3 Nitidez674.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez674.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright684.4.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright684.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle694.5.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle694.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale714.6.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale714.7 Tamaño de imagen724.7.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen724.8 Posición-H y Posición-V744.8.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V744.9 Grueso754.9.1 Ajuste de Grueso754.10 Fino764.10.1 Ajuste de Fino76Configuración de pantalla "(S22C350H / S23C340H / S23C350H / S24C340HL / S24C350H / S24C350HL / S27C350H)"775.1 Brillo775.1.1 Configuración de Brillo775.2 Contraste785.2.1 Configuración de Contraste785.3 Nitidez795.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez795.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright805.4.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright805.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle825.5.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle825.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale845.6.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale845.7 Tamaño de imagen855.7.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen855.8 N.neg HDMI875.8.1 Ajuste de la configuración de N.neg HDMI875.9 Posición-H y Posición-V885.9.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V885.10 Grueso895.10.1 Ajuste de Grueso895.11 Fino905.11.1 Ajuste de Fino90Configuración de Matiz916.1 Rojo916.1.1 Configuración de Rojo916.2 Verde926.2.1 Configuración de Verde926.3 Azul936.3.1 Configuración de Azul936.4 Tono de color946.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color946.5 Gamma956.5.1 Configuración de Gamma95Coordinación de OSD967.1 Idioma967.1.1 Cambio del Idioma967.2 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú977.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú977.3 Mostrar hora987.3.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora987.4 Transparencia997.4.1 Modificación de Transparencia99Configuración y restauración "(S19C350NW)"1008.1 Restaurar1008.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)1008.2 Ahorro energía1018.2.1 Configuración de Ahorro energía1018.3 Temp. apag.1028.3.1 Configuración de Temp. apag.1028.4 Apagar tras1038.4.1 Configuración de Apagar tras1038.5 Frec. rep. tecla1048.5.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla1048.6 Activar LED1058.6.1 Configuración de Activar LED105Configuración y restauración "(S22C350B / S23C350B / S24C350BL)"1069.1 Restaurar1069.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)1069.2 Ahorro energía1079.2.1 Configuración de Ahorro energía1079.3 Temp. apag.1089.3.1 Configuración de Temp. apag.1089.4 Apagar tras1099.4.1 Configuración de Apagar tras1099.5 Modo PC/AV1109.5.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV1109.6 Frec. rep. tecla1119.6.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla1119.7 Detección fuente1129.7.1 Configuración de Detección fuente1129.8 Activar LED1139.8.1 Configuración de Activar LED113Configuración y restauración "(S22C350H / S23C340H / S23C350H / S24C340HL / S24C350H / S24C350HL / S27C350H)"11410.1 Restaurar11410.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)11410.2 Ahorro energía11510.2.1 Configuración de Ahorro energía11510.3 Temp. apag.11610.3.1 Configuración de Temp. apag.11610.4 Apagar tras11710.4.1 Configuración de Apagar tras11710.5 Modo PC/AV11810.5.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV11810.6 Frec. rep. tecla11910.6.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla11910.7 Detección fuente12010.7.1 Configuración de Detección fuente12010.8 Activar LED12110.8.1 Configuración de Activar LED121Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros12211.1 INFORMACIÓN12211.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN12211.2 Configuración de Brillo y Contraste en la pantalla inicial12311.3 Configuración de Volumen en la pantalla inicial124Instalación del software12512.1 MagicTune12512.1.1 ¿Qué es "MagicTune"?12512.1.2 Instalación del software12512.1.3 Eliminación del software12612.2 MultiScreen12712.2.1 Instalación del software12712.2.2 Eliminación del software128Solución de problemas12913.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung12913.1.1 Prueba del producto12913.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia12913.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.12913.2 P y R132Especificaciones13414.1 General "(S19C350NW)"13414.2 General "(S22C350B / S23C350B / S24C350BL)"13614.3 General "(S22C350H / S23C340H)"13814.4 General "(S23C350H / S24C340HL)"14014.5 General "(S24C350HL / S24C350H / S27C350H)"14214.6 Ahorro de energía14414.7 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar146Apéndice149Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE149Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago (Coste para los Clientes)155No se trata de un defecto del producto155El daño del producto ha sido causado por el cliente155Otros156Eliminación correcta157Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)157Terminología158Índice160Taille: 5,1 MoPages: 161Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto7Copyright7Iconos utilizados en este manual7Limpieza8Seguridad en el espacio de instalación9Precauciones de almacenamiento9Precauciones de seguridad10Símbolos10Electricidad y seguridad11Instalación12Funcionamiento14Postura correcta para utilizar el producto19Preparativos201.1 Comprobación del contenido201.1.1 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Partes211.2.1 Botones delanteros211.2.2 Parte posterior241.3 Instalación251.3.1 Instalación del soporte251.3.2 Extracción del soporte261.3.3 Ajuste de la inclinación del producto271.3.4 Bloqueo antirrobo28Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente292.1 Antes de conectar292.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión292.2 Conexión y uso de un PC292.2.1 Conexión a un PC292.2.2 Conexión de los auriculares312.2.3 Conexión de la alimentación322.2.4 Instalación de controladores332.2.5 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima34Configuración de pantalla353.1 Brillo353.1.1 Configuración de Brillo353.2 Contraste363.2.1 Configuración de Contraste363.3 Nitidez373.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez373.4 Modo Juego383.4.1 Configuración de Modo Juego383.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright393.5.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright393.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle (S22D390H / S22D393H)413.6.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle413.7 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale433.7.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale433.8 Tamaño de imagen443.8.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen443.9 N.neg HDMI463.9.1 Ajuste de la configuración de N.neg HDMI463.10 Tiempo respuesta (S24D390HL / S24D393HL / S27D390H / S27D393H)473.10.1 Configuración de Tiempo respuesta473.11 Posición-H y Posición-V483.11.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V483.12 Grueso503.12.1 Ajuste de Grueso503.13 Fino513.13.1 Ajuste de Fino51Configuración del matiz524.1 Rojo524.1.1 Configuración de Rojo524.2 Verde534.2.1 Configuración de Verde534.3 Azul544.3.1 Configuración de Azul544.4 Tono de color554.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color554.5 Gamma564.5.1 Configuración de Gamma56Coordinación de OSD575.1 Idioma575.1.1 Configuración de Idioma575.2 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú585.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú585.3 Mostrar hora595.3.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora595.4 Transparencia605.4.1 Modificación de Transparencia60Configuración y restauración616.1 Restablecer todo616.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restablecer Todo)616.2 Ahorro energía626.2.1 Configuración de Ahorro energía626.3 Temp. apag.636.3.1 Configuración de Temp. apag.636.3.2 Configuración de Apagar tras646.4 Modo PC/AV656.4.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV656.5 Frec. rep. tecla666.5.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla666.6 Detección fuente676.6.1 Configuración de Detección fuente67Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros687.1 INFORMACIÓN687.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN687.2 Configuración de Brillo y Contraste en la pantalla inicial697.3 Configuración de Volumen en la pantalla inicial70Instalación del software718.1 Easy Setting Box718.1.1 Instalación del software718.1.2 Eliminación del software72Solución de problemas739.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung739.1.1 Prueba del producto739.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia739.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.739.2 P y R76Especificaciones7810.1 General7810.2 Ahorro de energía7910.3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar80Apéndice82Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE82Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago (Coste para los Clientes)91No se trata de un defecto del producto91El daño del producto ha sido causado por el cliente91Otros92Eliminación correcta93Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)93Terminología94Índice96Taille: 4,1 MoPages: 97Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières목차2사용하기 전에7저작권7본문에서 사용되는 아이콘7청소하기8청소하기8설치공간 확보하기9보관 시 주의사항9안전을 위한 주의사항10표시 내용10전원 관련11설치 관련12사용 관련14제품의 올바른 사용자세17준비181.1 내용물 확인하기181.1.1 포장상자 분리하기181.1.2 구성품 확인하기191.2 각부의 명칭201.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명201.2.2 뒷면설명221.2.3 옆면 우측 설명241.3 설치하기251.3.1 받침대 조립하기251.3.2 제품의 기울기 및 높낮이 조정261.3.3 모니터 회전하기261.3.4 걸이용 받침대 설치271.3.5 도난 방지용 잠금장치28외부기기 연결 및 사용하기292.1 연결 전 확인 사항292.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요292.2 전원 연결하기292.3 PC와 연결 및 사용하기302.3.1 PC와 연결하기302.3.2 제품 드라이버 설치하기362.3.3 최적해상도 설정하기372.3.4 PC로 해상도 설정하기38화면 설정하기423.1 밝기423.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면423.2 명암433.2.1 명암을 설정하려면433.3 선명도443.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면443.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright453.4.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면453.5 화면 크기473.5.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면473.6 HDMI 블랙 레벨493.6.1 HDMI 블랙 레벨을 설정하려면493.7 응답 속도503.7.1 응답 속도를 설정하려면503.8 수평 위치 & 수직 위치513.8.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면513.9 주파수 조정523.9.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면523.10 미세 조정533.10.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면53색상 설정하기544.1 적544.1.1 적을 설정하려면544.2 녹554.2.1 녹을 설정하려면554.3 청564.3.1 청을 설정하려면564.4 바탕색 조정574.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면574.5 감마 조정584.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면58크기 및 위치 설정하기595.1 메뉴 언어595.1.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면595.2 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치605.2.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면605.3 표시 시간615.3.1 표시 시간을 설정하려면615.4 투명도625.4.1 투명도를 설정하려면62설정 및 초기화하기636.1 초기화636.1.1 초기화를 설정하려면636.2 에코 세이빙646.2.1 에코 세이빙을 설정하려면646.3 꺼짐 예약656.3.1 꺼짐 예약를 설정하려면656.4 꺼짐 시간설정666.4.1 꺼짐 시간설정을 설정하려면666.5 PC / AV 모드676.5.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면676.6 키반복 시간설정696.6.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면696.7 입력 인식706.7.1 입력 인식을 설정하려면706.8 맞춤키716.8.1 맞춤키를 설정하려면71정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴727.1 정보 표시727.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면727.2 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암 설정737.3 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암 설정74소프트웨어 설치758.1 Magic Tune758.1.1 MagicTune이란?758.1.2 설치758.1.3 설치 제거768.2 MultiScreen778.2.1 MultiScreen 설치778.2.2 MultiScreen 삭제788.3 MagicRotation798.3.1 설치798.3.2 설치 제거80문제발생 시 해결방안819.1 고장신고 전 확인사항819.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기819.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기819.1.3 확인해 보세요819.2 궁금해요(Q&A)83제품규격8410.1 제품사양8410.2 절전 기능9010.3 표준신호모드표91기타 정보99고객 등록99서비스센터 안내100유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임101제품 고장이 아닌경우101소비자 과실로 고장이 난 경우101그 밖의 경우101재활용 정보102무료처리102유료 처리102삼성전자의 [녹색경영]102용어설명103찾아보기105Taille: 6,1 MoPages: 106Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto7Copyright7Iconos utilizados en este manual7Limpieza8Seguridad en el espacio de instalación9Precauciones de almacenamiento9Precauciones de seguridad10Símbolos10Electricidad y seguridad11Instalación12Funcionamiento14Postura correcta para utilizar el producto19Preparativos201.1 Comprobación del contenido201.1.1 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Partes211.2.1 Panel de control211.2.2 Guía de teclas directas221.2.3 Guía de teclas de función231.2.4 Parte posterior251.3 Instalación261.3.1 Instalación del soporte261.3.2 Extracción del soporte271.3.3 Ajuste de la inclinación del producto281.3.4 Instalación de un equipo de montaje mural o un soporte de escritorio291.3.5 Bloqueo antirrobo30Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente312.1 Antes de conectar312.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión312.2 Conexión y uso de un PC312.2.1 Conexión a un PC312.2.2 Conexión de la alimentación332.2.3 Instalación de controladores342.2.4 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima35Configuración de pantalla363.1 Brillo363.1.1 Configuración de Brillo363.2 Contraste373.2.1 Configuración de Contraste373.3 Nitidez383.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez383.4 Modo descanso ojo393.4.1 Configuración de Modo descanso ojo393.5 Modo Juego403.5.1 Configuración de Modo Juego403.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright413.6.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright413.7 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle (S19E310HY / S22E310HY / S22E310H / S27E310H)433.7.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle433.8 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale453.8.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale453.9 Tamaño de imagen473.9.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen473.10 N.neg HDMI493.10.1 Ajuste de la configuración de N.neg HDMI493.11 Tiempo respuesta (S24E310HL / S27E310H)513.11.1 Configuración de Tiempo respuesta513.12 Posición-H y Posición-V523.12.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V523.13 Grueso543.13.1 Ajuste de Grueso543.14 Fino553.14.1 Ajuste de Fino55Configuración del matiz564.1 Rojo564.1.1 Configuración de Rojo564.2 Verde574.2.1 Configuración de Verde574.3 Azul584.3.1 Configuración de Azul584.4 Tono de color594.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color594.5 Gamma604.5.1 Configuración de Gamma60Coordinación de OSD615.1 Idioma615.1.1 Configuración de Idioma615.2 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú625.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú625.3 Mostrar hora635.3.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora635.4 Transparencia645.4.1 Modificación de Transparencia64Configuración y restauración656.1 Restablecer todo656.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restablecer Todo)656.2 Ahorro energ. Plus666.2.1 Configuración de Ahorro energ. Plus666.3 Temp. apag.676.3.1 Configuración de Temp. apag.676.3.2 Configuración de Apagar tras686.4 Modo PC/AV696.4.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV696.5 Frec. rep. tecla706.5.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla706.6 Detección fuente716.6.1 Configuración de Detección fuente716.7 Activar LED726.7.1 Configuración de Activar LED72Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros737.1 INFORMACIÓN737.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN737.2 Configuración de Brillo, Contraste y Nitidez desde la pantalla inicial74Instalación del software758.1 Easy Setting Box758.1.1 Instalación del software758.1.2 Eliminación del software76Solución de problemas779.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung779.1.1 Prueba del producto779.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia779.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.779.2 P y R80Especificaciones8210.1 General (S19E310HY)8210.2 General (S22E310HY / S22E310H)8310.3 General (S24E310HL)8410.4 General (S27E310H)8510.5 Ahorro de energía8610.6 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar87Apéndice90Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago (Coste para los Clientes)90No se trata de un defecto del producto90El daño del producto ha sido causado por el cliente90Otros91Eliminación correcta92Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)92Terminología93Índice95Taille: 6,9 MoPages: 96Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster S19A350B/S19A350N/S20A350B/S20A350N/S22A350B/S22A350H/ S23A350B/S23A350H/S24A350B/S24A350H/S27A350B/S27A350H1차례21 주요 안전 사항41-1 사용설명서를 읽기 전에41-2 보관 및 관리51-3 청소하기61-4 안전을 위한 주의사항72 설치하기132-1 구성품 확인132-2 받침대 조립하기142-3 PC와 연결162-4 HDMI와 연결182-5 도난 방지용 잠금 장치193 사용하기203-1 최적해상도 설정203-2 표준신호모드표213-3 표준신호모드표223-4 표준신호모드표233-5 표준신호모드표243-6 표준신호모드표253-7 표준신호모드표263-8 표준신호모드표273-9 표준신호모드표283-10 표준신호모드표303-11 표준신호모드표313-12 표준신호모드표333-13 표준신호모드표353-14 제품 드라이버 설치373-15 제품 조작 버튼 설명383-16 화면 조정 메뉴(OSD:On Screen Display) 사용하기404 소프트웨어 설치484-1 Natural Color484-2 MagicTune494-3 MultiScreen515 문제 해결525-1 모니터 자체 진단하기525-2 고장 신고 전 확인사항535-3 궁금해요556 기타정보566-1 제품규격566-2 절전 기능576-3 제품규격586-4 절전 기능596-5 제품규격606-6 절전 기능616-7 제품규격626-8 절전 기능636-9 제품규격646-10 절전 기능656-11 제품규격666-12 절전 기능676-13 제품규격686-14 절전 기능696-15 제품규격706-16 절전 기능716-17 제품규격726-18 절전 기능736-19 제품규격746-20 절전 기능756-21 제품규격766-22 절전 기능776-23 제품규격786-24 절전 기능796-25 고객 등록806-26 서비스 센터 안내816-27 재활용 정보82Taille: 2,8 MoPages: 82Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster S19A350B/S19A350N/S20A350B/S20A350N/S22A350B/S22A350H/ S23A350B/S23A350H/S24A350B/S24A350H/S27A350B/S27A350H1Table Of Contents21 Major Safety Precautions41-1 Before You Start41-2 Custody and Maintenance51-3 Cleaning the Monitor61-4 Safety Precautions72 Installing the Product122-1 Package Contents122-2 Installing the Stand132-3 Connecting with a PC152-4 Connecting a HDMI cable172-5 Kensington Lock183 Using the product193-1 Setting the Optimal Resolution193-2 Standard Signal Mode Table203-3 Standard Signal Mode Table213-4 Standard Signal Mode Table223-5 Standard Signal Mode Table233-6 Standard Signal Mode Table243-7 Standard Signal Mode Table263-8 Standard Signal Mode Table283-9 Standard Signal Mode Table303-10 Standard Signal Mode Table323-11 Standard Signal Mode Table343-12 Standard Signal Mode Table363-13 Standard Signal Mode Table383-14 Installing the Device Driver403-15 Product Operating Buttons413-16 Using the Screen Adjustment Menu (OSD: On Screen Display)434 Installing the Software514-1 Natural Color514-2 MagicTune524-3 MultiScreen545 Troubleshooting555-1 Monitor Self-Diagnosis555-2 Before Requesting Service565-3 FAQ586 More Information596-1 Specifications596-2 Power Saving Function606-3 Specifications616-4 Power Saving Function626-5 Specifications636-6 Power Saving Function646-7 Specifications656-8 Power Saving Function666-9 Specifications676-10 Power Saving Function686-11 Specifications696-12 Power Saving Function706-13 Specifications716-14 Power Saving Function726-15 Specifications736-16 Power Saving Function746-17 Specifications756-18 Power Saving Function766-19 Specifications776-20 Power Saving Function786-21 Specifications796-22 Power Saving Function806-23 Specifications816-24 Power Saving Function826-25 Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE836-26 Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) - Europe only87Taille: 1,8 MoPages: 87Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster S19A350B/S19A350N/S20A350B/S20A350N/S22A350B/S22A350H/ S23A350B/S23A350H/S24A350B/S24A350H/S27A350B/S27A350H1Table Of Contents21 Major Safety Precautions41-1 Before You Start41-2 Custody and Maintenance51-3 Cleaning the Monitor61-4 Safety Precautions72 Installing the Product122-1 Package Contents122-2 Installing the Stand132-3 Connecting with a PC152-4 Connecting a HDMI cable172-5 Kensington Lock183 Using the product193-1 Setting the Optimal Resolution193-2 Standard Signal Mode Table203-3 Standard Signal Mode Table213-4 Standard Signal Mode Table223-5 Standard Signal Mode Table233-6 Standard Signal Mode Table243-7 Standard Signal Mode Table263-8 Standard Signal Mode Table283-9 Standard Signal Mode Table303-10 Standard Signal Mode Table323-11 Standard Signal Mode Table343-12 Standard Signal Mode Table363-13 Standard Signal Mode Table383-14 Installing the Device Driver403-15 Product Operating Buttons413-16 Using the Screen Adjustment Menu (OSD: On Screen Display)434 Installing the Software514-1 Natural Color514-2 MagicTune524-3 MultiScreen545 Troubleshooting555-1 Monitor Self-Diagnosis555-2 Before Requesting Service565-3 FAQ586 More Information596-1 Specifications596-2 Power Saving Function606-3 Specifications616-4 Power Saving Function626-5 Specifications636-6 Power Saving Function646-7 Specifications656-8 Power Saving Function666-9 Specifications676-10 Power Saving Function686-11 Specifications696-12 Power Saving Function706-13 Specifications716-14 Power Saving Function726-15 Specifications736-16 Power Saving Function746-17 Specifications756-18 Power Saving Function766-19 Specifications776-20 Power Saving Function786-21 Specifications796-22 Power Saving Function806-23 Specifications816-24 Power Saving Function826-25 Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE836-26 Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) - Europe only87Taille: 1,8 MoPages: 87Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster S19A350B/S19A350N/S20A350B/S20A350N/S22A350B/S22A350H/ S23A350B/S23A350H/S24A350B/S24A350H/S27A350B/S27A350H1차례21 주요 안전 사항41-1 사용설명서를 읽기 전에41-2 보관 및 관리51-3 청소하기61-4 안전을 위한 주의사항72 설치하기122-1 구성품 확인122-2 받침대 조립하기132-3 PC와 연결152-4 HDMI와 연결172-5 도난 방지용 잠금 장치183 사용하기193-1 최적해상도 설정193-2 표준신호모드표203-3 표준신호모드표213-4 표준신호모드표223-5 표준신호모드표233-6 표준신호모드표243-7 표준신호모드표253-8 표준신호모드표263-9 표준신호모드표273-10 표준신호모드표293-11 표준신호모드표303-12 표준신호모드표323-13 표준신호모드표343-14 제품 드라이버 설치363-15 제품 조작 버튼 설명373-16 화면 조정 메뉴(OSD:On Screen Display) 사용하기394 소프트웨어 설치474-1 Natural Color474-2 MagicTune484-3 MultiScreen505 문제 해결515-1 모니터 자체 진단하기515-2 고장 신고 전 확인사항525-3 궁금해요546 기타정보556-1 제품규격556-2 절전 기능566-3 제품규격576-4 절전 기능586-5 제품규격596-6 절전 기능606-7 제품규격616-8 절전 기능626-9 제품규격636-10 절전 기능646-11 제품규격656-12 절전 기능666-13 제품규격676-14 절전 기능686-15 제품규격696-16 절전 기능706-17 제품규격716-18 절전 기능726-19 제품규격736-20 절전 기능746-21 제품규격756-22 절전 기능766-23 제품규격776-24 절전 기능786-25 고객 등록796-26 서비스 센터 안내806-27 재활용 정보81Taille: 1,9 MoPages: 81Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster S19A350B/S19A350N/S20A350B/S20A350N/S22A350B/S22A350H/ S23A350B/S23A350H/S24A350B/S24A350H/S27A350B/S27A350H1차례21 주요 안전 사항41-1 사용설명서를 읽기 전에41-2 보관 및 관리51-3 청소하기61-4 안전을 위한 주의사항72 설치하기122-1 구성품 확인122-2 받침대 조립하기132-3 PC와 연결152-4 HDMI와 연결172-5 도난 방지용 잠금 장치183 사용하기193-1 최적해상도 설정193-2 표준신호모드표203-3 표준신호모드표213-4 표준신호모드표223-5 표준신호모드표233-6 표준신호모드표243-7 표준신호모드표253-8 표준신호모드표263-9 표준신호모드표273-10 표준신호모드표293-11 표준신호모드표303-12 표준신호모드표323-13 표준신호모드표343-14 제품 드라이버 설치363-15 제품 조작 버튼 설명373-16 화면 조정 메뉴(OSD:On Screen Display) 사용하기394 소프트웨어 설치474-1 Natural Color474-2 MagicTune484-3 MultiScreen505 문제 해결515-1 모니터 자체 진단하기515-2 고장 신고 전 확인사항525-3 궁금해요546 기타정보556-1 제품규격556-2 절전 기능566-3 제품규격576-4 절전 기능586-5 제품규격596-6 절전 기능606-7 제품규격616-8 절전 기능626-9 제품규격636-10 절전 기능646-11 제품규격656-12 절전 기능666-13 제품규격676-14 절전 기능686-15 제품규격696-16 절전 기능706-17 제품규격716-18 절전 기능726-19 제품규격736-20 절전 기능746-21 제품규격756-22 절전 기능766-23 제품규격776-24 절전 기능786-25 고객 등록796-26 서비스 센터 안내806-27 재활용 정보81Taille: 1,9 MoPages: 81Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières목차2사용하기 전에7저작권7본문에서 사용되는 아이콘7청소하기8설치공간 확보하기9보관 시 주의사항9안전을 위한 주의사항10표시 내용10전원 관련11설치 관련12사용 관련14제품의 올바른 사용자세18준비191.1 내용물 확인하기191.1.1 구성품 확인하기191.2 각부의 명칭201.2.1 버튼부201.2.2 바로가기 버튼 화면211.2.3 기능 버튼 화면221.2.4 뒷면설명241.3 설치하기251.3.1 받침대 장착하기251.3.2 받침대 제거하기261.3.3 제품의 기울기 조정271.3.4 도난 방지용 잠금장치27외부기기 연결 및 사용하기282.1 연결 전 확인 사항282.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.282.2 PC와 연결 및 사용하기282.2.1 PC와 연결하기282.2.2 전원 연결하기312.2.3 제품 드라이버 설치하기332.2.4 최적해상도 설정하기34화면 설정하기353.1 밝기353.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면353.2 명암363.2.1 명암을 설정하려면363.3 선명도373.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면373.4 게임 모드383.4.1 게임 모드를 설정하려면383.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright393.5.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면393.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale413.6.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale을 설정하려면413.7 화면 크기423.7.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면423.8 HDMI 블랙 레벨443.8.1 HDMI 블랙 레벨을 설정하려면443.9 응답 시간453.9.1 응답 시간을 설정하려면453.10 수평 위치 & 수직 위치463.10.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면463.11 주파수 조정473.11.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면473.12 미세 조정483.12.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면48색상 설정하기494.1 적494.1.1 적을 설정하려면494.2 녹504.2.1 녹을 설정하려면504.3 청514.3.1 청을 설정하려면514.4 바탕색 조정524.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면524.5 감마 조정534.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면53OSD 조정하기545.1 메뉴 언어545.1.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면545.2 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치555.2.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면555.3 표시 시간565.3.1 표시 시간을 설정하려면565.4 투명도575.4.1 투명도를 설정하려면57설정 및 초기화하기586.1 전체 초기화586.1.1 전체 초기화를 설정하려면586.2 에코 세이빙596.2.1 에코 세이빙을 설정하려면596.3 꺼짐 예약606.3.1 꺼짐 예약를 설정하려면606.3.2 꺼짐 시간설정을 설정하려면616.4 PC/AV 모드626.4.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면626.5 키반복 시간설정636.5.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면636.6 입력 인식646.6.1 입력 인식을 설정하려면646.7 전원 LED 켜짐656.7.1 전원 LED 켜짐을 설정하려면65정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴667.1 정보 표시667.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면667.2 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암 설정677.3 초기화면에서 음량 설정687.3.1 음량68소프트웨어 설치698.1 Easy Setting Box698.1.1 Easy Setting Box 설치698.1.2 Easy Setting Box 삭제70문제발생 시 해결방안719.1 고장신고 전 확인사항719.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기719.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기719.1.3 확인해 보세요.719.2 궁금해요 (Q&A)74제품규격7510.1 제품사양 (S24D590PL)7510.2 제품사양 (S27D590P)7610.3 절전 기능7710.4 표준신호모드표78기타 정보80서비스센터 안내80유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임81제품 고장이 아닌경우81소비자 과실로 고장이 난 경우81그 밖의 경우81재활용 정보82무료처리82유료 처리82삼성전자의 [녹색경영]82용어설명83찾아보기85Taille: 3,3 MoPages: 86Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresImportant Warranty Information Regarding Television Format Viewing2Still image warning2Securing the Installation Space2Getting Started4Safety Precautions4Power Related4Installation Related5Cleaning Related7Usage Related7List of Features11Accessories11Viewing the Control Panel12Viewing the Remote Control13How to Navigate Menus14Connecting to an Antenna14Plug & Play (Initial Setup)15Connections16Connecting to an AV Device16Connecting to the headphone17Connecting to a PC17Basic Features19Changing the Input Source19Channel Menu19Seeing Channels19Using Favorite Channels20Memorizing Channels20Editing Channels20Other Features20Picture Menu22Changing the Preset Picture Mode22Adjusting Picture Settings22Response Time22Auto Adjustment t22Changing the Picture Options23Sound Menu25Changing the Preset Sound Mode25Adjusting sound settings25Sound Settings25Setup Menu26Setting the Time26Using the Sleep Timer26Setting the On/Off Timer26Locking Programs27Other Features28Support Menu30Advanced Features31Media Play (USB)31Connecting a USB Device31Sports Mode36Other Information37Attaching a Wall Mount/Desktop Stand37Anti-theft Kensington Lock38Troubleshooting39Storage and Maintenance41License42Specifications43Taille: 13 MoPages: 44Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto8Copyright8Iconos utilizados en este manual8Limpieza9Seguridad en el espacio de instalación10Precauciones de almacenamiento10Precauciones de seguridad11Símbolos de precauciones de seguridad11Electricidad y seguridad12Instalación13Funcionamiento15Postura correcta para utilizar el producto19Preparativos201.1 Comprobación del contenido201.1.1 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Partes211.2.1 Botones delanteros211.2.2 Parte posterior321.3 Instalación351.3.1 Instalación del soporte (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S19D300NY)351.3.2 Instalación del soporte (S20D300BY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300BY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S22D300NY / S24D300B / S24D300BL / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)361.3.3 Extracción del soporte (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S19D300NY)371.3.4 Extracción del soporte (S20D300BY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300BY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S22D300NY / S24D300B / S24D300BL / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)381.3.5 Instalación de un equipo de montaje mural o un soporte de escritorio (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S19D300NY / S24D300H (Solo modelo LS24D300HSM*))391.3.6 Ajuste de la inclinación del producto401.3.7 Bloqueo antirrobo41Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente422.1 Antes de conectar422.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión422.2 Conexión y uso de un PC422.2.1 Conexión mediante el cable D-SUB (tipo Analógico)422.2.2 Conexión mediante el cable DVI (S20D300BY / S22D300BY / S24D300B / S24D300BL)432.2.3 Conexión mediante el cable DVI-HDMI (S20D300BY / S22D300BY / S24D300B / S24D300BL)442.2.4 Conexión mediante el cable HDMI (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)442.2.5 Conexión mediante el cable HDMI-DVI (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)452.2.6 Conexión de la alimentación462.2.7 Instalación de controladores482.2.8 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima49Configuración de pantalla503.1 Brillo503.1.1 Configuración de Brillo503.2 Contraste513.2.1 Configuración de Contraste513.3 Nitidez523.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez523.4 Modo Juego533.4.1 Configuración de Modo Juego533.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright543.5.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright543.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle (S20D300H / S20D340H / S24D300B / S24D300H / S24D340H)563.6.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle563.7 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale583.7.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale583.8 Tamaño de imagen593.8.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen593.9 N.neg HDMI (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)613.9.1 Ajuste de la configuración de N.neg HDMI613.10 Tiempo respuesta (S24D300H / S24D340H)633.10.1 Configuración de Tiempo respuesta633.11 Posición-H y Posición-V643.11.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V643.12 Grueso663.12.1 Ajuste de Grueso663.13 Fino673.13.1 Ajuste de Fino67Configuración del matiz684.1 Rojo684.1.1 Configuración de Rojo684.2 Verde694.2.1 Configuración de Verde694.3 Azul704.3.1 Configuración de Azul704.4 Tono de color714.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color714.5 Gamma724.5.1 Configuración de Gamma72Coordinación de OSD735.1 Idioma735.1.1 Configuración de Idioma735.2 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú745.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú745.3 Mostrar hora755.3.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora755.4 Transparencia765.4.1 Modificación de Transparencia76Configuración y restauración776.1 Restablecer todo776.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restablecer Todo)776.2 Ahorro energía786.2.1 Configuración de Ahorro energía786.3 Temp. apag.796.3.1 Configuración de Temp. apag.796.3.2 Configuración de Apagar tras806.4 Modo PC/AV (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S20D300BY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300BY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S24D300B / S24D300BL / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)816.4.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV816.5 Frec. rep. tecla836.5.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla836.6 Detección fuente (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S20D300BY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300BY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S24D300B / S24D300BL / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)846.6.1 Configuración de Detección fuente84Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros857.1 INFORMACIÓN857.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN857.2 Configuración de Brillo y Contraste en la pantalla inicial86Instalación del software878.1 Easy Setting Box878.1.1 Instalación del software878.1.2 Eliminación del software88Solución de problemas899.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung899.1.1 Prueba del producto899.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia899.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.899.2 P y R92Especificaciones9410.1 General (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S19D300NY)9410.2 General (S20D300BY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY)9510.3 General (S22D300BY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S22D300NY)9610.4 General (S24D300BL / S24D300HL / S24D300H / S24D300B)9710.5 General (S24D340HL / S24D340H)9810.6 Ahorro de energía9910.7 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar101Apéndice106Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE106Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago (Coste para los Clientes)112No se trata de un defecto del producto112El daño del producto ha sido causado por el cliente112Otros113Eliminación correcta114Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)114Terminología115Índice117Taille: 4,9 MoPages: 118Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto8Copyright8Iconos utilizados en este manual8Limpieza9Seguridad en el espacio de instalación10Precauciones de almacenamiento10Precauciones de seguridad11Símbolos de precauciones de seguridad11Electricidad y seguridad12Instalación13Funcionamiento15Postura correcta para utilizar el producto19Preparativos201.1 Comprobación del contenido201.1.1 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Partes211.2.1 Botones delanteros211.2.2 Parte posterior321.3 Instalación351.3.1 Instalación del soporte (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S19D300NY)351.3.2 Instalación del soporte (S20D300BY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300BY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S22D300NY / S24D300B / S24D300BL / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)361.3.3 Extracción del soporte (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S19D300NY)371.3.4 Extracción del soporte (S20D300BY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300BY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S22D300NY / S24D300B / S24D300BL / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)381.3.5 Instalación de un equipo de montaje mural o un soporte de escritorio (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S19D300NY / S24D300H (Solo modelo LS24D300HSM*))391.3.6 Ajuste de la inclinación del producto401.3.7 Bloqueo antirrobo41Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente422.1 Antes de conectar422.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión422.2 Conexión y uso de un PC422.2.1 Conexión mediante el cable D-SUB (tipo Analógico)422.2.2 Conexión mediante el cable DVI (S20D300BY / S22D300BY / S24D300B / S24D300BL)432.2.3 Conexión mediante el cable DVI-HDMI (S20D300BY / S22D300BY / S24D300B / S24D300BL)442.2.4 Conexión mediante el cable HDMI (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)442.2.5 Conexión mediante el cable HDMI-DVI (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)452.2.6 Conexión de la alimentación462.2.7 Instalación de controladores482.2.8 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima49Configuración de pantalla503.1 Brillo503.1.1 Configuración de Brillo503.2 Contraste513.2.1 Configuración de Contraste513.3 Nitidez523.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez523.4 Modo Juego533.4.1 Configuración de Modo Juego533.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright543.5.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright543.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle (S20D300H / S20D340H / S24D300B / S24D300H / S24D340H)563.6.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle563.7 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale583.7.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale583.8 Tamaño de imagen593.8.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen593.9 N.neg HDMI (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)613.9.1 Ajuste de la configuración de N.neg HDMI613.10 Tiempo respuesta (S24D300H / S24D340H)633.10.1 Configuración de Tiempo respuesta633.11 Posición-H y Posición-V643.11.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V643.12 Grueso663.12.1 Ajuste de Grueso663.13 Fino673.13.1 Ajuste de Fino67Configuración del matiz684.1 Rojo684.1.1 Configuración de Rojo684.2 Verde694.2.1 Configuración de Verde694.3 Azul704.3.1 Configuración de Azul704.4 Tono de color714.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color714.5 Gamma724.5.1 Configuración de Gamma72Coordinación de OSD735.1 Idioma735.1.1 Configuración de Idioma735.2 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú745.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú745.3 Mostrar hora755.3.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora755.4 Transparencia765.4.1 Modificación de Transparencia76Configuración y restauración776.1 Restablecer todo776.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restablecer Todo)776.2 Ahorro energía786.2.1 Configuración de Ahorro energía786.3 Temp. apag.796.3.1 Configuración de Temp. apag.796.3.2 Configuración de Apagar tras806.4 Modo PC/AV (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S20D300BY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300BY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S24D300B / S24D300BL / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)816.4.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV816.5 Frec. rep. tecla836.5.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla836.6 Detección fuente (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S20D300BY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300BY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S24D300B / S24D300BL / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)846.6.1 Configuración de Detección fuente84Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros857.1 INFORMACIÓN857.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN857.2 Configuración de Brillo y Contraste en la pantalla inicial86Instalación del software878.1 Easy Setting Box878.1.1 Instalación del software878.1.2 Eliminación del software88Solución de problemas899.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung899.1.1 Prueba del producto899.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia899.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.899.2 P y R92Especificaciones9410.1 General (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S19D300NY)9410.2 General (S20D300BY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY)9510.3 General (S22D300BY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S22D300NY)9610.4 General (S24D300BL / S24D300HL / S24D300H / S24D300B)9710.5 General (S24D340HL / S24D340H)9810.6 Ahorro de energía9910.7 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar101Apéndice106Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE106Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago (Coste para los Clientes)112No se trata de un defecto del producto112El daño del producto ha sido causado por el cliente112Otros113Eliminación correcta114Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)114Terminología115Índice117Taille: 4,9 MoPages: 118Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières목차2사용하기 전에8저작권8본문에서 사용되는 아이콘8청소 관련9설치공간 확보하기10보관 시 주의사항10안전을 위한 주의사항11안전을 위한 주의사항에서 사용되는 아이콘11전원 관련12설치 관련13사용 관련15제품의 올바른 사용자세19준비201.1 내용물 확인하기201.1.1 구성품 확인하기201.2 각부의 명칭211.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명211.2.2 뒷면설명321.3 설치하기351.3.1 받침대 조립하기 (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S19D300NY)351.3.2 받침대 조립하기 (S20D300BY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300BY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S22D300NY / S24D300B / S24D300BL / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)361.3.3 받침대 제거하기 (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S19D300NY)371.3.4 받침대 제거하기 (S20D300BY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300BY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S22D300NY / S24D300B / S24D300BL / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)381.3.5 걸이용 받침대 설치 (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S19D300NY / S24D300H (LS24D300HSM* 모델만 지원합니다.))391.3.6 제품의 기울기 및 높낮이 조정401.3.7 도난 방지용 잠금장치41외부기기 연결 및 사용하기422.1 연결 전 확인 사항422.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.422.2 PC와 연결 및 사용하기422.2.1 D-SUB 케이블 연결 방식 (아날로그 방식)422.2.2 DVI 케이블 연결 방식 (S20D300BY / S22D300BY / S24D300B / S24D300BL)432.2.3 HDMI-DVI 케이블 연결 방식 (S20D300BY / S22D300BY / S24D300B / S24D300BL)442.2.4 HDMI 케이블 연결 방식 (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)442.2.5 HDMI-DVI 케이블 연결 방식 (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)452.2.6 전원 연결하기462.2.7 제품 드라이버 설치하기482.2.8 최적해상도 설정하기49화면 설정하기503.1 밝기503.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면503.2 명암513.2.1 명암을 설정하려면513.3 선명도523.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면523.4 게임 모드533.4.1 게임 모드를 설정하려면533.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright543.5.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면543.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle (S20D300H / S20D340H / S24D300B / S24D300H / S24D340H)563.6.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle을 설정하려면563.7 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale573.7.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale을 설정하려면573.8 화면 크기583.8.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면583.9 HDMI 블랙 레벨 (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)603.9.1 HDMI 블랙 레벨을 설정하려면603.10 응답 시간 (S24D300H / S24D340H)613.10.1 응답 시간을 설정하려면613.11 수평 위치 & 수직 위치623.11.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면623.12 주파수 조정643.12.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면643.13 미세 조정653.13.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면65색상 설정하기664.1 적664.1.1 적을 설정하려면664.2 녹674.2.1 녹을 설정하려면674.3 청684.3.1 청을 설정하려면684.4 바탕색 조정694.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면694.5 감마 조정704.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면70OSD 조정하기715.1 메뉴 언어715.1.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면715.2 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치725.2.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면725.3 표시 시간735.3.1 표시 시간을 설정하려면735.4 투명도745.4.1 투명도를 설정하려면74설정 및 초기화하기756.1 전체 초기화756.1.1 전체 초기화를 설정하려면756.2 에코 세이빙766.2.1 에코 세이빙을 설정하려면766.3 꺼짐 예약776.3.1 꺼짐 예약를 설정하려면776.3.2 꺼짐 시간설정을 설정하려면786.4 PC/AV 모드 (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S20D300BY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300BY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S24D300B / S24D300BL / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)796.4.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면796.5 키반복 시간설정806.5.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면806.6 입력 인식 (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S20D300BY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300BY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S24D300B / S24D300BL / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)816.6.1 입력 인식을 설정하려면81정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴827.1 정보 표시827.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면827.2 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암 설정83소프트웨어 설치848.1 Easy Setting Box848.1.1 Easy Setting Box 설치848.1.2 Easy Setting Box 삭제85문제발생 시 해결방안869.1 고장신고 전 확인사항869.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기869.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기869.1.3 확인해 보세요.869.2 궁금해요 (Q&A)88제품규격9010.1 제품사양 (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S19D300NY)9010.2 제품사양 (S20D300BY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY)9110.3 제품사양 (S22D300BY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S22D300NY)9210.4 제품사양 (S24D300BL / S24D300HL / S24D300H / S24D300B)9310.5 제품사양 (S24D340HL / S24D340H)9410.6 절전 기능9510.7 표준신호모드표97기타 정보101서비스센터 안내101유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임102제품 고장이 아닌경우102소비자 과실로 고장이 난 경우102그 밖의 경우102폐 전자제품 처리 안내103삼성전자의 [녹색경영]103용어설명104찾아보기106Taille: 5,2 MoPages: 107Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières목차2사용하기 전에6저작권6본문에서 사용되는 아이콘6청소하기7설치공간 확보하기8보관 시 주의사항8안전을 위한 주의사항9표시 내용9전원 관련10설치 관련11사용 관련13제품의 올바른 사용자세16준비171.1 내용물 확인하기171.1.1 구성품 확인하기171.2 각부의 명칭181.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명181.2.2 뒷면설명201.3 설치하기211.3.1 받침대 조립하기211.3.2 받침대 제거하기221.3.3 제품의 기울기 및 높낮이 조정231.3.4 도난 방지용 잠금장치24외부기기 연결 및 사용하기252.1 연결 전 확인 사항252.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.252.2 PC와 연결 및 사용하기252.2.1 PC와 연결하기252.2.2 전원 연결하기272.2.3 제품 드라이버 설치하기282.2.4 최적해상도 설정하기29화면 설정하기303.1 밝기303.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면303.2 명암313.2.1 명암을 설정하려면313.3 선명도323.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면323.4 게임 모드333.4.1 게임 모드를 설정하려면333.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright343.5.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면343.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle (S22D360H / S22D391H)363.6.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle을 설정하려면363.7 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale373.7.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale을 설정하려면373.8 화면 크기383.8.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면383.9 HDMI 블랙 레벨403.9.1 HDMI 블랙 레벨을 설정하려면403.10 응답 시간 (S24D360HL / S24D391HL / S27D360H / S27D391H)413.10.1 응답 시간을 설정하려면413.11 수평 위치 & 수직 위치423.11.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면423.12 주파수 조정443.12.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면443.13 미세 조정453.13.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면45색상 설정하기464.1 적464.1.1 적을 설정하려면464.2 녹474.2.1 녹을 설정하려면474.3 청484.3.1 청을 설정하려면484.4 바탕색 조정494.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면494.5 감마 조정504.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면50OSD 조정하기515.1 메뉴 언어515.1.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면515.2 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치525.2.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면525.3 메뉴 표시 시간535.3.1 메뉴 표시 시간을 설정하려면535.4 투명도545.4.1 투명도를 설정하려면54설정 및 초기화하기556.1 전체 초기화556.1.1 전체 초기화를 설정하려면556.2 에코 세이빙566.2.1 에코 세이빙을 설정하려면566.3 꺼짐 예약576.3.1 꺼짐 예약를 설정하려면576.3.2 꺼짐 시간설정을 설정하려면586.4 PC/AV 모드596.4.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면596.5 키반복 시간설정606.5.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면606.6 입력 인식616.6.1 입력 인식을 설정하려면61정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴627.1 정보 표시627.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면627.2 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암 설정63소프트웨어 설치648.1 Easy Setting Box648.1.1 Easy Setting Box 설치648.1.2 Easy Setting Box 삭제65문제발생 시 해결방안669.1 고장신고 전 확인사항669.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기669.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기669.1.3 확인해 보세요.669.2 궁금해요 (Q&A)68제품규격6910.1 제품사양6910.2 절전 기능7010.3 표준신호모드표71기타 정보73서비스센터 안내73유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임74제품 고장이 아닌경우74소비자 과실로 고장이 난 경우74그 밖의 경우74재활용 정보75무료처리75유료 처리75삼성전자의 [녹색경영]75용어설명76찾아보기78Taille: 5,7 MoPages: 79Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières목차2사용하기 전에8저작권8본문에서 사용되는 아이콘8청소하기9설치공간 확보하기10보관 시 주의사항10안전을 위한 주의사항11표시 내용11전원 관련12설치 관련13사용 관련15제품의 올바른 사용자세19준비201.1 내용물 확인하기201.1.1 구성품 확인하기201.2 각부의 명칭221.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명 (SE200 시리즈)221.2.2 앞면 버튼 설명 (S**E450B*, S**E650B*)241.2.3 앞면 버튼 설명 (S**E450M*)261.2.4 앞면 버튼 설명 (S**E450D*)281.2.5 뒷면 설명 (SE200 시리즈)301.2.6 뒷면 설명 (S**E450B*, S**E650B*)311.2.7 뒷면 설명 (S**E450M*)321.2.8 뒷면 설명 (S**E450D*)331.2.9 옆면 우측 설명 (S**E450D*)341.3 설치하기351.3.1 받침대 조립하기 (SE200 시리즈)351.3.2 받침대 조립하기 (SE450, SE650 시리즈)361.3.3 받침대 제거하기 (SE200 시리즈)371.3.4 제품의 기울기 조정 (SE200 시리즈)381.3.5 제품의 기울기 및 높낮이 조정 (SE450, SE650 시리즈)391.3.6 모니터 회전하기 (SE450, SE650 시리즈)401.3.7 걸이용 받침대 설치411.3.8 도난 방지용 잠금장치44외부기기 연결 및 사용하기452.1 연결 전 확인 사항452.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요452.2 PC와 연결 및 사용하기462.2.1 PC와 연결하기462.2.2 전원 연결하기512.2.3 제품 드라이버 설치하기552.2.4 최적 해상도 설정하기56화면 설정하기573.1 밝기573.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면573.2 명암583.2.1 명암을 설정하려면583.3 선명도593.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면593.4 눈 보호 모드603.4.1 눈 보호 모드를 설정하려면603.5 게임 모드613.5.1 게임 모드를 설정하려면613.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright623.6.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면623.7 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle (S19E200NY / S22E200NY / S24E650BW 제외)633.7.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle을 설정하려면633.8 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale643.8.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale을 설정하려면643.9 화면 크기 (S19E200BR / S19E450BR / S19E450MR 제외)653.9.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면653.10 응답 시간 (S24E650BW)673.10.1 응답 시간을 설정하려면673.11 수평 위치 & 수직 위치683.11.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면683.12 주파수 조정693.12.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면693.13 미세 조정703.13.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면70색상 설정하기714.1 적714.1.1 적을 설정하려면714.2 녹724.2.1 녹을 설정하려면724.3 청734.3.1 청을 설정하려면734.4 바탕색 조정744.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면744.5 감마 조정754.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면75크기 및 위치 설정하기765.1 메뉴 언어765.1.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면765.2 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치775.2.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면775.3 표시 시간785.3.1 표시 시간을 설정하려면785.4 투명도795.4.1 투명도를 설정하려면79설정 및 초기화하기806.1 전체 초기화806.1.1 전체 초기화를 설정하려면806.2 스마트 에코 세이빙816.2.1 스마트 에코 세이빙을 설정하려면816.3 꺼짐 예약 (S19E200NW / S19E200NY / S22E200N / S22E200NY)826.3.1 꺼짐 예약를 설정하려면826.3.2 꺼짐 시간설정을 설정하려면836.4 절전 타이머 (S19E200NW / S19E200NY / S22E200N / S22E200NY 제외)846.4.1 꺼짐 예약를 설정하려면846.4.2 절전 꺼짐 예약을 설정하려면866.5 PC/AV 모드 (S19E200NW / S19E200NY / S22E200N / S22E200NY 제외)886.5.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면886.6 키반복 시간설정906.6.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면906.7 입력 인식 (S19E200NW / S19E200NY / S22E200N / S22E200NY 제외)916.7.1 입력 인식을 설정하려면91정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴927.1 정보 표시927.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면927.2 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암, 선명도 설정937.3 초기화면에서 음량 설정94소프트웨어 설치958.1 MultiScreen958.1.1 MultiScreen 설치958.1.2 MultiScreen 삭제96문제발생 시 해결방안979.1 고장신고 전 확인사항979.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기979.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기979.1.3 확인해 보세요.979.2 궁금해요 (Q&A)100제품규격10210.1 제품사양 (S19E200NY / S19E200NW)10210.2 제품사양 (S19E200BW / S19E200BR)10310.3 제품사양 (S22E200NY)10410.4 제품사양 (S22E200B / S22E200N / S22E200BW)10510.5 제품사양 (S23E200B / S24E200BL)10610.6 제품사양 (S19E450BW / S19E450MW / S19E450BR / S19E450MR)10710.7 제품사양 (S22E450B / S22E450M / S22E450D)10810.8 제품사양 (S22E450BW / S22E450MW / S22E450DW)10910.9 제품사양 (S23E450B)11010.10 제품사양 (S24E450BL / S24E450DL)11110.11 제품사양 (S24E450B / S24E450M / S24E450D)11210.12 제품사양 (S24E650BW)11310.13 제품사양 (S27E450B / S27E450D)11410.14 절전 기능11510.15 표준신호모드표118기타 정보126서비스센터 안내126유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임127제품 고장이 아닌경우127소비자 과실로 고장이 난 경우127그 밖의 경우127폐 전자제품 처리 안내128삼성전자의 [녹색경영]128용어설명129찾아보기131Taille: 5,5 MoPages: 132Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresBefore Using the Product2Copyright2Icons used in this manual3Symbols for safety precautions3Cleaning4Cleaning4Securing the Installation Space5Precautions for storage5Safety Precautions6Electricity and Safety6Installation7Operation9Correct posture to use the product13Table Of Contents14Preparations181.1 Checking the Contents181.1.1 Removing the Packaging181.1.2 Checking the Components191.2 Parts201.2.1 Frontal Buttons201.2.2 Reverse Side221.3 Installation231.3.1 Attaching the Stand231.3.2 Adjusting the Product Tilt and Height241.3.3 Rotating the Monitor Screen241.3.4 Installing a Wall-mount Kit or Desktop Stand251.3.5 Anti-theft Lock261.4 "MagicRotation Auto"27Connecting and Using a Source Device282.1 Before Connecting282.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints282.2 Connecting and Using a PC292.2.1 Connecting to a PC292.2.2 Driver Installation302.2.3 Setting Optimum Resolution312.2.4 Changing the Resolution Using a PC322.3 Connecting Headphones352.4 Connecting the Product to a PC as a USB HUB362.4.1 Connecting a PC to the Product362.4.2 Utilizing the Product as a USB HUB362.5 Connecting the Power37Screen Setup383.1 MAGIC383.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright383.1.2 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color393.2 Brightness403.2.1 Configuring Brightness403.3 Contrast413.3.1 Configuring Contrast413.4 Sharpness423.4.1 Configuring Sharpness423.5 Response Time433.5.1 Configuring Response Time43Configuring Tint444.1 Red444.1.1 Configuring Red444.2 Green454.2.1 Configuring Green454.3 Blue464.3.1 Configuring Blue464.4 Color Tone474.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings474.5 Gamma484.5.1 Configuring Gamma48Resizing or Relocating the Screen495.1 PBP495.1.1 Mode495.1.2 Contrast505.2 Image Size515.2.1 Changing the Picture Size515.3 H-Position & V-Position525.3.1 Configuring H-Position or V-Position52Setup and Reset536.1 ECO536.1.1 Eco Motion Sensor536.1.2 Eco Light Sensor556.1.3 Eco Saving586.1.4 Eco Icon Display596.2 Menu Transparency616.2.1 Changing Menu Transparency616.3 Language626.3.1 Changing the Language626.4 PC/AV Mode636.4.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode636.5 Auto Source646.5.1 Configuring Auto Source646.6 Display Time656.6.1 Configuring Display Time656.7 Key Repeat Time666.7.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time666.8 Customized Key676.8.1 Configuring Customized Key676.9 Off Timer On/Off686.9.1 Configuring Off Timer On/Off686.10 Off Timer Setting696.10.1 Configuring Off Timer Setting696.11 Reset706.11.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)70INFORMATION Menu and Others717.1 INFORMATION717.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION717.2 Configuring Brightness in the Startup Screen71Troubleshooting Guide728.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center728.1.1 Testing the Product728.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency728.1.3 Check the followings.728.2 Q & A75Specifications779.1 General779.2 PowerSaver789.3 Standard Signal Mode Table79Appendix81Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE81Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)86Terminology87Index89Taille: 4,8 MoPages: 90Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster TB300 / TB3501Contents3Getting Started4Safety Precautions4List of Features11Accessories11Viewing the Control Panel12Viewing the Remote Control13How to Navigate Menus14Connecting to an Antenna14Plug & Play (Initial Setup)15Connections16Connecting to an AV Device16Connecting to an Audio Device17Connecting to a PC17Changing the Input Source19Basic Features20Channel Menu20Picture Menu22Sound Menu25Setup Menu26Support Menu30Advanced Features31Media Play (USB)31Other Information37Attaching a Wall Mount/Desktop Stand37Anti-theft Kensington Lock38Troubleshooting39Storage and Maintenance41License41Specifications42Taille: 8 MoPages: 43Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières목차2사용하기 전에7저작권7본문에서 사용되는 아이콘7청소하기8설치공간 확보하기9보관 시 주의사항9안전을 위한 주의사항10표시 내용10전원 관련11설치 관련12사용 관련14제품의 올바른 사용자세18준비191.1 내용물 확인하기191.1.1 구성품 확인하기191.2 각부의 명칭201.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명201.2.2 뒷면설명221.3 설치하기231.3.1 받침대 조립하기231.3.2 받침대 제거하기241.3.3 제품의 기울기 및 높낮이 조정251.3.4 도난 방지용 잠금장치26외부기기 연결 및 사용하기272.1 연결 전 확인 사항272.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.272.2 PC와 연결 및 사용하기272.2.1 PC와 연결하기272.2.2 헤드폰 연결하기292.2.3 전원 연결하기302.2.4 제품 드라이버 설치하기312.2.5 최적 해상도 설정하기32화면 설정하기333.1 밝기333.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면333.2 명암343.2.1 명암을 설정하려면343.3 선명도353.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면353.4 게임 모드363.4.1 게임 모드를 설정하려면363.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright373.5.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면373.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle (S22D390H / S22D393H)393.6.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle을 설정하려면393.7 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale403.7.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale을 설정하려면403.8 화면 크기413.8.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면413.9 HDMI 블랙 레벨433.9.1 HDMI 블랙 레벨을 설정하려면433.10 응답 시간 (S24D390HL / S24D393HL / S27D390H / S27D393H)443.10.1 응답 시간을 설정하려면443.11 수평 위치 & 수직 위치453.11.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면453.12 주파수 조정473.12.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면473.13 미세 조정483.13.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면48색상 설정하기494.1 적494.1.1 적을 설정하려면494.2 녹504.2.1 녹을 설정하려면504.3 청514.3.1 청을 설정하려면514.4 바탕색 조정524.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면524.5 감마 조정534.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면53OSD 조정하기545.1 메뉴 언어545.1.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면545.2 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치555.2.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면555.3 메뉴 표시 시간565.3.1 메뉴 표시 시간을 설정하려면565.4 투명도575.4.1 투명도를 설정하려면57설정 및 초기화하기586.1 전체 초기화586.1.1 전체 초기화를 설정하려면586.2 에코 세이빙596.2.1 에코 세이빙을 설정하려면596.3 꺼짐 예약606.3.1 꺼짐 예약를 설정하려면606.3.2 꺼짐 시간설정을 설정하려면616.4 PC/AV 모드626.4.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면626.5 키반복 시간설정636.5.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면636.6 입력 인식646.6.1 입력 인식을 설정하려면64정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴657.1 정보 표시657.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면657.2 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암 설정667.3 초기화면에서 음량 설정67소프트웨어 설치688.1 Easy Setting Box688.1.1 Easy Setting Box 설치688.1.2 Easy Setting Box 삭제69문제발생 시 해결방안709.1 고장신고 전 확인사항709.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기709.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기709.1.3 확인해 보세요.709.2 궁금해요 (Q&A)73제품규격7410.1 제품사양7410.2 절전 기능7610.3 표준신호모드표77기타 정보79서비스센터 안내79유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임80제품 고장이 아닌경우80소비자 과실로 고장이 난 경우80그 밖의 경우80폐 전자제품 처리 안내81삼성전자의 [녹색경영]81용어설명82찾아보기84Taille: 4,3 MoPages: 85Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières목차2사용하기 전에7저작권7본문에서 사용되는 아이콘7청소하기8설치공간 확보하기9보관 시 주의사항9안전을 위한 주의사항10표시 내용10전원 관련11설치 관련12사용 관련14제품의 올바른 사용자세18준비191.1 내용물 확인하기191.1.1 구성품 확인하기191.2 각부의 명칭201.2.1 버튼부201.2.2 바로가기 버튼 화면211.2.3 기능 버튼 화면221.2.4 뒷면설명241.3 설치하기251.3.1 받침대 장착하기251.3.2 받침대 제거하기261.3.3 제품의 기울기 조정271.3.4 걸이용 받침대 설치281.3.5 도난 방지용 잠금장치29외부기기 연결 및 사용하기302.1 연결 전 확인 사항302.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.302.2 PC와 연결 및 사용하기302.2.1 PC와 연결하기302.2.2 전원 연결하기322.2.3 제품 드라이버 설치하기332.2.4 최적해상도 설정하기34화면 설정하기353.1 밝기353.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면353.2 명암363.2.1 명암을 설정하려면363.3 선명도373.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면373.4 눈 보호 모드383.4.1 눈 보호 모드를 설정하려면383.5 게임 모드393.5.1 게임 모드를 설정하려면393.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright403.6.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면403.7 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle (S19E310HY / S22E310HY / S22E310H / S27E310H)423.7.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle을 설정하려면423.8 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale433.8.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale을 설정하려면433.9 화면 크기443.9.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면443.10 HDMI 블랙 레벨463.10.1 HDMI 블랙 레벨을 설정하려면463.11 응답 시간 (S24E310HL / S27E310H)473.11.1 응답 시간을 설정하려면473.12 수평 위치 & 수직 위치483.12.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면483.13 주파수 조정493.13.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면493.14 미세 조정503.14.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면50색상 설정하기514.1 적514.1.1 적을 설정하려면514.2 녹524.2.1 녹을 설정하려면524.3 청534.3.1 청을 설정하려면534.4 바탕색 조정544.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면544.5 감마 조정554.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면55OSD 조정하기565.1 메뉴 언어565.1.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면565.2 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치575.2.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면575.3 표시 시간585.3.1 표시 시간을 설정하려면585.4 투명도595.4.1 투명도를 설정하려면59설정 및 초기화하기606.1 전체 초기화606.1.1 전체 초기화를 설정하려면606.2 에코 세이빙 플러스616.2.1 에코 세이빙 플러스를 설정하려면616.3 꺼짐 예약626.3.1 꺼짐 예약를 설정하려면626.3.2 꺼짐 시간설정을 설정하려면636.4 PC/AV 모드646.4.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면646.5 키반복 시간설정656.5.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면656.6 입력 인식666.6.1 입력 인식을 설정하려면666.7 전원 LED 켜짐676.7.1 전원 LED 켜짐을 설정하려면67정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴687.1 정보 표시687.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면687.2 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암, 선명도 설정69소프트웨어 설치708.1 Easy Setting Box708.1.1 Easy Setting Box 설치708.1.2 Easy Setting Box 삭제71문제발생 시 해결방안729.1 고장신고 전 확인사항729.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기729.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기729.1.3 확인해 보세요.729.2 궁금해요 (Q&A)74제품규격7610.1 제품사양 (S19E310HY)7610.2 제품사양 (S22E310HY / S22E310H)7710.3 제품사양 (S24E310HL)7810.4 제품사양 (S27E310H)7910.5 절전 기능8010.6 표준신호모드표81기타 정보84서비스센터 안내84유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임85제품 고장이 아닌경우85소비자 과실로 고장이 난 경우85그 밖의 경우85폐 전자제품 처리 안내86삼성전자의 [녹색경영]86용어설명87찾아보기89Taille: 3,8 MoPages: 90Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Cleaning8Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Symbols10Electricity and Safety11Installation and Safety12Operation and Safety14Correct posture to use the product18Preparations191.1 Checking the Contents191.1.1 Removing the Packaging191.1.2 Checking the Components201.2 Parts211.2.1 Frontal Buttons211.2.2 Reverse Side231.2.3 Right Side View241.3 Installation251.3.1 Attaching the cradle251.3.2 Adjusting the Product Tilt and Height261.3.3 Rotating the Monitor261.3.4 Installing a Wall-mount Kit or Desktop Stand271.3.5 Anti-theft Lock28Connecting and Using a Source Device292.1 Before Connecting292.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints292.2 Connecting the Power292.3 Connecting and Using a PC302.3.1 Connecting to a PC302.3.2 Driver Installation342.3.3 Setting Optimum Resolution352.3.4 Changing the Resolution Using a PC36Screen Setup403.1 Brightness403.1.1 Configuring Brightness403.2 Contrast413.2.1 Configuring Contrast413.3 Sharpness423.3.1 Configuring Sharpness423.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright433.4.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright433.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle443.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle443.6 Image Size453.6.1 Changing the Image Size453.7 H-Position & V-Position463.7.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position463.8 Coarse473.8.1 Adjusting Coarse473.9 Fine483.9.1 Adjusting Fine48Configuring Tint494.1 Red494.1.1 Configuring Red494.2 Green504.2.1 Configuring Green504.3 Blue514.3.1 Configuring Blue514.4 Color Tone524.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings524.5 Gamma534.5.1 Configuring Gamma53Resizing or Relocating the Screen545.1 Language545.1.1 Configuring Language545.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position555.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position555.3 Display Time565.3.1 Configuring Display Time565.4 Transparency575.4.1 Changing Transparency57Setup and Reset586.1 Reset586.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)586.2 Eco Saving596.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving596.3 Off Timer606.3.1 Configuring Off Timer606.4 Turn Off After616.4.1 Configuring Turn Off After616.5 PC/AV Mode626.5.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode626.6 Key Repeat Time636.6.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time636.7 Source Detection646.7.1 Configuring Source Detection646.8 Customized Key656.8.1 Configuring Customized Key65INFORMATION Menu and Others667.1 INFORMATION667.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION667.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen67Installing the Software688.1 MagicTune688.1.1 What is "MagicTune"?688.1.2 Installing the Software688.1.3 Removing the Software698.2 MultiScreen708.2.1 Installing the Software708.2.2 Removing the Software718.3 MagicRotation728.3.1 Installing the Software728.3.2 Removing the Software74Troubleshooting Guide759.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center759.1.1 Testing the Product759.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency759.1.3 Check the following.759.2 Q & A77Specifications7910.1 General7910.2 PowerSaver8310.3 Standard Signal Mode Table84Appendix90Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE90Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)96Not a product defect96A Product damage caused by customer's fault96Others96Correct Disposal97Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)97Terminology98Index100Taille: 5,1 MoPages: 101Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Cleaning8Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Symbols10Electricity and Safety11Installation and Safety12Operation and Safety14Correct posture to use the product18Preparations191.1 Checking the Contents191.1.1 Removing the Packaging191.1.2 Checking the Components201.2 Parts211.2.1 Frontal Buttons211.2.2 Reverse Side231.2.3 Right Side View241.3 Installation251.3.1 Attaching the cradle251.3.2 Adjusting the Product Tilt and Height261.3.3 Rotating the Monitor261.3.4 Installing a Wall-mount Kit or Desktop Stand271.3.5 Anti-theft Lock28Connecting and Using a Source Device292.1 Before Connecting292.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints292.2 Connecting the Power292.3 Connecting and Using a PC302.3.1 Connecting to a PC302.3.2 Driver Installation342.3.3 Setting Optimum Resolution352.3.4 Changing the Resolution Using a PC36Screen Setup403.1 Brightness403.1.1 Configuring Brightness403.2 Contrast413.2.1 Configuring Contrast413.3 Sharpness423.3.1 Configuring Sharpness423.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright433.4.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright433.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle443.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle443.6 Image Size453.6.1 Changing the Image Size453.7 H-Position & V-Position463.7.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position463.8 Coarse473.8.1 Adjusting Coarse473.9 Fine483.9.1 Adjusting Fine48Configuring Tint494.1 Red494.1.1 Configuring Red494.2 Green504.2.1 Configuring Green504.3 Blue514.3.1 Configuring Blue514.4 Color Tone524.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings524.5 Gamma534.5.1 Configuring Gamma53Resizing or Relocating the Screen545.1 Language545.1.1 Configuring Language545.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position555.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position555.3 Display Time565.3.1 Configuring Display Time565.4 Transparency575.4.1 Changing Transparency57Setup and Reset586.1 Reset586.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)586.2 Eco Saving596.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving596.3 Off Timer606.3.1 Configuring Off Timer606.4 Turn Off After616.4.1 Configuring Turn Off After616.5 PC/AV Mode626.5.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode626.6 Key Repeat Time636.6.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time636.7 Source Detection646.7.1 Configuring Source Detection646.8 Customized Key656.8.1 Configuring Customized Key65INFORMATION Menu and Others667.1 INFORMATION667.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION667.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen67Installing the Software688.1 MagicTune688.1.1 What is "MagicTune"?688.1.2 Installing the Software688.1.3 Removing the Software698.2 MultiScreen708.2.1 Installing the Software708.2.2 Removing the Software718.3 MagicRotation728.3.1 Installing the Software728.3.2 Removing the Software74Troubleshooting Guide759.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center759.1.1 Testing the Product759.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency759.1.3 Check the following.759.2 Q & A77Specifications7910.1 General7910.2 PowerSaver8310.3 Standard Signal Mode Table84Appendix90Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE90Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)96Not a product defect96A Product damage caused by customer's fault96Others96Correct Disposal97Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)97Terminology98Index100Taille: 5,1 MoPages: 101Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Symbols for safety precautions7Cleaning8Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Electricity and Safety10Installation and Safety11Operation and Safety13Correct posture to use the product17Preparations181.1 Checking the Contents181.1.1 Removing the Packaging181.1.2 Checking the Components191.2 Parts201.2.1 Frontal Buttons201.2.2 Reverse Side221.3 Installation231.3.1 Attaching the Stand231.3.2 Adjusting the Product Tilt241.3.3 Installing a Wall-mount Kit or Desktop Stand251.3.4 Anti-theft Lock27Using "MHL(Mobile High-Definition Link)"282.1 "MHL" (Mobile High-Definition Link)282.1.1 Using "MHL"292.1.2 Disabling "MHL"31Connecting and Using a Source Device323.1 Before Connecting323.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints323.2 Connecting the Power323.3 Connecting and Using a PC333.3.1 Connecting to a PC333.3.2 Connecting to Headphones or Speakers353.3.3 Driver Installation373.3.4 Setting Optimum Resolution383.3.5 Changing the Resolution Using a PC39Screen Setup434.1 Brightness434.1.1 Configuring Brightness434.2 Contrast444.2.1 Configuring Contrast444.3 Sharpness454.3.1 Configuring Sharpness454.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright464.4.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright464.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle484.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle484.6 Coarse494.6.1 Adjusting Coarse494.7 Fine504.7.1 Adjusting Fine504.8 Response Time514.8.1 Configuring Response Time514.9 HDMI Black Level524.9.1 Configuring the HDMI Black Level Settings52Configuring Tint535.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color535.1.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Color535.2 Red545.2.1 Configuring Red545.3 Green555.3.1 Configuring Green555.4 Blue565.4.1 Configuring Blue565.5 Color Tone575.5.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings575.6 Gamma585.6.1 Configuring Gamma58Resizing or Relocating the Screen596.1 H-Position & V-Position596.1.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position596.2 Image Size606.2.1 Changing the Image Size606.3 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position616.3.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position61Setup and Reset627.1 Reset627.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)627.2 Language637.2.1 Changing the Language637.3 Eco Saving647.3.1 Configuring Eco Saving647.4 Off Timer On/Off657.4.1 Configuring Off Timer On/Off657.5 Off Timer Setting667.5.1 Configuring Off Timer Setting667.6 PC/AV Mode677.6.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode677.7 Key Repeat Time687.7.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time687.8 Auto Source697.8.1 Configuring Auto Source697.9 Display Time707.9.1 Configuring Display Time707.10 Menu Transparency717.10.1 Changing Menu Transparency71INFORMATION Menu and Others728.1 INFORMATION728.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION728.2 Configuring Volume in the Initial Screen738.2.1 Volume738.2.2 Sound Mode74Installing the Software759.1 Magic Tune759.1.1 What is MagicTune?759.1.2 Installing the Software759.1.3 Removing the Software769.2 MultiScreen779.2.1 Installing the Software779.2.2 Removing the Software78Troubleshooting Guide7910.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center7910.1.1 Testing the Product7910.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency7910.1.3 Check the following.7910.2 Q & A82Specifications8411.1 General8411.2 PowerSaver8611.3 Standard Signal Mode Table87Appendix90Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE90Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)96Not a product defect96A Product damage caused by customer's fault96Others96Correct Disposal98Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)98Terminology99Index101Taille: 4,3 MoPages: 102Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Symbols10Electricity and Safety11Installation and Safety12Operation and Safety14Correct posture to use the product18Preparations191.1 Checking the Contents191.1.1 Checking the Components191.2 Parts201.2.1 Control Panel201.2.2 Direct Key guide211.2.3 Function Key Guide221.2.4 Reverse Side241.3 Installation251.3.1 Attaching the Stand251.3.2 Removing the Stand261.3.3 Adjusting the Product Tilt271.3.4 Installing a Wall-mount Kit or Desktop Stand281.3.5 Anti-theft Lock29Connecting and Using a Source Device302.1 Before Connecting302.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints302.2 Connecting and Using a PC302.2.1 Connecting to a PC302.2.2 Connecting the Power322.2.3 Driver Installation332.2.4 Setting Optimum Resolution34Screen Setup353.1 Brightness353.1.1 Configuring Brightness353.2 Contrast363.2.1 Configuring Contrast363.3 Sharpness373.3.1 Configuring Sharpness373.4 Eye Saver Mode383.4.1 Configuring Eye Saver Mode383.5 Game Mode393.5.1 Configuring Game Mode393.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright403.6.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright403.7 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle (S19E310HY / S22E310HY / S22E310H / S27E310H)423.7.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle423.8 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale443.8.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale443.9 Image Size463.9.1 Changing the Image Size463.10 HDMI Black Level483.10.1 Configuring the HDMI Black Level Settings483.11 Response Time (S24E310HL / S27E310H)503.11.1 Configuring the Response Time503.12 H-Position & V-Position513.12.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position513.13 Coarse533.13.1 Adjusting Coarse533.14 Fine543.14.1 Adjusting Fine54Configuring Tint554.1 Red554.1.1 Configuring Red554.2 Green564.2.1 Configuring Green564.3 Blue574.3.1 Configuring Blue574.4 Color Tone584.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings584.5 Gamma594.5.1 Configuring Gamma59Coordinating OSD605.1 Language605.1.1 Configuring Language605.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position615.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position615.3 Display Time625.3.1 Configuring Display Time625.4 Transparency635.4.1 Changing Transparency63Setup and Reset646.1 Reset All646.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset All)646.2 Eco Saving Plus656.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving Plus656.3 Off Timer666.3.1 Configuring Off Timer666.3.2 Configuring Turn Off After676.4 PC/AV Mode686.4.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode686.5 Key Repeat Time696.5.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time696.6 Source Detection706.6.1 Configuring Source Detection706.7 Power LED On716.7.1 Configuring Power LED On71INFORMATION Menu and Others727.1 INFORMATION727.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION727.2 Configuring Brightness, Contrast and Sharpness from the Initial Screen73Installing the Software748.1 Easy Setting Box748.1.1 Installing the Software748.1.2 Removing the Software75Troubleshooting Guide769.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center769.1.1 Testing the Product769.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency769.1.3 Check the following.769.2 Q & A79Specifications8110.1 General (S19E310HY)8110.2 General (S22E310HY / S22E310H)8210.3 General (S24E310HL)8310.4 General (S27E310H)8410.5 PowerSaver8510.6 Standard Signal Mode Table86Appendix89Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)89Not a product defect89A Product damage caused by customer's fault89Others89Correct Disposal90Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)90Terminology91Index93Taille: 7,2 MoPages: 94Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product6Copyright6Icons used in this manual6Cleaning7Securing the Installation Space8Precautions for storage8Safety Precautions9Symbols9Electricity and Safety10Installation and Safety11Operation and Safety13Correct posture to use the product17Preparations181.1 Checking the Contents181.1.1 Checking the Components181.2 Parts191.2.1 Frontal Buttons191.2.2 Reverse Side211.3 Installation221.3.1 Attaching the Stand221.3.2 Removing the Stand231.3.3 Adjusting the Product Tilt241.3.4 Anti-theft Lock25Connecting and Using a Source Device272.1 Before Connecting272.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints272.2 Connecting and Using a PC272.2.1 Connecting to a PC272.2.2 Connecting the Power292.2.3 Driver Installation302.2.4 Setting Optimum Resolution31Screen Setup323.1 Brightness323.1.1 Configuring Brightness323.2 Contrast333.2.1 Configuring Contrast333.3 Sharpness343.3.1 Configuring Sharpness343.4 Game Mode353.4.1 Configuring Game Mode353.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright363.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright363.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle (S22D360H / S22D391H)383.6.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle383.7 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale403.7.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale403.8 Image Size413.8.1 Changing the Image Size413.9 HDMI Black Level433.9.1 Configuring the HDMI Black Level Settings433.10 Response Time (S24D360HL / S24D391HL / S27D360H / S27D391H)443.10.1 Configuring the Response Time443.11 H-Position & V-Position453.11.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position453.12 Coarse473.12.1 Adjusting Coarse473.13 Fine483.13.1 Adjusting Fine48Configuring Tint494.1 Red494.1.1 Configuring Red494.2 Green504.2.1 Configuring Green504.3 Blue514.3.1 Configuring Blue514.4 Color Tone524.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings524.5 Gamma534.5.1 Configuring Gamma53Coordinating OSD545.1 Language545.1.1 Configuring Language545.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position555.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position555.3 Display Time565.3.1 Configuring Display Time565.4 Transparency575.4.1 Changing Transparency57Setup and Reset586.1 Reset All586.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset All)586.2 Eco Saving596.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving596.3 Off Timer606.3.1 Configuring Off Timer606.3.2 Configuring Turn Off After616.4 PC/AV Mode626.4.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode626.5 Key Repeat Time636.5.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time636.6 Source Detection646.6.1 Configuring Source Detection64INFORMATION Menu and Others657.1 INFORMATION657.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION657.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen66Installing the Software678.1 Easy Setting Box678.1.1 Installing the Software678.1.2 Removing the Software68Troubleshooting Guide699.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center699.1.1 Testing the Product699.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency699.1.3 Check the following.699.2 Q & A72Specifications7410.1 General7410.2 PowerSaver7510.3 Standard Signal Mode Table76Appendix78Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE78Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)84Not a product defect84A Product damage caused by customer's fault84Others84Correct Disposal85Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)85Terminology86Index88Taille: 5,7 MoPages: 89Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Symbols for safety precautions7Cleaning8Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Electricity and Safety10Installation and Safety11Operation and Safety13Correct posture to use the product16Preparations171.1 Checking the Contents171.1.1 Removing the Packaging171.1.2 Checking the Components181.2 Parts191.2.1 Frontal Buttons191.2.2 Reverse Side211.3 Installation221.3.1 Attaching the Stand221.3.2 Adjusting the Product Tilt and Height231.3.3 Rotating the Monitor231.3.4 Installing a Wall-mount Kit or Desktop Stand241.3.5 Anti-theft Lock25Connecting and Using a Source Device262.1 Before Connecting262.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints262.2 Connecting the Power262.3 Connecting and Using a PC272.3.1 Connecting to a PC272.3.2 Driver Installation302.3.3 Setting Optimum Resolution312.3.4 Changing the Resolution Using a PC32Screen Setup363.1 Brightness363.1.1 Configuring Brightness363.2 Contrast373.2.1 Configuring Contrast373.3 Sharpness383.3.1 Configuring Sharpness383.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright393.4.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright393.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle403.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle403.6 Coarse413.6.1 Adjusting Coarse413.7 Fine423.7.1 Adjusting Fine42Configuring Tint434.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color434.1.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Color434.2 Red444.2.1 Configuring Red444.3 Green454.3.1 Configuring Green454.4 Blue464.4.1 Configuring Blue464.5 Color Tone474.5.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings474.6 Gamma484.6.1 Configuring Gamma48Resizing or Relocating the Screen495.1 H-Position & V-Position495.1.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position495.2 Image Size505.2.1 Changing the Image Size505.3 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position525.3.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position52Setup and Reset536.1 Reset536.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)536.2 Language546.2.1 Changing the Language546.3 Eco Saving556.3.1 Configuring Eco Saving556.4 Off Timer On/Off566.4.1 Configuring Off Timer On/Off566.5 Off Timer Setting576.5.1 Configuring Off Timer Setting576.6 PC/AV Mode586.6.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode586.7 Key Repeat Time596.7.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time596.8 Customized Key606.8.1 Configuring Customized Key606.9 Auto Source616.9.1 Configuring Auto Source616.10 Display Time626.10.1 Configuring Display Time626.11 Menu Transparency636.11.1 Changing Menu Transparency63INFORMATION Menu and Others647.1 INFORMATION647.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION647.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen65Installing the Software668.1 Magic Tune668.1.1 What is MagicTune?668.1.2 Installing the Software668.1.3 Removing the Software678.2 MultiScreen688.2.1 Installing the Software688.2.2 Removing the Software698.3 MagicRotation708.3.1 Installing the Software708.3.2 Removing the Software72Troubleshooting Guide739.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center739.1.1 Testing the Product739.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency739.1.3 Check the following.739.2 Q & A76Specifications7810.1 General7810.2 PowerSaver8210.3 Standard Signal Mode Table83Appendix89Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE89Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)95Not a product defect95A Product damage caused by customer's fault95Others95Correct Disposal96Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)96Terminology97Index99Taille: 4 MoPages: 100Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Cleaning8Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Symbols10Electricity and Safety11Installation and Safety12Operation and Safety14Correct posture to use the product17Preparations181.1 Checking the Contents181.1.1 Removing the Packaging181.1.2 Checking the Components191.2 Parts201.2.1 Frontal Buttons201.2.2 Reverse Side221.2.3 Right Side View241.3 Installation251.3.1 Attaching the Stand251.3.2 Adjusting the Product Tilt and Height261.3.3 Rotating the Monitor261.3.4 Installing a Wall-mount Kit or Desktop Stand271.3.5 Anti-theft Lock28Connecting and Using a Source Device292.1 Before Connecting292.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints292.2 Connecting the Power292.3 Connecting and Using a PC302.3.1 Connecting to a PC302.3.2 Driver Installation372.3.3 Setting Optimum Resolution382.3.4 Changing the Resolution Using a PC39Screen Setup433.1 Brightness433.1.1 Configuring Brightness433.2 Contrast443.2.1 Configuring Contrast443.3 Sharpness453.3.1 Configuring Sharpness453.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright463.4.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright463.5 Image Size483.5.1 Changing the Image Size483.6 HDMI Black Level503.6.1 Configuring the HDMI Black Level Settings503.7 Response Time513.7.1 Configuring Response Time513.8 H-Position & V-Position523.8.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position523.9 Coarse533.9.1 Adjusting Coarse533.10 Fine543.10.1 Adjusting Fine54Configuring Tint554.1 Red554.1.1 Configuring Red554.2 Green564.2.1 Configuring Green564.3 Blue574.3.1 Configuring Blue574.4 Color Tone584.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings584.5 Gamma594.5.1 Configuring Gamma59Resizing or Relocating the Screen605.1 Language605.1.1 Changing the Language605.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position615.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position615.3 Display Time625.3.1 Configuring Display Time625.4 Transparency635.4.1 Changing Transparency63Setup and Reset646.1 Reset646.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)646.2 Eco Saving656.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving656.3 Off Timer666.3.1 Configuring Off Timer666.4 Turn Off After676.4.1 Configuring Turn Off After676.5 PC/AV Mode686.5.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode686.6 Key Repeat Time706.6.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time706.7 Source Detection716.7.1 Configuring Source Detection716.8 Customized Key726.8.1 Configuring Customized Key72INFORMATION Menu and Others737.1 INFORMATION737.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION737.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen747.3 Configuring Volume in the Initial Screen75Installing the Software768.1 Magic Tune768.1.1 What is MagicTune?768.1.2 Installing the Software768.1.3 Removing the Software778.2 MultiScreen788.2.1 Installing the Software788.2.2 Removing the Software798.3 MagicRotation808.3.1 Installing the Software808.3.2 Removing the Software82Troubleshooting Guide839.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center839.1.1 Testing the Product839.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency839.1.3 Check the following.839.2 Q & A86Specifications8810.1 General8810.2 PowerSaver9410.3 Standard Signal Mode Table95Appendix103Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE103Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)109Not a product defect109A Product damage caused by customer's fault109Others109Correct Disposal110Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)110Terminology111Index113Taille: 5,7 MoPages: 114Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Cleaning8Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Symbols10Electricity and Safety11Installation and Safety12Operation and Safety14Correct posture to use the product17Preparations181.1 Checking the Contents181.1.1 Removing the Packaging181.1.2 Checking the Components191.2 Parts201.2.1 Frontal Buttons201.2.2 Reverse Side221.2.3 Right Side View241.3 Installation251.3.1 Attaching the Stand251.3.2 Adjusting the Product Tilt and Height261.3.3 Rotating the Monitor261.3.4 Installing a Wall-mount Kit or Desktop Stand271.3.5 Anti-theft Lock28Connecting and Using a Source Device292.1 Before Connecting292.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints292.2 Connecting the Power292.3 Connecting and Using a PC302.3.1 Connecting to a PC302.3.2 Driver Installation372.3.3 Setting Optimum Resolution382.3.4 Changing the Resolution Using a PC39Screen Setup433.1 Brightness433.1.1 Configuring Brightness433.2 Contrast443.2.1 Configuring Contrast443.3 Sharpness453.3.1 Configuring Sharpness453.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright463.4.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright463.5 Image Size483.5.1 Changing the Image Size483.6 HDMI Black Level503.6.1 Configuring the HDMI Black Level Settings503.7 Response Time513.7.1 Configuring Response Time513.8 H-Position & V-Position523.8.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position523.9 Coarse533.9.1 Adjusting Coarse533.10 Fine543.10.1 Adjusting Fine54Configuring Tint554.1 Red554.1.1 Configuring Red554.2 Green564.2.1 Configuring Green564.3 Blue574.3.1 Configuring Blue574.4 Color Tone584.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings584.5 Gamma594.5.1 Configuring Gamma59Resizing or Relocating the Screen605.1 Language605.1.1 Changing the Language605.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position615.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position615.3 Display Time625.3.1 Configuring Display Time625.4 Transparency635.4.1 Changing Transparency63Setup and Reset646.1 Reset646.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)646.2 Eco Saving656.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving656.3 Off Timer666.3.1 Configuring Off Timer666.4 Turn Off After676.4.1 Configuring Turn Off After676.5 PC/AV Mode686.5.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode686.6 Key Repeat Time706.6.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time706.7 Source Detection716.7.1 Configuring Source Detection716.8 Customized Key726.8.1 Configuring Customized Key72INFORMATION Menu and Others737.1 INFORMATION737.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION737.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen747.3 Configuring Volume in the Initial Screen75Installing the Software768.1 Magic Tune768.1.1 What is MagicTune?768.1.2 Installing the Software768.1.3 Removing the Software778.2 MultiScreen788.2.1 Installing the Software788.2.2 Removing the Software798.3 MagicRotation808.3.1 Installing the Software808.3.2 Removing the Software82Troubleshooting Guide839.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center839.1.1 Testing the Product839.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency839.1.3 Check the following.839.2 Q & A86Specifications8810.1 General8810.2 PowerSaver9410.3 Standard Signal Mode Table95Appendix103Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE103Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)109Not a product defect109A Product damage caused by customer's fault109Others109Correct Disposal110Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)110Terminology111Index113Taille: 5,7 MoPages: 114Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product6Copyright6Icons used in this manual6Cleaning7Securing the Installation Space8Precautions for storage8Safety Precautions9Symbols9Electricity and Safety10Installation and Safety11Operation and Safety13Correct posture to use the product17Preparations181.1 Checking the Contents181.1.1 Checking the Components181.2 Parts191.2.1 Frontal Buttons191.2.2 Reverse Side211.3 Installation221.3.1 Attaching the Stand221.3.2 Removing the Stand231.3.3 Adjusting the Product Tilt241.3.4 Anti-theft Lock25Connecting and Using a Source Device262.1 Before Connecting262.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints262.2 Connecting and Using a PC262.2.1 Connecting to a PC262.2.2 Connecting the Power282.2.3 Driver Installation292.2.4 Setting Optimum Resolution30Screen Setup313.1 Brightness313.1.1 Configuring Brightness313.2 Contrast323.2.1 Configuring Contrast323.3 Sharpness333.3.1 Configuring Sharpness333.4 Game Mode343.4.1 Configuring Game Mode343.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright353.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright353.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle (S22D360H / S22D391H)373.6.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle373.7 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale393.7.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale393.8 Image Size403.8.1 Changing the Image Size403.9 HDMI Black Level423.9.1 Configuring the HDMI Black Level Settings423.10 Response Time (S24D360HL / S24D391HL / S27D360H / S27D391H)433.10.1 Configuring the Response Time433.11 H-Position & V-Position443.11.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position443.12 Coarse463.12.1 Adjusting Coarse463.13 Fine473.13.1 Adjusting Fine47Configuring Tint484.1 Red484.1.1 Configuring Red484.2 Green494.2.1 Configuring Green494.3 Blue504.3.1 Configuring Blue504.4 Color Tone514.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings514.5 Gamma524.5.1 Configuring Gamma52Coordinating OSD535.1 Language535.1.1 Configuring Language535.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position545.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position545.3 Display Time555.3.1 Configuring Display Time555.4 Transparency565.4.1 Changing Transparency56Setup and Reset576.1 Reset All576.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset All)576.2 Eco Saving586.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving586.3 Off Timer596.3.1 Configuring Off Timer596.3.2 Configuring Turn Off After606.4 PC/AV Mode616.4.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode616.5 Key Repeat Time626.5.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time626.6 Source Detection636.6.1 Configuring Source Detection63INFORMATION Menu and Others647.1 INFORMATION647.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION647.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen65Installing the Software668.1 Easy Setting Box668.1.1 Installing the Software668.1.2 Removing the Software67Troubleshooting Guide689.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center689.1.1 Testing the Product689.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency689.1.3 Check the following.689.2 Q & A71Specifications7310.1 General7310.2 PowerSaver7510.3 Standard Signal Mode Table76Appendix78Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE78Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)84Not a product defect84A Product damage caused by customer's fault84Others84Correct Disposal86Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)86Terminology87Index89Taille: 4 MoPages: 90Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product10Copyright10Icons used in this manual10Cleaning11Securing the Installation Space12Precautions for storage12Safety Precautions13Symbols for safety precautions13Electricity and Safety14Installation and Safety15Operation17Correct posture to use the product21Preparations221.1 Checking the Contents221.1.1 Removing the Packaging221.1.2 Checking the Components231.2 Parts (S19C350NW)241.2.1 Frontal Button241.2.2 Direct Key guide251.2.3 Function Key Guide261.3 Parts (S22C350B / S23C350B / S24C350BL / S22C350H / S23C340H / S23C350H / S24C340HL / S24C350H / S24C350HL / S27C350H)281.3.1 Frontal Button281.3.2 Direct Key guide301.3.3 Function Key Guide311.3.4 Reverse Side (S19C350NW)331.3.5 Reverse Side (S22C350B / S23C350B / S24C350BL)341.3.6 Reverse Side (S22C350H / S23C340H / S23C350H / S24C340HL / S24C350H / S24C350HL / S27C350H)351.4 Installation361.4.1 Attaching the Stand361.4.2 Removing the Stand371.4.3 Adjusting the Product Tilt381.4.4 Anti-theft Lock39Connecting and Using a Source Device402.1 Before Connecting402.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints402.2 Connecting and Using a PC412.2.1 Connection Using the D-SUB Cable (Analog Type)412.2.2 Connection Using the DVI Cable (S22C350B / S23C350B / S23C350BL)422.2.3 Connection Using an DVI-HDMI Cable (S22C350B / S23C350B / S23C350BL)422.2.4 Connection Using an HDMI Cable (S22C350H / S23C340H / S23C350H / S24C340HL / S24C350H / S24C350HL / S27C350H)432.2.5 Connection Using an HDMI-DVI Cable (S22C350H / S23C340H / S23C350H /S24C340HL / S24C350H / S24C350HL / S27C350H)432.2.6 Connecting to Headphones or Speakers (S22C350H / S23C340H / S23C350H /S24C340HL / S24C350H / S24C350HL / S27C350H)442.2.7 Connecting the Power442.2.8 Tidying Up the Connected Cables452.2.9 Changing the sound settings on Windows462.2.10 Driver Installation472.2.11 Setting Optimum Resolution482.2.12 Changing the Resolution Using a PC49Screen Setup (S19C350NW)533.1 Brightness533.1.1 Configuring Brightness533.2 Contrast543.2.1 Configuring Contrast543.3 Sharpness553.3.1 Configuring Sharpness553.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright563.4.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright563.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle573.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle573.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale583.6.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale583.7 Image Size593.7.1 Changing the Image Size593.8 H-Position & V-Position603.8.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position603.9 Coarse613.9.1 Adjusting Coarse613.10 Fine623.10.1 Adjusting Fine62Screen Setup (S22C350B / S23C350B / S24C350BL)634.1 Brightness634.1.1 Configuring Brightness634.2 Contrast644.2.1 Configuring Contrast644.3 Sharpness654.3.1 Configuring Sharpness654.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright664.4.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright664.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle674.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle674.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale684.6.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale684.7 Image Size694.7.1 Changing the Image Size694.8 H-Position & V-Position714.8.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position714.9 Coarse724.9.1 Adjusting Coarse724.10 Fine734.10.1 Adjusting Fine73Screen Setup (S22C350H / S23C340H / S23C350H / S24C340HL / S24C350H / S24C350HL / S27C350H)745.1 Brightness745.1.1 Configuring Brightness745.2 Contrast755.2.1 Configuring Contrast755.3 Sharpness765.3.1 Configuring Sharpness765.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright775.4.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright775.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle795.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle795.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale805.6.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale805.7 Image Size815.7.1 Changing the Image Size815.8 HDMI Black Level835.8.1 Configuring the HDMI Black Level Settings835.9 H-Position & V-Position845.9.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position845.10 Coarse855.10.1 Adjusting Coarse855.11 Fine865.11.1 Adjusting Fine86Configuring Tint876.1 Red876.1.1 Configuring Red876.2 Green886.2.1 Configuring Green886.3 Blue896.3.1 Configuring Blue896.4 Color Tone906.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings906.5 Gamma916.5.1 Configuring Gamma91Coordinating OSD927.1 Language927.1.1 Changing the Language927.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position937.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position937.3 Display Time947.3.1 Configuring Display Time947.4 Transparency957.4.1 Changing Transparency95Setup and Reset (S19C350NW)968.1 Reset968.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)968.2 Eco Saving978.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving978.3 Off Timer988.3.1 Configuring Off Timer988.4 Turn Off After998.4.1 Configuring Turn Off After998.5 Key Repeat Time1008.5.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time1008.6 Power LED On1018.6.1 Configuring Power LED On101Setup and Reset (S22C350B / S23C350B / S24C350BL)1029.1 Reset1029.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)1029.2 Eco Saving1039.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving1039.3 Off Timer1049.3.1 Configuring Off Timer1049.4 Turn Off After1059.4.1 Configuring Turn Off After1059.5 PC/AV Mode1069.5.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode1069.6 Key Repeat Time1079.6.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time1079.7 Source Detection1089.7.1 Configuring Source Detection1089.8 Power LED On1099.8.1 Configuring Power LED On109Setup and Reset (S22C350H / S23C340H / S23C350H / S24C340HL / S24C350H / S24C350HL / S27C350H)11010.1 Reset11010.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)11010.2 Eco Saving11110.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving11110.3 Off Timer11210.3.1 Configuring Off Timer11210.4 Turn Off After11310.4.1 Configuring Turn Off After11310.5 PC/AV Mode11410.5.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode11410.6 Key Repeat Time11510.6.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time11510.7 Source Detection11610.7.1 Configuring Source Detection11610.8 Power LED On11710.8.1 Configuring Power LED On117INFORMATION Menu and Others11811.1 INFORMATION11811.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION11811.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen11911.3 Configuring Volume in the Initial Screen120Installing the Software12112.1 MagicTune12112.1.1 What is "MagicTune"?12112.1.2 Installing the Software12112.1.3 Removing the Software12212.2 MultiScreen12312.2.1 Installing the Software12312.2.2 Removing the Software124Troubleshooting Guide12513.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center12513.1.1 Testing the Product12513.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency12513.1.3 Check the following.12513.2 Q & A128Specifications13014.1 General (S19C350NW)13014.2 General (S22C350B / S23C350B / S24C350BL)13214.3 General (S22C350H / S23C340H)13414.4 General (S23C350H / S24C340HL)13614.5 General (S24C350HL / S24C350H / S27C350H)13814.6 PowerSaver14014.7 Standard Signal Mode Table142Appendix145Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE145Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)151Not a product defect151A Product damage caused by customer's fault151Others151Correct Disposal153Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)153Terminology154Index156Taille: 5 MoPages: 157Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Symbols10Electricity and Safety11Installation and Safety12Operation and Safety14Correct posture to use the product18Preparations191.1 Checking the Contents191.1.1 Checking the Components191.2 Parts201.2.1 Frontal Buttons201.2.2 Reverse Side231.3 Installation241.3.1 Attaching the Stand241.3.2 Removing the Stand251.3.3 Adjusting the Product Tilt261.3.4 Anti-theft Lock27Connecting and Using a Source Device282.1 Before Connecting282.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints282.2 Connecting and Using a PC282.2.1 Connecting to a PC282.2.2 Connecting to Headphones302.2.3 Connecting the Power312.2.4 Driver Installation322.2.5 Setting Optimum Resolution33Screen Setup343.1 Brightness343.1.1 Configuring Brightness343.2 Contrast353.2.1 Configuring Contrast353.3 Sharpness363.3.1 Configuring Sharpness363.4 Game Mode373.4.1 Configuring Game Mode373.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright383.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright383.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle (S22D390H / S22D393H)403.6.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle403.7 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale423.7.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale423.8 Image Size433.8.1 Changing the Image Size433.9 HDMI Black Level453.9.1 Configuring the HDMI Black Level Settings453.10 Response Time (S24D390HL / S24D393HL / S27D390H / S27D393H)463.10.1 Configuring the Response Time463.11 H-Position & V-Position473.11.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position473.12 Coarse493.12.1 Adjusting Coarse493.13 Fine503.13.1 Adjusting Fine50Configuring Tint514.1 Red514.1.1 Configuring Red514.2 Green524.2.1 Configuring Green524.3 Blue534.3.1 Configuring Blue534.4 Color Tone544.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings544.5 Gamma554.5.1 Configuring Gamma55Coordinating OSD565.1 Language565.1.1 Configuring Language565.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position575.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position575.3 Display Time585.3.1 Configuring Display Time585.4 Transparency595.4.1 Changing Transparency59Setup and Reset606.1 Reset All606.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset All)606.2 Eco Saving616.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving616.3 Off Timer626.3.1 Configuring Off Timer626.3.2 Configuring Turn Off After636.4 PC/AV Mode646.4.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode646.5 Key Repeat Time656.5.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time656.6 Source Detection666.6.1 Configuring Source Detection66INFORMATION Menu and Others677.1 INFORMATION677.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION677.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen687.3 Configuring Volume in the Initial Screen69Installing the Software708.1 Easy Setting Box708.1.1 Installing the Software708.1.2 Removing the Software71Troubleshooting Guide729.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center729.1.1 Testing the Product729.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency729.1.3 Check the following.729.2 Q & A75Specifications7710.1 General7710.2 PowerSaver7910.3 Standard Signal Mode Table80Appendix82Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE82Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)91Not a product defect91A Product damage caused by customer's fault91Others91Correct Disposal93Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)93Terminology94Index96Taille: 4,2 MoPages: 97Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product8Copyright8Icons used in this manual8Cleaning9Securing the Installation Space10Precautions for storage10Safety Precautions11Symbols for safety precautions11Electricity and Safety12Installation and Safety13Operation15Correct posture to use the product19Preparations201.1 Checking the Contents201.1.1 Checking the Components201.2 Parts211.2.1 Frontal Button211.2.2 Reverse Side321.3 Installation351.3.1 Attaching the Stand (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S19D300NY)351.3.2 Attaching the Stand (S20D300BY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300BY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S22D300NY / S24D300B / S24D300BL / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)361.3.3 Removing the Stand (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S19D300NY)371.3.4 Removing the Stand (S20D300BY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300BY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S22D300NY / S24D300B / S24D300BL / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)381.3.5 Installing a Wall-mount Kit or Desktop Stand (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S19D300NY / S24D300H (LS24D300HSM* model only))391.3.6 Adjusting the Product Tilt401.3.7 Anti-theft Lock41Connecting and Using a Source Device422.1 Before Connecting422.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints422.2 Connecting and Using a PC422.2.1 Connection Using the D-SUB Cable (Analog Type)422.2.2 Connection Using the DVI Cable (S20D300BY / S22D300BY / S24D300B / S24D300BL)432.2.3 Connection Using the DVI-HDMI Cable (S20D300BY / S22D300BY / S24D300B / S24D300BL)442.2.4 Connection Using the HDMI Cable (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)442.2.5 Connection Using the HDMI-DVI Cable (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)452.2.6 Connecting the Power462.2.7 Driver Installation482.2.8 Setting Optimum Resolution49Screen Setup503.1 Brightness503.1.1 Configuring Brightness503.2 Contrast513.2.1 Configuring Contrast513.3 Sharpness523.3.1 Configuring Sharpness523.4 Game Mode533.4.1 Configuring Game Mode533.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright543.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright543.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle (S20D300H / S20D340H / S24D300B / S24D300H / S24D340H)563.6.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle563.7 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale583.7.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale583.8 Image Size593.8.1 Changing the Image Size593.9 HDMI Black Level (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)613.9.1 Configuring the HDMI Black Level Settings613.10 Response Time (S24D300H / S24D340H)633.10.1 Configuring the Response Time633.11 H-Position & V-Position643.11.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position643.12 Coarse663.12.1 Adjusting Coarse663.13 Fine673.13.1 Adjusting Fine67Configuring Tint684.1 Red684.1.1 Configuring Red684.2 Green694.2.1 Configuring Green694.3 Blue704.3.1 Configuring Blue704.4 Color Tone714.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings714.5 Gamma724.5.1 Configuring Gamma72Coordinating OSD735.1 Language735.1.1 Configuring Language735.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position745.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position745.3 Display Time755.3.1 Configuring Display Time755.4 Transparency765.4.1 Changing Transparency76Setup and Reset776.1 Reset All776.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset All)776.2 Eco Saving786.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving786.3 Off Timer796.3.1 Configuring Off Timer796.3.2 Configuring Turn Off After806.4 PC/AV Mode (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S20D300BY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300BY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S24D300B / S24D300BL / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)816.4.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode816.5 Key Repeat Time836.5.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time836.6 Source Detection (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S20D300BY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY / S22D300BY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S24D300B / S24D300BL / S24D300H / S24D340H / S24D300HL / S24D340HL)846.6.1 Configuring Source Detection84INFORMATION Menu and Others857.1 INFORMATION857.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION857.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen86Installing the Software878.1 Easy Setting Box878.1.1 Installing the Software878.1.2 Removing the Software88Troubleshooting Guide899.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center899.1.1 Testing the Product899.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency899.1.3 Check the following.899.2 Q & A92Specifications9410.1 General (S19D300HY / S19D340HY / S19D300NY)9410.2 General (S20D300BY / S20D300H / S20D340H / S20D300HY / S20D340HY)9610.3 General (S22D300BY / S22D300HY / S22D340HY / S22D300NY)9710.4 General (S24D300BL / S24D300HL / S24D300H / S24D300B)9810.5 General (S24D340HL / S24D340H)10010.6 PowerSaver10210.7 Standard Signal Mode Table104Appendix109Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE109Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)115Not a product defect115A Product damage caused by customer's fault115Others115Correct Disposal116Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)116Terminology117Index119Taille: 5 MoPages: 120Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Symbols10Electricity and Safety11Installation and Safety12Operation and Safety14Correct posture to use the product18Preparations191.1 Checking the Contents191.1.1 Removing the Packaging191.1.2 Checking the Components201.2 Parts211.2.1 Frontal Buttons211.2.2 Reverse Side231.3 Installation241.3.1 Attaching the cradle241.3.2 Adjusting the Product Tilt and Height251.3.3 Rotating the Monitor251.3.4 Anti-theft Lock261.4 "MagicRotation Auto"27Connecting and Using a Source Device282.1 Before Connecting282.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints282.2 Connecting and Using a PC292.2.1 Connecting to a PC292.2.2 Connecting the Power312.2.3 Driver Installation332.2.4 Setting Optimum Resolution342.2.5 Changing the Resolution Using a PC35Screen Setup393.1 Brightness393.1.1 Configuring Brightness393.2 Contrast403.2.1 Configuring Contrast403.3 Sharpness413.3.1 Configuring Sharpness413.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright423.4.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright423.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale443.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale443.6 Image Size453.6.1 Changing the Image Size453.7 HDMI Black Level473.7.1 Configuring the HDMI Black Level Settings473.8 Response Time483.8.1 Configuring Response Time483.9 H-Position & V-Position493.9.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position493.10 Coarse503.10.1 Adjusting Coarse503.11 Fine513.11.1 Adjusting Fine51Configuring Tint524.1 Red524.1.1 Configuring Red524.2 Green534.2.1 Configuring Green534.3 Blue544.3.1 Configuring Blue544.4 Color Tone554.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings554.5 Gamma564.5.1 Configuring Gamma56Coordinating OSD575.1 Language575.1.1 Configuring Language575.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position585.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position585.3 Display Time595.3.1 Configuring Display Time595.4 Transparency605.4.1 Changing Transparency60Setup and Reset616.1 Reset616.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)616.2 Eco Saving626.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving626.3 Off Timer636.3.1 Configuring Off Timer636.4 Turn Off After646.4.1 Configuring Turn Off After646.5 PC/AV Mode656.5.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode656.6 Key Repeat Time666.6.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time666.7 Source Detection676.7.1 Configuring Source Detection676.8 Customized Key686.8.1 Configuring Customized Key68INFORMATION Menu and Others697.1 INFORMATION697.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION697.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen707.3 Configuring Volume in the Initial Screen71Installing the Software728.1 MagicTune728.1.1 What is "MagicTune"?728.1.2 Installing the Software728.1.3 Removing the Software738.2 MultiScreen748.2.1 Installing the Software748.2.2 Removing the Software75Troubleshooting Guide769.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center769.1.1 Testing the Product769.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency769.1.3 Check the following.769.2 Q & A79Specifications8110.1 General8110.2 PowerSaver8310.3 Standard Signal Mode Table84Appendix86Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE86Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)92Not a product defect92A Product damage caused by customer's fault92Others92Correct Disposal94Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)94Terminology95Index97Taille: 4,7 MoPages: 98Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Symbols10Electricity and Safety11Installation and Safety12Operation and Safety14Correct posture to use the product18Preparations191.1 Checking the Contents191.1.1 Removing the Packaging191.1.2 Checking the Components201.2 Parts211.2.1 Frontal Buttons211.2.2 Reverse Side231.3 Installation241.3.1 Attaching the cradle241.3.2 Adjusting the Product Tilt and Height251.3.3 Rotating the Monitor251.3.4 Anti-theft Lock261.4 "MagicRotation Auto"27Connecting and Using a Source Device282.1 Before Connecting282.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints282.2 Connecting and Using a PC292.2.1 Connecting to a PC292.2.2 Connecting the Power312.2.3 Driver Installation332.2.4 Setting Optimum Resolution342.2.5 Changing the Resolution Using a PC35Screen Setup393.1 Brightness393.1.1 Configuring Brightness393.2 Contrast403.2.1 Configuring Contrast403.3 Sharpness413.3.1 Configuring Sharpness413.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright423.4.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright423.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale443.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale443.6 Image Size453.6.1 Changing the Image Size453.7 HDMI Black Level473.7.1 Configuring the HDMI Black Level Settings473.8 Response Time483.8.1 Configuring Response Time483.9 H-Position & V-Position493.9.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position493.10 Coarse503.10.1 Adjusting Coarse503.11 Fine513.11.1 Adjusting Fine51Configuring Tint524.1 Red524.1.1 Configuring Red524.2 Green534.2.1 Configuring Green534.3 Blue544.3.1 Configuring Blue544.4 Color Tone554.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings554.5 Gamma564.5.1 Configuring Gamma56Coordinating OSD575.1 Language575.1.1 Configuring Language575.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position585.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position585.3 Display Time595.3.1 Configuring Display Time595.4 Transparency605.4.1 Changing Transparency60Setup and Reset616.1 Reset616.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)616.2 Eco Saving626.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving626.3 Off Timer636.3.1 Configuring Off Timer636.4 Turn Off After646.4.1 Configuring Turn Off After646.5 PC/AV Mode656.5.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode656.6 Key Repeat Time666.6.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time666.7 Source Detection676.7.1 Configuring Source Detection676.8 Customized Key686.8.1 Configuring Customized Key68INFORMATION Menu and Others697.1 INFORMATION697.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION697.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen707.3 Configuring Volume in the Initial Screen71Installing the Software728.1 MagicTune728.1.1 What is "MagicTune"?728.1.2 Installing the Software728.1.3 Removing the Software738.2 MultiScreen748.2.1 Installing the Software748.2.2 Removing the Software75Troubleshooting Guide769.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center769.1.1 Testing the Product769.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency769.1.3 Check the following.769.2 Q & A79Specifications8110.1 General8110.2 PowerSaver8310.3 Standard Signal Mode Table84Appendix86Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE86Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)92Not a product defect92A Product damage caused by customer's fault92Others92Correct Disposal94Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)94Terminology95Index97Taille: 4,7 MoPages: 98Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Symbols10Electricity and Safety11Installation and Safety12Operation and Safety14Correct posture to use the product18Preparations191.1 Checking the Contents191.1.1 Checking the Components191.2 Parts201.2.1 Control Panel201.2.2 Direct Key guide211.2.3 Function Key Guide221.2.4 Reverse Side241.3 Installation251.3.1 Attaching the Stand251.3.2 Removing the Stand261.3.3 Adjusting the Product Tilt271.3.4 Anti-theft Lock27Connecting and Using a Source Device282.1 Before Connecting282.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints282.2 Connecting and Using a PC282.2.1 Connecting to a PC282.2.2 Connecting the Power312.2.3 Driver Installation332.2.4 Setting Optimum Resolution34Screen Setup353.1 Brightness353.1.1 Configuring Brightness353.2 Contrast363.2.1 Configuring Contrast363.3 Sharpness373.3.1 Configuring Sharpness373.4 Game Mode383.4.1 Configuring Game Mode383.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright393.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright393.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale413.6.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale413.7 Image Size423.7.1 Changing the Image Size423.8 HDMI Black Level443.8.1 Configuring the HDMI Black Level Settings443.9 Response Time453.9.1 Configuring the Response Time453.10 H-Position & V-Position463.10.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position463.11 Coarse473.11.1 Adjusting Coarse473.12 Fine483.12.1 Adjusting Fine48Configuring Tint494.1 Red494.1.1 Configuring Red494.2 Green504.2.1 Configuring Green504.3 Blue514.3.1 Configuring Blue514.4 Color Tone524.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings524.5 Gamma534.5.1 Configuring Gamma53Coordinating OSD545.1 Language545.1.1 Configuring Language545.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position555.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position555.3 Display Time565.3.1 Configuring Display Time565.4 Transparency575.4.1 Changing Transparency57Setup and Reset586.1 Reset All586.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset All)586.2 Eco Saving596.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving596.3 Off Timer606.3.1 Configuring Off Timer606.3.2 Configuring Turn Off After616.4 PC/AV Mode626.4.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode626.5 Key Repeat Time636.5.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time636.6 Source Detection646.6.1 Configuring Source Detection646.7 Power LED On656.7.1 Configuring Power LED On65INFORMATION Menu and Others667.1 INFORMATION667.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION667.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen677.3 Configuring Volume in the Initial Screen687.3.1 Volume68Installing the Software698.1 Easy Setting Box698.1.1 Installing the Software698.1.2 Removing the Software70Troubleshooting Guide719.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center719.1.1 Testing the Product719.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency719.1.3 Check the following.719.2 Q & A74Specifications7610.1 General (S24D590PL)7610.2 General (S27D590P)7710.3 PowerSaver7810.4 Standard Signal Mode Table79Appendix81Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE81Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)87Not a product defect87A Product damage caused by customer's fault87Others87Correct Disposal88Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)88Terminology89Index91Taille: 3,1 MoPages: 92Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Cleaning8Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Symbols for safety precautions10Electricity and Safety11Installation and Safety12Operation14Correct posture to use the product18Preparations191.1 Checking the Contents191.1.1 Removing the Packaging191.1.2 Checking the Components201.2 Parts211.2.1 Frontal Button211.2.2 Direct Key guide221.2.3 Function Key Guide231.2.4 Reverse Side251.3 Installation261.3.1 Attaching the Stand261.3.2 Removing the Stand271.3.3 Adjusting the Product Tilt281.3.4 Anti-theft Lock29Connecting and Using a Source Device302.1 Before Connecting302.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints302.2 Connecting the Power302.3 Connecting and Using a PC312.3.1 Connection Using the D-SUB Cable (Analog Type)312.3.2 Connection Using an HDMI Cable322.3.3 Connection Using an HDMI-DVI Cable322.3.4 Connecting to Headphones332.3.5 Tidying Up the Connected Cables332.3.6 Changing the sound settings on Windows342.3.7 Driver Installation352.3.8 Setting Optimum Resolution362.3.9 Changing the Resolution Using a PC37Screen Setup413.1 Brightness413.1.1 Configuring Brightness413.2 Contrast423.2.1 Configuring Contrast423.3 Sharpness433.3.1 Configuring Sharpness433.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright443.4.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright443.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale463.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale463.6 Image Size473.6.1 Changing the Image Size473.7 HDMI Black Level493.7.1 Configuring the HDMI Black Level Settings493.8 Response Time503.8.1 Configuring Response Time503.9 H-Position & V-Position513.9.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position513.10 Coarse523.10.1 Adjusting Coarse523.11 Fine533.11.1 Adjusting Fine53Configuring Tint544.1 Red544.1.1 Configuring Red544.2 Green554.2.1 Configuring Green554.3 Blue564.3.1 Configuring Blue564.4 Color Tone574.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings574.5 Gamma584.5.1 Configuring Gamma58Coordinating OSD595.1 Language595.1.1 Changing the Language595.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position605.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position605.3 Display Time615.3.1 Configuring Display Time615.4 Transparency625.4.1 Changing Transparency62Setup and Reset636.1 Reset636.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)636.2 Eco Saving646.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving646.3 Off Timer656.3.1 Configuring Off Timer656.4 Turn Off After666.4.1 Configuring Turn Off After666.5 PC/AV Mode676.5.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode676.6 Key Repeat Time686.6.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time686.7 Source Detection696.7.1 Configuring Source Detection696.8 Power LED On706.8.1 Configuring Power LED On70INFORMATION Menu and Others717.1 INFORMATION717.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION717.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen727.3 Configuring Volume in the Initial Screen73Installing the Software748.1 MagicTune748.1.1 What is "MagicTune"?748.1.2 Installing the Software748.1.3 Removing the Software758.2 MultiScreen768.2.1 Installing the Software768.2.2 Removing the Software77Troubleshooting Guide789.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center789.1.1 Testing the Product789.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency789.1.3 Check the following.789.2 Q & A81Specifications8310.1 General8310.2 PowerSaver8510.3 Standard Signal Mode Table86Appendix88Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE88Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)94Not a product defect94A Product damage caused by customer's fault94Others94Correct Disposal96Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)96Terminology97Index99Taille: 3,9 MoPages: 100Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Symbols10Electricity and Safety11Installation and Safety12Operation and Safety14Correct posture to use the product18Preparations191.1 Checking the Contents191.1.1 Checking the Components191.2 Parts201.2.1 Control Panel201.2.2 Direct Key guide211.2.3 Function Key Guide221.2.4 Reverse Side241.3 Installation251.3.1 Attaching the Stand251.3.2 Removing the Stand261.3.3 Adjusting the Product Tilt271.3.4 Anti-theft Lock27Connecting and Using a Source Device282.1 Before Connecting282.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints282.2 Connecting and Using a PC282.2.1 Connecting to a PC282.2.2 Connecting the Power312.2.3 Driver Installation332.2.4 Setting Optimum Resolution34Screen Setup353.1 Brightness353.1.1 Configuring Brightness353.2 Contrast363.2.1 Configuring Contrast363.3 Sharpness373.3.1 Configuring Sharpness373.4 Game Mode383.4.1 Configuring Game Mode383.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright393.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright393.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale413.6.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale413.7 Image Size423.7.1 Changing the Image Size423.8 HDMI Black Level443.8.1 Configuring the HDMI Black Level Settings443.9 Response Time453.9.1 Configuring the Response Time453.10 H-Position & V-Position463.10.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position463.11 Coarse473.11.1 Adjusting Coarse473.12 Fine483.12.1 Adjusting Fine48Configuring Tint494.1 Red494.1.1 Configuring Red494.2 Green504.2.1 Configuring Green504.3 Blue514.3.1 Configuring Blue514.4 Color Tone524.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings524.5 Gamma534.5.1 Configuring Gamma53Coordinating OSD545.1 Language545.1.1 Configuring Language545.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position555.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position555.3 Display Time565.3.1 Configuring Display Time565.4 Transparency575.4.1 Changing Transparency57Setup and Reset586.1 Reset All586.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset All)586.2 Eco Saving596.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving596.3 Off Timer606.3.1 Configuring Off Timer606.3.2 Configuring Turn Off After616.4 PC/AV Mode626.4.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode626.5 Key Repeat Time636.5.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time636.6 Source Detection646.6.1 Configuring Source Detection646.7 Power LED On656.7.1 Configuring Power LED On65INFORMATION Menu and Others667.1 INFORMATION667.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION667.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen677.3 Configuring Volume in the Initial Screen687.3.1 Volume68Installing the Software698.1 Easy Setting Box698.1.1 Installing the Software698.1.2 Removing the Software70Troubleshooting Guide719.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center719.1.1 Testing the Product719.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency719.1.3 Check the following.719.2 Q & A74Specifications7610.1 General (S24D590PL)7610.2 General (S27D590P)7710.3 PowerSaver7810.4 Standard Signal Mode Table79Appendix81Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE81Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)87Not a product defect87A Product damage caused by customer's fault87Others87Correct Disposal88Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)88Terminology89Index91Taille: 3,1 MoPages: 92Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Cleaning8Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Symbols10Electricity and Safety11Installation and Safety12Operation and Safety14Correct posture to use the product18Preparations191.1 Checking the Contents191.1.1 Removing the Packaging191.1.2 Checking the Components201.2 Parts211.2.1 Frontal Buttons211.2.2 Reverse Side231.3 Installation241.3.1 Attaching the cradle241.3.2 Adjusting the Product Tilt and Height251.3.3 Rotating the Monitor251.3.4 Anti-theft Lock261.4 "MagicRotation Auto"27Connecting and Using a Source Device282.1 Before Connecting282.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints282.2 Connecting the Power282.3 Connecting and Using a PC292.3.1 Connecting to a PC292.3.2 Driver Installation332.3.3 Setting Optimum Resolution342.3.4 Changing the Resolution Using a PC35Screen Setup393.1 Brightness393.1.1 Configuring Brightness393.2 Contrast403.2.1 Configuring Contrast403.3 Sharpness413.3.1 Configuring Sharpness413.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright423.4.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright423.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale443.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale443.6 Image Size453.6.1 Changing the Image Size453.7 HDMI Black Level473.7.1 Configuring the HDMI Black Level Settings473.8 Response Time483.8.1 Configuring Response Time483.9 H-Position & V-Position493.9.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position493.10 Coarse503.10.1 Adjusting Coarse503.11 Fine513.11.1 Adjusting Fine51Configuring Tint524.1 Red524.1.1 Configuring Red524.2 Green534.2.1 Configuring Green534.3 Blue544.3.1 Configuring Blue544.4 Color Tone554.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings554.5 Gamma564.5.1 Configuring Gamma56Coordinating OSD575.1 Language575.1.1 Configuring Language575.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position585.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position585.3 Display Time595.3.1 Configuring Display Time595.4 Transparency605.4.1 Changing Transparency60Setup and Reset616.1 Reset616.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)616.2 Eco Saving626.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving626.3 Off Timer636.3.1 Configuring Off Timer636.4 Turn Off After646.4.1 Configuring Turn Off After646.5 PC/AV Mode656.5.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode656.6 Key Repeat Time666.6.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time666.7 Source Detection676.7.1 Configuring Source Detection676.8 Customized Key686.8.1 Configuring Customized Key68INFORMATION Menu and Others697.1 INFORMATION697.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION697.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen707.3 Configuring Volume in the Initial Screen71Installing the Software728.1 MagicTune728.1.1 What is "MagicTune"?728.1.2 Installing the Software728.1.3 Removing the Software738.2 MultiScreen748.2.1 Installing the Software748.2.2 Removing the Software75Troubleshooting Guide769.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center769.1.1 Testing the Product769.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency769.1.3 Check the following.769.2 Q & A79Specifications8110.1 General8110.2 PowerSaver8310.3 Standard Signal Mode Table84Appendix86Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE86Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)92Not a product defect92A Product damage caused by customer's fault92Others92Correct Disposal93Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)93Terminology94Index96Taille: 4 MoPages: 97Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Cleaning8Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Symbols for safety precautions10Electricity and Safety11Installation and Safety12Operation14Correct posture to use the product18Preparations191.1 Checking the Contents191.1.1 Removing the Packaging191.1.2 Checking the Components201.2 Parts211.2.1 Frontal Button211.2.2 Direct Key guide221.2.3 Function Key Guide231.2.4 Reverse Side251.3 Installation261.3.1 Attaching the Stand261.3.2 Removing the Stand271.3.3 Adjusting the Product Tilt281.3.4 Anti-theft Lock29Connecting and Using a Source Device302.1 Before Connecting302.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints302.2 Connecting the Power302.3 Connecting and Using a PC312.3.1 Connection Using the D-SUB Cable (Analog Type)312.3.2 Connection Using an HDMI Cable322.3.3 Connection Using an HDMI-DVI Cable322.3.4 Connecting to Headphones332.3.5 Tidying Up the Connected Cables332.3.6 Changing the sound settings on Windows342.3.7 Driver Installation352.3.8 Setting Optimum Resolution362.3.9 Changing the Resolution Using a PC37Screen Setup413.1 Brightness413.1.1 Configuring Brightness413.2 Contrast423.2.1 Configuring Contrast423.3 Sharpness433.3.1 Configuring Sharpness433.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright443.4.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright443.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale463.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale463.6 Image Size473.6.1 Changing the Image Size473.7 HDMI Black Level493.7.1 Configuring the HDMI Black Level Settings493.8 Response Time503.8.1 Configuring Response Time503.9 H-Position & V-Position513.9.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position513.10 Coarse523.10.1 Adjusting Coarse523.11 Fine533.11.1 Adjusting Fine53Configuring Tint544.1 Red544.1.1 Configuring Red544.2 Green554.2.1 Configuring Green554.3 Blue564.3.1 Configuring Blue564.4 Color Tone574.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings574.5 Gamma584.5.1 Configuring Gamma58Coordinating OSD595.1 Language595.1.1 Changing the Language595.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position605.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position605.3 Display Time615.3.1 Configuring Display Time615.4 Transparency625.4.1 Changing Transparency62Setup and Reset636.1 Reset636.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)636.2 Eco Saving646.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving646.3 Off Timer656.3.1 Configuring Off Timer656.4 Turn Off After666.4.1 Configuring Turn Off After666.5 PC/AV Mode676.5.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode676.6 Key Repeat Time686.6.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time686.7 Source Detection696.7.1 Configuring Source Detection696.8 Power LED On706.8.1 Configuring Power LED On70INFORMATION Menu and Others717.1 INFORMATION717.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION717.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen727.3 Configuring Volume in the Initial Screen73Installing the Software748.1 MagicTune748.1.1 What is "MagicTune"?748.1.2 Installing the Software748.1.3 Removing the Software758.2 MultiScreen768.2.1 Installing the Software768.2.2 Removing the Software77Troubleshooting Guide789.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center789.1.1 Testing the Product789.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency789.1.3 Check the following.789.2 Q & A81Specifications8310.1 General8310.2 PowerSaver8510.3 Standard Signal Mode Table86Appendix88Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE88Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)94Not a product defect94A Product damage caused by customer's fault94Others94Correct Disposal96Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)96Terminology97Index99Taille: 3,9 MoPages: 100Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Cleaning8Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Symbols10Electricity and Safety11Installation and Safety12Operation and Safety14Correct posture to use the product18Preparations191.1 Checking the Contents191.1.1 Removing the Packaging191.1.2 Checking the Components201.2 Parts211.2.1 Frontal Buttons211.2.2 Reverse Side231.3 Installation241.3.1 Attaching the cradle241.3.2 Adjusting the Product Tilt and Height251.3.3 Rotating the Monitor251.3.4 Anti-theft Lock261.4 "MagicRotation Auto"27Connecting and Using a Source Device282.1 Before Connecting282.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints282.2 Connecting the Power282.3 Connecting and Using a PC292.3.1 Connecting to a PC292.3.2 Driver Installation332.3.3 Setting Optimum Resolution342.3.4 Changing the Resolution Using a PC35Screen Setup393.1 Brightness393.1.1 Configuring Brightness393.2 Contrast403.2.1 Configuring Contrast403.3 Sharpness413.3.1 Configuring Sharpness413.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright423.4.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright423.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale443.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale443.6 Image Size453.6.1 Changing the Image Size453.7 HDMI Black Level473.7.1 Configuring the HDMI Black Level Settings473.8 Response Time483.8.1 Configuring Response Time483.9 H-Position & V-Position493.9.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position493.10 Coarse503.10.1 Adjusting Coarse503.11 Fine513.11.1 Adjusting Fine51Configuring Tint524.1 Red524.1.1 Configuring Red524.2 Green534.2.1 Configuring Green534.3 Blue544.3.1 Configuring Blue544.4 Color Tone554.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings554.5 Gamma564.5.1 Configuring Gamma56Coordinating OSD575.1 Language575.1.1 Configuring Language575.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position585.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position585.3 Display Time595.3.1 Configuring Display Time595.4 Transparency605.4.1 Changing Transparency60Setup and Reset616.1 Reset616.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)616.2 Eco Saving626.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving626.3 Off Timer636.3.1 Configuring Off Timer636.4 Turn Off After646.4.1 Configuring Turn Off After646.5 PC/AV Mode656.5.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode656.6 Key Repeat Time666.6.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time666.7 Source Detection676.7.1 Configuring Source Detection676.8 Customized Key686.8.1 Configuring Customized Key68INFORMATION Menu and Others697.1 INFORMATION697.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION697.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen707.3 Configuring Volume in the Initial Screen71Installing the Software728.1 MagicTune728.1.1 What is "MagicTune"?728.1.2 Installing the Software728.1.3 Removing the Software738.2 MultiScreen748.2.1 Installing the Software748.2.2 Removing the Software75Troubleshooting Guide769.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center769.1.1 Testing the Product769.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency769.1.3 Check the following.769.2 Q & A79Specifications8110.1 General8110.2 PowerSaver8310.3 Standard Signal Mode Table84Appendix86Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE86Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)92Not a product defect92A Product damage caused by customer's fault92Others92Correct Disposal93Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)93Terminology94Index96Taille: 4 MoPages: 97Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product8Copyright8Icons used in this manual8Cleaning9Securing the Installation Space10Precautions for storage10Safety Precautions11Symbols11Electricity and Safety12Installation and Safety13Operation and Safety15Correct posture to use the product19Preparations201.1 Checking the Components201.1.1 Checking the Components201.2 Parts221.2.1 Frontal Buttons (SE200 Series)221.2.2 Frontal Buttons (S**E450B*, S**E650B*)241.2.3 Frontal Buttons (S**E450M*)261.2.4 Frontal Buttons (S**E450D*)281.2.5 Reverse Side (SE200 Series)301.2.6 Reverse Side (S**E450B*, S**E650B*)311.2.7 Reverse Side (S**E450M*)321.2.8 Reverse Side ( S**E450D*)331.2.9 Right Side View (S**E450D*)341.3 Installation351.3.1 Attaching the Stand (SE200 Series)351.3.2 Attaching the Stand (SE450, SE650 Series)361.3.3 Removing the Stand (SE200 Series)371.3.4 Adjusting the Product Tilt (SE200 Series)381.3.5 Adjusting the Product Tilt and Height (SE450, SE650 Series)391.3.6 Rotating the Monitor (SE450, SE650 Series)401.3.7 Installing a Wall-mount Kit or Desktop Stand411.3.8 Anti-theft Lock44Connecting and Using a Source Device452.1 Before Connecting452.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints452.2 Connecting and Using a PC462.2.1 Connecting to a PC462.2.2 Connecting the Power512.2.3 Driver Installation552.2.4 Setting Optimum Resolution56Screen Setup573.1 Brightness573.1.1 Configuring Brightness573.2 Contrast583.2.1 Configuring Contrast583.3 Sharpness593.3.1 Configuring Sharpness593.4 Eye Saver Mode603.4.1 Configuring Eye Saver Mode603.5 Game Mode613.5.1 Configuring Game Mode613.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright623.6.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright623.7 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle (Except S19E200NY / S22E200NY / S24E650BW)633.7.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle633.8 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale653.8.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale653.9 Image Size (Except S19E200BR / S19E450BR / S19E450MR)663.9.1 Changing the Image Size663.10 Response Time (S24E650BW)683.10.1 Configuring the Response Time683.11 H-Position & V-Position693.11.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position693.12 Coarse703.12.1 Adjusting Coarse703.13 Fine713.13.1 Adjusting Fine71Configuring Tint724.1 Red724.1.1 Configuring Red724.2 Green734.2.1 Configuring Green734.3 Blue744.3.1 Configuring Blue744.4 Color Tone754.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings754.5 Gamma764.5.1 Configuring Gamma76Resizing or Relocating the Screen775.1 Language775.1.1 Changing the Language775.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position785.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position785.3 Display Time795.3.1 Configuring Display Time795.4 Transparency805.4.1 Changing Transparency80Setup and Reset816.1 Reset All816.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset All)816.2 Smart Eco Saving826.2.1 Configuring Smart Eco Saving826.3 Off Timer (S19E200NW / S19E200NY / S22E200N / S22E200NY)836.3.1 Configuring Off Timer836.3.2 Configuring Turn Off After846.4 Off Timer Plus (Except S19E200NW / S19E200NY / S22E200N / S22E200NY)856.4.1 Configuring Off Timer856.4.2 Configuring Eco Timer876.5 PC/AV Mode (Except S19E200NW / S19E200NY / S22E200N / S22E200NY)896.5.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode896.6 Key Repeat Time916.6.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time916.7 Source Detection (Except S19E200NW / S19E200NY / S22E200N / S22E200NY)926.7.1 Configuring Source Detection92INFORMATION Menu and Others937.1 INFORMATION937.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION937.2 Configuring Brightness, Contrast and Sharpness from the Initial Screen947.3 Configuring Volume in the Initial Screen95Installing the Software968.1 MultiScreen968.1.1 Installing the Software968.1.2 Removing the Software97Troubleshooting Guide989.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center989.1.1 Testing the Product989.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency989.1.3 Check the following.989.2 Q & A101Specifications10310.1 General (S19E200NY / S19E200NW)10310.2 General (S19E200BW / S19E200BR)10510.3 General (S22E200NY)10710.4 General (S22E200B / S22E200N / S22E200BW)10810.5 General (S23E200B / S24E200BL)11010.6 General (S19E450BW / S19E450MW / S19E450BR / S19E450MR)11210.7 General (S22E450B / S22E450M / S22E450D)11410.8 General (S22E450BW / S22E450MW / S22E450DW)11610.9 General (S23E450B)11810.10 General (S24E450BL / S24E450DL)12010.11 General (S24E450B / S24E450M / S24E450D)12210.12 General (S24E650BW)12410.13 General (S27E450B / S27E450D)12610.14 PowerSaver12810.15 Standard Signal Mode Table132Appendix140Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)140Not a product defect140A Product damage caused by customer's fault140Others140Correct Disposal142Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)142Extended warranty142Terminology143Index145Taille: 8,9 MoPages: 146Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresBefore Using the Product2Copyright2Icons used in this manual3Symbols for safety precautions3Cleaning4Cleaning4Securing the Installation Space5Precautions for storage5Safety Precautions6Electricity and Safety6Installation7Operation9Correct posture to use the product13Table Of Contents14Preparations191.1 Checking the Contents191.1.1 Removing the Packaging191.1.2 Checking the Components201.2 Parts211.2.1 Frontal Buttons211.2.2 Reverse Side231.3 Installation241.3.1 Attaching the Stand241.3.2 Adjusting the Product Tilt and Height251.3.3 Rotating the Monitor251.3.4 Installing a Wall-mount Kit or Desktop Stand261.3.5 Anti-theft Lock271.4 "MagicRotation Auto"28Connecting and Using a Source Device292.1 Before Connecting292.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints292.2 Connecting and Using a PC302.2.1 Connecting to a PC302.2.2 Driver Installation322.2.3 Setting Optimum Resolution332.2.4 Changing the Resolution Using a PC342.3 Connecting Headphones372.4 Connecting the Product to a PC as a USB HUB382.4.1 Connecting a PC to the Product382.4.2 Utilizing the Product as a USB HUB382.5 Connecting the Power39Screen Setup403.1 MAGIC403.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright403.1.2 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color413.2 Brightness423.2.1 Configuring Brightness423.3 Contrast433.3.1 Configuring Contrast433.4 Sharpness443.4.1 Configuring Sharpness443.5 Coarse453.5.1 Adjusting Coarse453.6 Fine463.6.1 Adjusting Coarse463.7 Response Time473.7.1 Configuring Response Time47Configuring Tint484.1 Red484.1.1 Configuring Red484.2 Green494.2.1 Configuring Green494.3 Blue504.3.1 Configuring Blue504.4 Color Tone514.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings514.5 Gamma524.5.1 Configuring Gamma52Resizing or Relocating the Screen535.1 Image Size535.1.1 Changing the Image Size535.2 H-Position & V-Position545.2.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position545.3 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position555.3.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position55Setup and Reset566.1 ECO566.1.1 Eco Motion Sensor566.1.2 Eco Light Sensor586.1.3 Eco Saving616.1.4 Eco Icon Display626.2 Menu Transparency646.2.1 Changing Menu Transparency646.3 Language656.3.1 Changing the Language656.4 PC/AV Mode666.4.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode666.5 Auto Source676.5.1 Configuring Auto Source676.6 Display Time686.6.1 Configuring Display Time686.7 Key Repeat Time696.7.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time696.8 Customized Key706.8.1 Configuring Customized Key706.9 Off Timer On/Off716.9.1 Configuring Off Timer On/Off716.10 Off Timer Setting726.10.1 Configuring Off Timer Setting726.11 Reset736.11.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)73INFORMATION Menu and Others747.1 INFORMATION747.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION747.2 Configuring Brightness in the Startup Screen74Troubleshooting Guide758.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center758.1.1 Testing the Product758.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency758.1.3 Check the followings.758.2 Q & A78Specifications809.1 General809.2 PowerSaver819.3 Standard Signal Mode Table82Appendix84Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE84Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)90Terminology91Index93Taille: 5,5 MoPages: 94Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Cleaning8Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Symbols10Electricity and Safety11Installation and Safety12Operation and Safety14Correct posture to use the product18Preparations191.1 Checking the Contents191.1.1 Removing the Packaging191.1.2 Checking the Components201.2 Parts211.2.1 Frontal Buttons211.2.2 Reverse Side231.2.3 Right Side View241.3 Installation251.3.1 Attaching the cradle251.3.2 Adjusting the Product Tilt and Height261.3.3 Rotating the Monitor261.3.4 Installing a Wall-mount Kit or Desktop Stand271.3.5 Anti-theft Lock28Connecting and Using a Source Device292.1 Before Connecting292.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints292.2 Connecting the Power292.3 Connecting and Using a PC302.3.1 Connecting to a PC302.3.2 Driver Installation342.3.3 Setting Optimum Resolution352.3.4 Changing the Resolution Using a PC36Screen Setup403.1 Brightness403.1.1 Configuring Brightness403.2 Contrast413.2.1 Configuring Contrast413.3 Sharpness423.3.1 Configuring Sharpness423.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright433.4.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright433.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle443.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle443.6 Image Size453.6.1 Changing the Image Size453.7 H-Position & V-Position473.7.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position473.8 Coarse483.8.1 Adjusting Coarse483.9 Fine493.9.1 Adjusting Fine49Configuring Tint504.1 Red504.1.1 Configuring Red504.2 Green514.2.1 Configuring Green514.3 Blue524.3.1 Configuring Blue524.4 Color Tone534.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings534.5 Gamma544.5.1 Configuring Gamma54Resizing or Relocating the Screen555.1 Language555.1.1 Configuring Language555.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position565.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position565.3 Display Time575.3.1 Configuring Display Time575.4 Transparency585.4.1 Changing Transparency58Setup and Reset596.1 Reset596.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)596.2 Eco Saving606.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving606.3 Off Timer616.3.1 Configuring Off Timer616.4 Turn Off After626.4.1 Configuring Turn Off After626.5 PC/AV Mode636.5.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode636.6 Key Repeat Time646.6.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time646.7 Source Detection656.7.1 Configuring Source Detection656.8 Customized Key666.8.1 Configuring Customized Key66INFORMATION Menu and Others677.1 INFORMATION677.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION677.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen68Installing the Software698.1 MagicTune698.1.1 What is "MagicTune"?698.1.2 Installing the Software698.1.3 Removing the Software708.2 MultiScreen718.2.1 Installing the Software718.2.2 Removing the Software728.3 MagicRotation738.3.1 Installing the Software738.3.2 Removing the Software75Troubleshooting Guide769.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center769.1.1 Testing the Product769.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency769.1.3 Check the following.769.2 Q & A78Specifications8010.1 General8010.2 PowerSaver8210.3 Standard Signal Mode Table83Appendix85Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE85Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)91Not a product defect91A Product damage caused by customer's fault91Others91Correct Disposal92Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)92Terminology93Index95Taille: 4,1 MoPages: 96Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Cleaning8Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Symbols10Electricity and Safety11Installation and Safety12Operation and Safety14Correct posture to use the product18Preparations191.1 Checking the Contents191.1.1 Removing the Packaging191.1.2 Checking the Components201.2 Parts211.2.1 Frontal Buttons211.2.2 Reverse Side231.2.3 Right Side View241.3 Installation251.3.1 Attaching the cradle251.3.2 Adjusting the Product Tilt and Height261.3.3 Rotating the Monitor261.3.4 Installing a Wall-mount Kit or Desktop Stand271.3.5 Anti-theft Lock28Connecting and Using a Source Device292.1 Before Connecting292.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints292.2 Connecting the Power292.3 Connecting and Using a PC302.3.1 Connecting to a PC302.3.2 Driver Installation342.3.3 Setting Optimum Resolution352.3.4 Changing the Resolution Using a PC36Screen Setup403.1 Brightness403.1.1 Configuring Brightness403.2 Contrast413.2.1 Configuring Contrast413.3 Sharpness423.3.1 Configuring Sharpness423.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright433.4.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright433.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle443.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle443.6 Image Size453.6.1 Changing the Image Size453.7 H-Position & V-Position473.7.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position473.8 Coarse483.8.1 Adjusting Coarse483.9 Fine493.9.1 Adjusting Fine49Configuring Tint504.1 Red504.1.1 Configuring Red504.2 Green514.2.1 Configuring Green514.3 Blue524.3.1 Configuring Blue524.4 Color Tone534.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings534.5 Gamma544.5.1 Configuring Gamma54Resizing or Relocating the Screen555.1 Language555.1.1 Configuring Language555.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position565.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position565.3 Display Time575.3.1 Configuring Display Time575.4 Transparency585.4.1 Changing Transparency58Setup and Reset596.1 Reset596.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)596.2 Eco Saving606.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving606.3 Off Timer616.3.1 Configuring Off Timer616.4 Turn Off After626.4.1 Configuring Turn Off After626.5 PC/AV Mode636.5.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode636.6 Key Repeat Time646.6.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time646.7 Source Detection656.7.1 Configuring Source Detection656.8 Customized Key666.8.1 Configuring Customized Key66INFORMATION Menu and Others677.1 INFORMATION677.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION677.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen68Installing the Software698.1 MagicTune698.1.1 What is "MagicTune"?698.1.2 Installing the Software698.1.3 Removing the Software708.2 MultiScreen718.2.1 Installing the Software718.2.2 Removing the Software728.3 MagicRotation738.3.1 Installing the Software738.3.2 Removing the Software75Troubleshooting Guide769.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center769.1.1 Testing the Product769.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency769.1.3 Check the following.769.2 Q & A78Specifications8010.1 General8010.2 PowerSaver8210.3 Standard Signal Mode Table83Appendix85Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE85Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)91Not a product defect91A Product damage caused by customer's fault91Others91Correct Disposal92Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)92Terminology93Index95Taille: 4,1 MoPages: 96Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresBefore Using the Product2Copyright2Icons used in this manual3Symbols for safety precautions3Cleaning4Cleaning4Securing the Installation Space5Precautions for storage5Safety Precautions6Electricity and Safety6Installation and Safety7Operation and Safety9Correct posture to use the product13Table Of Contents14Preparations191.1 Checking the Contents191.1.1 Removing the Packaging191.1.2 Checking the Components201.2 Parts211.2.1 Frontal Buttons211.2.2 Reverse Side231.3 Installation241.3.1 Attaching the Stand241.3.2 Adjusting the Product Tilt and Height251.3.3 Rotating the Monitor Screen251.3.4 Installing a Wall-mount Kit or Desktop Stand261.3.5 Anti-theft Lock271.4 "MagicRotation Auto"28Connecting and Using a Source Device292.1 Before Connecting292.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints292.2 Connecting and Using a PC302.2.1 Connecting to a PC302.2.2 Driver Installation322.2.3 Setting Optimum Resolution332.2.4 Changing the Resolution Using a PC342.3 Connecting Headphones372.4 Connecting the Product to a PC as a USB HUB382.4.1 Connecting a PC to the Product382.4.2 Utilizing the Product as a USB HUB382.5 Connecting the Power39Screen Setup403.1 MAGIC403.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright403.1.2 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color413.2 Brightness423.2.1 Configuring Brightness423.3 Contrast433.3.1 Configuring Contrast433.4 Sharpness443.4.1 Configuring Sharpness443.5 Response Time453.5.1 Configuring Response Time453.6 HDMI Black Level463.6.1 Configuring the HDMI Black Level Settings46Configuring Tint474.1 Red474.1.1 Configuring Red474.2 Green484.2.1 Configuring Green484.3 Blue494.3.1 Configuring Blue494.4 Color Tone504.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings504.5 Gamma514.5.1 Configuring Gamma51Resizing or Relocating the Screen525.1 Size525.1.1 Changing the Image Size525.2 H-Position & V-Position535.2.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position535.3 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position545.3.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position54Setup and Reset556.1 ECO556.1.1 Eco Motion Sensor556.1.2 Eco Light Sensor576.1.3 Eco Saving606.1.4 Eco Icon Display616.2 Menu Transparency636.2.1 Changing Menu Transparency636.3 Language646.3.1 Changing the Language646.4 PC/AV Mode656.4.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode656.5 Auto Source666.5.1 Configuring Auto Source666.6 Display Time676.6.1 Configuring Display Time676.7 Key Repeat Time686.7.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time686.8 Customized Key696.8.1 Configuring Customized Key696.9 Off Timer On/Off706.9.1 Configuring Off Timer On/Off706.10 Off Timer Setting716.10.1 Configuring Off Timer Setting716.11 Reset726.11.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)72INFORMATION Menu and Others737.1 INFORMATION737.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION737.2 Configuring Brightness in the Initial Screen73Troubleshooting Guide748.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center748.1.1 Testing the Product748.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency748.1.3 Check the following.748.2 Q&A77Specifications799.1 General799.2 PowerSaver809.3 Standard Signal Mode Table81Appendix83Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE83Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)88Terminology89Index91Taille: 5,7 MoPages: 92Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresAntes de usar el producto2Copyright2Iconos utilizados en este manual3Símbolos de precauciones de seguridad3Limpieza4Limpieza4Seguridad en el espacio de instalación5Precauciones de almacenamiento5Precauciones de seguridad6Electricidad y seguridad6Instalación7Funcionamiento9Postura correcta para utilizar el producto13Índice14Preparativos191.1 Comprobación del contenido191.1.1 Extracción del embalaje191.1.2 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Partes211.2.1 Botones delanteros211.2.2 Parte posterior231.3 Instalación241.3.1 Instalación del soporte241.3.2 Ajuste de la inclinación y la altura del producto251.3.3 Giro de la pantalla del monitor251.3.4 Instalación de un equipo de montaje mural o un soporte de escritorio261.3.5 Bloqueo antirrobo271.4 "MagicRotation Auto"28Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente292.1 Antes de conectar292.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión292.2 Conexión y uso de un PC302.2.1 Conexión a un PC302.2.2 Instalación de controladores322.2.3 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima332.2.4 Cambio de la resolución mediante un PC342.3 Conexión de auriculares372.4 Conexión del producto a un PC a modo de HUB USB382.4.1 Conexión de un PC al producto382.4.2 Utilización del producto a modo de HUB USB382.5 Conexión de la alimentación39Configuración de pantalla403.1 MAGIC403.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright403.1.2 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color413.2 Brillo423.2.1 Configuración de Brillo423.3 Contraste433.3.1 Configuración de Contraste433.4 Nitidez443.4.1 Configuración de Nitidez443.5 Tiempo respuesta453.5.1 Configuración de Tiempo respuesta453.6 N.neg HDMI463.6.1 Ajuste de la configuración de N.neg HDMI46Configuración del matiz474.1 Rojo474.1.1 Configuración de Rojo474.2 Verde484.2.1 Configuración de Verde484.3 Azul494.3.1 Configuración de Azul494.4 Tono de color504.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color504.5 Gamma514.5.1 Configuración de Gamma51Cambio de tamaño o reubicación de la pantalla525.1 Tamaño525.1.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen525.2 Posición-H y Posición-V535.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V535.3 Posición-H menú & Posición-V menú545.3.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú54Configuración y restauración556.1 ECO556.1.1 Sensor mov. econ.556.1.2 Sensor lum. econ.576.1.3 Ahorro energía606.1.4 Most. icono econ.616.2 Transp. menú636.2.1 Modificación de Transp. menú636.3 Idioma646.3.1 Cambio del Idioma646.4 Modo PC/AV656.4.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV656.5 Fuente autom.666.5.1 Configuración de Fuente autom.666.6 Mostrar hora676.6.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora676.7 Frec. rep. tecla686.7.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla686.8 Tecla personaliz.696.8.1 Configuración de Tecla personaliz.696.9 Act/des temp apag706.9.1 Configuración de Act/des temp apag706.10 Conf.temp.apagado716.10.1 Configuración de Conf.temp.apagado716.11 Restaurar726.11.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)72Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros737.1 INFORMACIÓN737.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN737.2 Configuración del Brillo de la pantalla de inicio73Solución de problemas748.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung748.1.1 Prueba del producto748.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia748.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.748.2 P y R77Especificaciones799.1 General799.2 Ahorro de energía809.3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar81Apéndice83Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE83Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)88Terminología89Índice91Taille: 5,8 MoPages: 92Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto8Copyright8Iconos utilizados en este manual8Limpieza9Seguridad en el espacio de instalación10Precauciones de almacenamiento10Precauciones de seguridad11Símbolos11Electricidad y seguridad12Instalación13Funcionamiento15Postura correcta para utilizar el producto20Preparativos211.1 Comprobación de los componentes211.1.1 Comprobación de los componentes211.2 Partes231.2.1 Botones delanteros (Serie SE200)231.2.2 Botones delanteros (S**E450B*, S**E650B*)251.2.3 Botones delanteros (S**E450M*)271.2.4 Botones delanteros (S**E450D*)291.2.5 Parte posterior (Serie SE200)311.2.6 Parte posterior (S**E450B*, S**E650B*)321.2.7 Parte posterior (S**E450M*)331.2.8 Parte posterior (S**E450D*)341.2.9 Vista lateral derecha (S**E450D*)351.3 Instalación361.3.1 Instalación del soporte (Serie SE200)361.3.2 Instalación del soporte (Serie SE450, SE650)371.3.3 Extracción del soporte (Serie SE200)381.3.4 Ajuste de la inclinación del producto (Serie SE200)391.3.5 Ajuste de la inclinación y la altura del producto (Serie SE450, SE650)401.3.6 Giro del monitor (Serie SE450, SE650)411.3.7 Instalación de un equipo de montaje mural o un soporte de escritorio421.3.8 Bloqueo antirrobo45Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente462.1 Antes de conectar462.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión462.2 Conexión y uso de un PC472.2.1 Conexión a un PC472.2.2 Conexión de la alimentación522.2.3 Instalación de controladores562.2.4 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima57Configuración de pantalla583.1 Brillo583.1.1 Configuración de Brillo583.2 Contraste593.2.1 Configuración de Contraste593.3 Nitidez603.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez603.4 Modo descanso ojos613.4.1 Configuración de Modo descanso ojos613.5 Modo Juego623.5.1 Configuración de Modo Juego623.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright633.6.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright633.7 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle (Excepto S19E200NY / S22E200NY / S24E650BW)643.7.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle643.8 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale663.8.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale663.9 Tamaño de imagen (Excepto S19E200BR / S19E450BR / S19E450MR)673.9.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen673.10 Tiempo respuesta (S24E650BW)693.10.1 Configuración de Tiempo respuesta693.11 Posición-H y Posición-V703.11.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V703.12 Grueso713.12.1 Ajuste de Grueso713.13 Fino723.13.1 Ajuste de Fino72Configuración del matiz734.1 Rojo734.1.1 Configuración de Rojo734.2 Verde744.2.1 Configuración de Verde744.3 Azul754.3.1 Configuración de Azul754.4 Tono de color764.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color764.5 Gamma774.5.1 Configuración de Gamma77Cambio de tamaño o reubicación de la pantalla785.1 Idioma785.1.1 Cambio del Idioma785.2 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú795.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú795.3 Mostrar hora805.3.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora805.4 Transparencia815.4.1 Modificación de Transparencia81Configuración y restauración826.1 Restablecer todo826.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restablecer Todo)826.2 Ahorro energ. int.836.2.1 Configuración de Ahorro energ. int.836.3 Temp. apag. (S19E200NW / S19E200NY / S22E200N / S22E200NY)846.3.1 Configuración de Temp. apag.846.3.2 Configuración de Apagar tras856.4 Temp. apag. Plus (Excepto S19E200NW / S19E200NY / S22E200N / S22E200NY)866.4.1 Configuración de Temp. apag.866.4.2 Configuración de Temp. ecológico886.5 Modo PC/AV (Excepto S19E200NW / S19E200NY / S22E200N / S22E200NY)906.5.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV906.6 Frec. rep. tecla926.6.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla926.7 Detección fuente (Excepto S19E200NW / S19E200NY / S22E200N / S22E200NY)936.7.1 Configuración de Detección fuente93Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros947.1 INFORMACIÓN947.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN947.2 Configuración de Brillo, Contraste y Nitidez desde la pantalla inicial957.3 Configuración de Volumen en la pantalla inicial96Instalación del software978.1 MultiScreen978.1.1 Instalación del software978.1.2 Eliminación del software98Solución de problemas999.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung999.1.1 Prueba del producto999.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia999.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.999.2 P y R102Especificaciones10410.1 General (S19E200NY / S19E200NW)10410.2 General (S19E200BW / S19E200BR)10510.3 General (S22E200NY)10610.4 General (S22E200B / S22E200N / S22E200BW)10710.5 General (S23E200B / S24E200BL)10810.6 General (S19E450BW / S19E450MW / S19E450BR / S19E450MR)10910.7 General (S22E450B / S22E450M / S22E450D)11010.8 General (S22E450BW / S22E450MW / S22E450DW)11210.9 General (S23E450B)11410.10 General (S24E450BL / S24E450DL)11510.11 General (S24E450B / S24E450M / S24E450D)11710.12 General (S24E650BW)11810.13 General (S27E450B / S27E450D)11910.14 Ahorro de energía12110.15 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar125Apéndice133Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago (Coste para los Clientes)133No se trata de un defecto del producto133El daño del producto ha sido causado por el cliente133Otros134Eliminación correcta135Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)135Extended warranty135Terminología136Índice138Taille: 8,7 MoPages: 139Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto7Copyright7Iconos utilizados en este manual7Limpieza8Seguridad en el espacio de instalación9Precauciones de almacenamiento9Precauciones de seguridad10Símbolos10Electricidad y seguridad11Instalación12Funcionamiento14Postura correcta para utilizar el producto19Preparativos201.1 Comprobación del contenido201.1.1 Extracción del embalaje201.1.2 Comprobación de los componentes211.2 Partes221.2.1 Botones delanteros221.2.2 Parte posterior241.3 Instalación251.3.1 Instalación de la base251.3.2 Ajuste de la inclinación y la altura del producto271.3.3 Giro del monitor271.3.4 Bloqueo antirrobo281.4 "MagicRotation Auto"29Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente302.1 Antes de conectar302.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión302.2 Conexión y uso de un PC312.2.1 Conexión a un PC312.2.2 Conexión de la alimentación332.2.3 Instalación de controladores352.2.4 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima362.2.5 Cambio de la resolución mediante un PC37Configuración de pantalla413.1 Brillo413.1.1 Configuración de Brillo413.2 Contraste423.2.1 Configuración de Contraste423.3 Nitidez433.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez433.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright443.4.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright443.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale463.5.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale463.6 Tamaño de imagen473.6.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen473.7 N.neg HDMI493.7.1 Ajuste de la configuración de N.neg HDMI493.8 Tiempo respuesta503.8.1 Configuración de Tiempo respuesta503.9 Posición-H y Posición-V513.9.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V513.10 Grueso523.10.1 Ajuste de Grueso523.11 Fino533.11.1 Ajuste de Fino53Configuración del matiz544.1 Rojo544.1.1 Configuración de Rojo544.2 Verde554.2.1 Configuración de Verde554.3 Azul564.3.1 Configuración de Azul564.4 Tono de color574.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color574.5 Gamma584.5.1 Configuración de Gamma58Coordinación de OSD595.1 Idioma595.1.1 Configuración de Idioma595.2 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú605.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú605.3 Mostrar hora615.3.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora615.4 Transparencia625.4.1 Modificación de Transparencia62Configuración y restauración636.1 Restaurar636.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)636.2 Ahorro energía646.2.1 Configuración de Ahorro energía646.3 Temp. apag.656.3.1 Configuración de Temp. apag.656.4 Apagar tras666.4.1 Configuración de Apagar tras666.5 Modo PC/AV676.5.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV676.6 Frec. rep. tecla686.6.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla686.7 Detección fuente696.7.1 Configuración de Detección fuente696.8 Tecla personaliz.706.8.1 Configuración de Tecla personaliz.70Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros717.1 INFORMACIÓN717.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN717.2 Configuración de Brillo y Contraste en la pantalla inicial727.3 Configuración de Volumen en la pantalla inicial73Instalación del software748.1 MagicTune748.1.1 ¿Qué es "MagicTune"?748.1.2 Instalación del software748.1.3 Eliminación del software758.2 MultiScreen768.2.1 Instalación del software768.2.2 Eliminación del software77Solución de problemas789.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung789.1.1 Prueba del producto789.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia789.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.789.2 P y R81Especificaciones8310.1 General8310.2 Ahorro de energía8410.3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar85Apéndice87Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE87Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago(Coste para los Clientes)93No se trata de un defecto del producto93El daño del producto ha sido causado por el cliente93Otros94Eliminación correcta95Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)95Terminología96Índice98Taille: 4,8 MoPages: 99Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto7Copyright7Iconos utilizados en este manual7Limpieza8Limpieza8Seguridad en el espacio de instalación9Precauciones de almacenamiento9Precauciones de seguridad10Símbolos de precauciones de seguridad10Electricidad y seguridad11Instalación12Funcionamiento14Postura correcta para utilizar el producto18Preparativos191.1 Comprobación del contenido191.1.1 Extracción del embalaje191.1.2 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Partes211.2.1 Botones delanteros211.2.2 Guía de teclas directas221.2.3 Guía de teclas de función231.2.4 Parte posterior251.3 Instalación261.3.1 Instalación del soporte261.3.2 Extracción del soporte271.3.3 Ajuste de la inclinación del producto281.3.4 Bloqueo antirrobo29Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente302.1 Antes de conectar302.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión302.2 Conexión de la alimentación302.3 Conexión y uso de un PC312.3.1 Conexión mediante el cable D-SUB (tipo Analógico)312.3.2 Conexión mediante un cable HDMI322.3.3 Conexión mediante un cable HDMI-DVI322.3.4 Conexión de los auriculares332.3.5 Sujeción de los cables conectados332.3.6 Cambiar la configuración del sonido en Windows.342.3.7 Instalación de controladores352.3.8 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima362.3.9 Cambio de la resolución mediante un PC37Configuración de pantalla413.1 Brillo413.1.1 Configuración de Brillo413.2 Contraste423.2.1 Configuración de Contraste423.3 Nitidez433.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez433.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright443.4.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright443.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale463.5.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale463.6 Tamaño de imagen473.6.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen473.7 N.neg HDMI493.7.1 Ajuste de la configuración de N.neg HDMI493.8 Tiempo respuesta503.8.1 Configuración de Tiempo respuesta503.9 Posición-H y Posición-V513.9.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V513.10 Grueso523.10.1 Ajuste de Grueso523.11 Fino533.11.1 Ajuste de Fino53Configuración de Matiz544.1 Rojo544.1.1 Configuración de Rojo544.2 Verde554.2.1 Configuración de Verde554.3 Azul564.3.1 Configuración de Azul564.4 Tono de color574.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color574.5 Gamma584.5.1 Configuración de Gamma58Coordinación de OSD595.1 Idioma595.1.1 Cambio del Idioma595.2 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú605.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú605.3 Mostrar hora615.3.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora615.4 Transparencia625.4.1 Modificación de Transparencia62Configuración y restauración636.1 Restaurar636.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)636.2 Ahorro energía646.2.1 Configuración de Ahorro energía646.3 Temp. apag.656.3.1 Configuración de Temp. apag.656.4 Apagar tras666.4.1 Configuración de Apagar tras666.5 Modo PC/AV676.5.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV676.6 Frec. rep. tecla686.6.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla686.7 Detección fuente696.7.1 Configuración de Detección fuente696.8 Activar LED706.8.1 Configuración de Activar LED70Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros717.1 INFORMACIÓN717.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN717.2 Configuración de Brillo y Contraste en la pantalla inicial727.3 Configuración de Volumen en la pantalla inicial73Instalación del software748.1 MagicTune748.1.1 ¿Qué es "MagicTune"?748.1.2 Instalación del software748.1.3 Eliminación del software758.2 MultiScreen768.2.1 Instalación del software768.2.2 Eliminación del software77Solución de problemas789.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung789.1.1 Prueba del producto789.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia789.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.789.2 P y R81Especificaciones8310.1 General8310.2 Ahorro de energía8510.3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar86Apéndice88Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE88Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago (Coste para los Clientes)94No se trata de un defecto del producto94El daño del producto ha sido causado por el cliente94Otros95Eliminación correcta96Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)96Terminología97Índice99Taille: 3,8 MoPages: 100Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto7Copyright7Iconos utilizados en este manual7Limpieza8Limpieza8Seguridad en el espacio de instalación9Precauciones de almacenamiento9Precauciones de seguridad10Símbolos10Electricidad y seguridad11Instalación12Funcionamiento14Postura correcta para utilizar el producto18Preparativos191.1 Comprobación del contenido191.1.1 Extracción del embalaje191.1.2 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Partes211.2.1 Botones delanteros211.2.2 Parte posterior231.2.3 Vista lateral derecha241.3 Instalación251.3.1 Instalación de la base251.3.2 Ajuste de la inclinación y la altura del producto261.3.3 Giro del monitor261.3.4 Instalación de un equipo de montaje mural o un soporte de escritorio271.3.5 Bloqueo antirrobo28Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente292.1 Antes de conectar292.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión292.2 Conexión de la alimentación292.3 Conexión y uso de un PC302.3.1 Conexión a un PC302.3.2 Instalación de controladores342.3.3 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima352.3.4 Cambio de la resolución mediante un PC36Configuración de pantalla403.1 Brillo403.1.1 Configuración de Brillo403.2 Contraste413.2.1 Configuración de Contraste413.3 Nitidez423.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez423.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright433.4.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright433.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle443.5.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle443.6 Tamaño de imagen463.6.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen463.7 Posición-H y Posición-V483.7.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V483.8 Grueso493.8.1 Ajuste de Grueso493.9 Fino503.9.1 Ajuste de Fino50Configuración del matiz514.1 Rojo514.1.1 Configuración de Rojo514.2 Verde524.2.1 Configuración de Verde524.3 Azul534.3.1 Configuración de Azul534.4 Tono de color544.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color544.5 Gamma554.5.1 Configuración de Gamma55Cambio de tamaño o reubicación de la pantalla565.1 Idioma565.1.1 Configuración de Idioma565.2 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú575.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú575.3 Mostrar hora585.3.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora585.4 Transparencia595.4.1 Modificación de Transparencia59Configuración y restauración606.1 Restaurar606.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)606.2 Ahorro energía616.2.1 Configuración de Ahorro energía616.3 Temp. apag.626.3.1 Configuración de Temp. apag.626.4 Apagar tras636.4.1 Configuración de Apagar tras636.5 Modo PC/AV646.5.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV646.6 Frec. rep. tecla656.6.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla656.7 Detección fuente666.7.1 Configuración de Detección fuente666.8 Tecla personaliz.676.8.1 Configuración de Tecla personaliz.67Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros687.1 INFORMACIÓN687.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN687.2 Configuración de Brillo y Contraste en la pantalla inicial69Instalación del software708.1 MagicTune708.1.1 ¿Qué es "MagicTune"?708.1.2 Instalación del software708.1.3 Eliminación del software718.2 MultiScreen728.2.1 Instalación del software728.2.2 Eliminación del software738.3 MagicRotation748.3.1 Instalación del software748.3.2 Eliminación del software76Solución de problemas779.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung779.1.1 Prueba del producto779.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia779.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.779.2 P y R80Especificaciones8210.1 General8210.2 Ahorro de energía8610.3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar87Apéndice93Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE93Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago (Coste para los Clientes)99No se trata de un defecto del producto99El daño del producto ha sido causado por el cliente99Otros100Eliminación correcta101Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)101Terminología102Índice104Taille: 5,1 MoPages: 105Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto7Copyright7Iconos utilizados en este manual7Limpieza8Seguridad en el espacio de instalación9Precauciones de almacenamiento9Precauciones de seguridad10Símbolos10Electricidad y seguridad11Instalación12Funcionamiento14Postura correcta para utilizar el producto19Preparativos201.1 Comprobación del contenido201.1.1 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Partes211.2.1 Botones delanteros211.2.2 Parte posterior231.3 Instalación241.3.1 Instalación del soporte241.3.2 Extracción del soporte251.3.3 Ajuste de la inclinación del producto261.3.4 Bloqueo antirrobo27Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente282.1 Antes de conectar282.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión282.2 Conexión y uso de un PC282.2.1 Conexión a un PC282.2.2 Conexión de la alimentación302.2.3 Instalación de controladores312.2.4 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima32Configuración de pantalla333.1 Brillo333.1.1 Configuración de Brillo333.2 Contraste343.2.1 Configuración de Contraste343.3 Nitidez353.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez353.4 Modo Juego363.4.1 Configuración de Modo Juego363.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright373.5.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright373.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle (S22D360H / S22D391H)393.6.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle393.7 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale413.7.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale413.8 Tamaño de imagen423.8.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen423.9 N.neg HDMI443.9.1 Ajuste de la configuración de N.neg HDMI443.10 Tiempo respuesta (S24D360HL / S24D391HL / S27D360H / S27D391H)453.10.1 Configuración de Tiempo respuesta453.11 Posición-H y Posición-V463.11.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V463.12 Grueso483.12.1 Ajuste de Grueso483.13 Fino493.13.1 Ajuste de Fino49Configuración del matiz504.1 Rojo504.1.1 Configuración de Rojo504.2 Verde514.2.1 Configuración de Verde514.3 Azul524.3.1 Configuración de Azul524.4 Tono de color534.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color534.5 Gamma544.5.1 Configuración de Gamma54Coordinación de OSD555.1 Idioma555.1.1 Configuración de Idioma555.2 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú565.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú565.3 Mostrar hora575.3.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora575.4 Transparencia585.4.1 Modificación de Transparencia58Configuración y restauración596.1 Restablecer todo596.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restablecer Todo)596.2 Ahorro energía606.2.1 Configuración de Ahorro energía606.3 Temp. apag.616.3.1 Configuración de Temp. apag.616.3.2 Configuración de Apagar tras626.4 Modo PC/AV636.4.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV636.5 Frec. rep. tecla646.5.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla646.6 Detección fuente656.6.1 Configuración de Detección fuente65Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros667.1 INFORMACIÓN667.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN667.2 Configuración de Brillo y Contraste en la pantalla inicial67Instalación del software688.1 Easy Setting Box688.1.1 Instalación del software688.1.2 Eliminación del software69Solución de problemas709.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung709.1.1 Prueba del producto709.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia709.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.709.2 P y R73Especificaciones7510.1 General7510.2 Ahorro de energía7610.3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar77Apéndice79Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE79Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago (Coste para los Clientes)85No se trata de un defecto del producto85El daño del producto ha sido causado por el cliente85Otros86Eliminación correcta87Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)87Terminología88Índice90Taille: 4 MoPages: 91Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresS19B350N/S19B350B/S20B350H/S22B350N/S22B350B/S22B350H/S23B350N/ S23B350B/S23B350H/S24B350BL/S24B350HL/S24B350B/S24B350H/S27B350H1Índice21 Principales precauciones de seguridad41-1 Antes de comenzar41-2 Conservación y mantenimiento51-3 Limpieza del monitor61-4 Precauciones de seguridad72 Instalación del producto132-1 Contenido del embalaje132-2 Instalación del soporte142-3 Conexión del monitor162-4 Bloqueo Kensington193 Uso del producto203-1 Configuración de la resolución óptima203-2 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar213-3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar223-4 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar233-5 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar243-6 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar253-7 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar263-8 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar273-9 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar283-10 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar293-11 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar303-12 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar313-13 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar323-14 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar333-15 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar343-16 Instalación del controlador del dispositivo353-17 Botones de funcionamiento del producto363-18 Uso del menú de ajuste de la pantalla (OSD: presentación en pantalla)383-19 Configuración de Brillo y Contraste en la pantalla inicial474 Instalación del software484-1 Natural Color484-2 MagicTune494-3 MultiScreen505 Solución de problemas515-1 Autodiagnóstico de monitor515-2 Antes de solicitar un servicio525-3 Preguntas habituales556 Más información576-1 Especificaciones576-2 Función de ahorro de energía586-3 Especificaciones596-4 Función de ahorro de energía606-5 Especificaciones616-6 Función de ahorro de energía626-7 Especificaciones636-8 Función de ahorro de energía646-9 Especificaciones656-10 Función de ahorro de energía666-11 Especificaciones676-12 Función de ahorro de energía686-13 Especificaciones696-14 Función de ahorro de energía706-15 Especificaciones716-16 Función de ahorro de energía726-17 Especificaciones736-18 Función de ahorro de energía746-19 Especificaciones756-20 Función de ahorro de energía766-21 Especificaciones776-22 Función de ahorro de energía786-23 Especificaciones796-24 Función de ahorro de energía806-25 Especificaciones816-26 Función de ahorro de energía826-27 Especificaciones836-28 Función de ahorro de energía846-29 Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE856-30 Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago (Coste para los Clientes)906-31 Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)91Taille: 1,2 MoPages: 91Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto7Copyright7Iconos utilizados en este manual7Símbolos de precauciones de seguridad8Limpieza9Limpieza9Seguridad en el espacio de instalación10Precauciones de almacenamiento10Precauciones de seguridad11Electricidad y seguridad11Instalación12Funcionamiento14Postura correcta para utilizar el producto18Preparativos191.1 Comprobación del contenido191.1.1 Extracción del embalaje191.1.2 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Partes211.2.1 Botones delanteros211.2.2 Parte posterior231.3 Instalación241.3.1 Instalación del soporte241.3.2 Ajuste de la inclinación del producto251.3.3 Instalación de un equipo de montaje mural o un soporte de escritorio261.3.4 Bloqueo antirrobo28Utilización de "MHL(Mobile High-Definition Link)"292.1 "MHL" (Enlace de alta definición móvil)292.1.1 Uso de "MHL"302.1.2 Desactivación de "MHL"32Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente333.1 Antes de conectar333.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión333.2 Conexión de la alimentación333.3 Conexión y uso de un PC343.3.1 Conexión a un PC343.3.2 Conexión de auriculares o altavoces363.3.3 Instalación de controladores383.3.4 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima393.3.5 Cambio de la resolución mediante un PC40Configuración de pantalla444.1 Brillo444.1.1 Configuración de Brillo444.2 Contraste454.2.1 Configuración de Contraste454.3 Nitidez464.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez464.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright474.4.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright474.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle494.5.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle494.6 Grueso514.6.1 Ajuste de Grueso514.7 Fino524.7.1 Ajuste de Fino524.8 Tiempo respuesta534.8.1 Configuración de Tiempo respuesta534.9 N.neg HDMI544.9.1 Ajuste de la configuración de N.neg HDMI54Configuración del matiz555.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color555.1.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Color555.2 Rojo565.2.1 Configuración de Rojo565.3 Verde575.3.1 Configuración de Verde575.4 Azul585.4.1 Configuración de Azul585.5 Tono de color595.5.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color595.6 Gamma605.6.1 Configuración de Gamma60Cambio de tamaño o reubicación de la pantalla616.1 Posición-H y Posición-V616.1.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V616.2 Tamaño de imagen626.2.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen626.3 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú646.3.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú64Configuración y restauración657.1 Restaurar657.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)657.2 Idioma667.2.1 Cambio del Idioma667.3 Ahorro energía677.3.1 Configuración de Ahorro energía677.4 Act/des temp apag687.4.1 Configuración de Act/des temp apag687.5 Conf.temp.apagado697.5.1 Configuración de Conf.temp.apagado697.6 Modo PC/AV707.6.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV707.7 Frec. rep. tecla717.7.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla717.8 Fuente autom.727.8.1 Configuración de Fuente autom.727.9 Mostrar hora737.9.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora737.10 Transp. menú747.10.1 Modificación de Transp. menú74Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros758.1 INFORMACIÓN758.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN758.2 Configuración de Volumen en la pantalla inicial768.2.1 Volumen768.2.2 Modo de sonido77Instalación del software789.1 Magic Tune789.1.1 ¿Qué es MagicTune?789.1.2 Instalación del software789.1.3 Eliminación del software799.2 MultiScreen809.2.1 Instalación del software809.2.2 Eliminación del software81Solución de problemas8210.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung8210.1.1 Prueba del producto8210.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia8210.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.8210.2 P y R85Especificaciones8711.1 General8711.2 Ahorro de energía8911.3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar90Apéndice93Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE93Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago (Coste para los Clientes)99No se trata de un defecto del producto99El daño del producto ha sido causado por el cliente99Otros100Eliminación correcta101Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)101Terminología102Índice104Taille: 4,9 MoPages: 105Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto7Copyright7Iconos utilizados en este manual7Limpieza8Seguridad en el espacio de instalación9Precauciones de almacenamiento9Precauciones de seguridad10Símbolos10Electricidad y seguridad11Instalación12Funcionamiento14Postura correcta para utilizar el producto19Preparativos201.1 Comprobación del contenido201.1.1 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Partes211.2.1 Panel de control211.2.2 Guía de teclas directas221.2.3 Guía de teclas de función231.2.4 Parte posterior251.3 Instalación261.3.1 Instalación del soporte261.3.2 Extracción del soporte271.3.3 Ajuste de la inclinación del producto281.3.4 Bloqueo antirrobo28Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente302.1 Antes de conectar302.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión302.2 Conexión y uso de un PC302.2.1 Conexión a un PC302.2.2 Conexión de la alimentación332.2.3 Instalación de controladores352.2.4 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima36Configuración de pantalla373.1 Brillo373.1.1 Configuración de Brillo373.2 Contraste383.2.1 Configuración de Contraste383.3 Nitidez393.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez393.4 Modo Juego403.4.1 Configuración de Modo Juego403.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright413.5.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright413.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale433.6.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale433.7 Tamaño de imagen443.7.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen443.8 N.neg HDMI463.8.1 Ajuste de la configuración de N.neg HDMI463.9 Tiempo respuesta473.9.1 Configuración de Tiempo respuesta473.10 Posición-H y Posición-V483.10.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V483.11 Grueso493.11.1 Ajuste de Grueso493.12 Fino503.12.1 Ajuste de Fino50Configuración del matiz514.1 Rojo514.1.1 Configuración de Rojo514.2 Verde524.2.1 Configuración de Verde524.3 Azul534.3.1 Configuración de Azul534.4 Tono de color544.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color544.5 Gamma554.5.1 Configuración de Gamma55Coordinación de OSD565.1 Idioma565.1.1 Configuración de Idioma565.2 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú575.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú575.3 Mostrar hora585.3.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora585.4 Transparencia595.4.1 Modificación de Transparencia59Configuración y restauración606.1 Restablecer todo606.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restablecer Todo)606.2 Ahorro energía616.2.1 Configuración de Ahorro energía616.3 Temp. apag.626.3.1 Configuración de Temp. apag.626.3.2 Configuración de Apagar tras636.4 Modo PC/AV646.4.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV646.5 Frec. rep. tecla656.5.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla656.6 Detección fuente666.6.1 Configuración de Detección fuente666.7 Activar LED676.7.1 Configuración de Activar LED67Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros687.1 INFORMACIÓN687.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN687.2 Configuración de Brillo y Contraste en la pantalla inicial697.3 Configuración de Volumen en la pantalla inicial707.3.1 Volumen70Instalación del software718.1 Easy Setting Box718.1.1 Instalación del software718.1.2 Eliminación del software72Solución de problemas739.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung739.1.1 Prueba del producto739.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia739.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.739.2 P y R76Especificaciones7810.1 General (S24D590PL)7810.2 General (S27D590P)7910.3 Ahorro de energía8010.4 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar81Apéndice83Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE83Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago (Coste para los Clientes)89No se trata de un defecto del producto89El daño del producto ha sido causado por el cliente89Otros90Eliminación correcta91Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)91Terminología92Índice94Taille: 3,1 MoPages: 95Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières목차2사용하기 전에7저작권7본문에서 사용되는 아이콘7청소 관련8청소하기8설치공간 확보하기9보관 시 주의사항9안전을 위한 주의사항10안전을 위한 주의사항에서 사용되는 아이콘10전원 관련11설치 관련12사용 관련14제품의 올바른 사용자세18준비191.1 내용물 확인하기191.1.1 포장상자 분리하기191.1.2 구성품 확인하기201.2 각부의 명칭211.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명211.2.2 바로가기 버튼 화면221.2.3 기능 버튼 화면231.2.4 뒷면설명251.3 설치하기261.3.1 받침대 장착하기261.3.2 받침대 제거하기271.3.3 제품의 기울기 조정281.3.4 도난 방지용 잠금장치29외부기기와 연결 및 사용하기302.1 연결 전 확인 사항302.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.302.2 전원 연결302.3 PC와 연결 및 사용하기312.3.1 D-SUB 케이블 연결 방식(아날로그 방식)312.3.2 HDMI 케이블 연결 방식322.3.3 HDMI-DVI 케이블 연결 방식322.3.4 헤드폰 연결하기332.3.5 연결된 케이블 정리하기332.3.6 Windows 사운드 설정 변경하기342.3.7 제품 드라이버 설치하기352.3.8 최적해상도 설정하기362.3.9 PC로 해상도 설정하기37화면 설정하기413.1 밝기413.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면413.2 명암423.2.1 명암을 설정하려면423.3 선명도433.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면433.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright443.4.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면443.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale463.5.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale을 설정하려면463.6 화면 크기473.6.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면473.7 HDMI 블랙 레벨493.7.1 HDMI 블랙 레벨을 설정하려면493.8 응답 속도503.8.1 응답 속도를 설정하려면503.9 수평 위치 & 수직 위치513.9.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면513.10 주파수 조정523.10.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면523.11 미세 조정533.11.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면53색상 설정하기544.1 적544.1.1 적을 설정하려면544.2 녹554.2.1 녹을 설정하려면554.3 청564.3.1 청을 설정하려면564.4 바탕색 조정574.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면574.5 감마 조정584.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면58OSD 조정하기595.1 메뉴 언어595.1.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면595.2 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치605.2.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면605.3 표시 시간615.3.1 표시 시간을 설정하려면615.4 투명도625.4.1 투명도를 설정하려면62설정 및 초기화하기636.1 초기화636.1.1 초기화를 설정하려면636.2 에코 세이빙646.2.1 에코 세이빙을 설정하려면646.3 꺼짐 예약656.3.1 꺼짐 예약을 설정하려면656.4 꺼짐 시간설정666.4.1 꺼짐 시간설정을 설정하려면666.5 PC/AV 모드676.5.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면676.6 키반복 시간설정686.6.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면686.7 입력 인식696.7.1 입력 인식을 설정하려면696.8 전원 LED 켜짐706.8.1 전원 LED 켜짐을 설정하려면70정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴717.1 정보 표시717.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면717.2 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암 설정727.3 초기화면에서 음량 설정73소프트웨어 설치748.1 MagicTune748.1.1 "MagicTune"이란?748.1.2 설치748.1.3 설치 제거758.2 MultiScreen768.2.1 MultiScreen 설치768.2.2 MultiScreen 삭제77문제발생 시 해결방안789.1 고장신고 전 확인사항789.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기789.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기789.1.3 확인해 보세요.789.2 궁금해요 (Q&A)81제품규격8310.1 제품사양8310.2 절전 기능8510.3 표준신호모드표86기타 정보88고객 등록88서비스센터 안내88유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임89제품 고장이 아닌경우89소비자 과실로 고장이 난 경우89그 밖의 경우89재활용 정보90무료처리90유료처리90삼성전자의 [녹색경영]91용어설명92찾아보기94Taille: 4,6 MoPages: 95Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières목차2사용하기 전에7저작권7본문에서 사용되는 아이콘7청소하기8청소하기8설치공간 확보하기9보관 시 주의사항9안전을 위한 주의사항10표시 내용10전원 관련11설치 관련12사용 관련14제품의 올바른 사용자세17준비181.1 내용물 확인하기181.1.1 포장상자 분리하기181.1.2 구성품 확인하기191.2 각부의 명칭201.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명201.2.2 뒷면설명221.3 설치하기231.3.1 받침대 조립하기231.3.2 제품의 기울기 및 높낮이 조정241.3.3 모니터 회전하기241.3.4 도난 방지용 잠금장치251.4 "MagicRotation Auto"26외부기기 연결 및 사용하기272.1 연결 전 확인 사항272.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.272.2 전원 연결하기272.3 PC와 연결 및 사용하기282.3.1 PC와 연결하기282.3.2 제품 드라이버 설치하기322.3.3 최적해상도 설정하기332.3.4 PC로 해상도 설정하기34화면 설정하기383.1 밝기383.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면383.2 명암393.2.1 명암을 설정하려면393.3 선명도403.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면403.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright413.4.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면413.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale433.5.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale을 설정하려면433.6 화면 크기443.6.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면443.7 HDMI 블랙 레벨463.7.1 HDMI 블랙 레벨을 설정하려면463.8 응답 속도473.8.1 응답 속도를 설정하려면473.9 수평 위치 & 수직 위치483.9.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면483.10 주파수 조정493.10.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면493.11 미세 조정503.11.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면50색상 설정하기514.1 적514.1.1 적을 설정하려면514.2 녹524.2.1 녹을 설정하려면524.3 청534.3.1 청을 설정하려면534.4 바탕색 조정544.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면544.5 감마 조정554.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면55OSD 조정하기565.1 메뉴 언어565.1.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면565.2 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치575.2.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면575.3 표시 시간585.3.1 표시 시간을 설정하려면585.4 투명도595.4.1 투명도를 설정하려면59설정 및 초기화하기606.1 초기화606.1.1 초기화를 설정하려면606.2 에코 세이빙616.2.1 에코 세이빙을 설정하려면616.3 꺼짐 예약626.3.1 꺼짐 예약를 설정하려면626.4 꺼짐 시간설정636.4.1 꺼짐 시간설정을 설정하려면636.5 PC / AV 모드646.5.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면646.6 키반복 시간설정656.6.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면656.7 입력 인식666.7.1 입력 인식을 설정하려면666.8 맞춤키676.8.1 맞춤키를 설정하려면67정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴687.1 정보 표시687.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면687.2 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암 설정697.3 초기화면에서 음량 설정70소프트웨어 설치718.1 MagicTune718.1.1 "MagicTune"이란?718.1.2 설치718.1.3 설치 제거728.2 MultiScreen738.2.1 "MultiScreen" 설치738.2.2 MultiScreen 삭제74문제발생 시 해결방안759.1 고장신고 전 확인사항759.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기759.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기759.1.3 확인해 보세요.759.2 궁금해요 (Q&A)77제품규격7810.1 제품사양7810.2 절전 기능8010.3 표준신호모드표81기타 정보83고객 등록83서비스센터 안내84유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임85제품 고장이 아닌경우85소비자 과실로 고장이 난 경우85그 밖의 경우85재활용 정보86무료처리86유료 처리86삼성전자의 [녹색경영]86용어설명87찾아보기89Taille: 4,3 MoPages: 90Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresS19B150N/S22B150N/S24B150NL1Table Of Contents21 Major Safety Precautions31-1 Before You Start31-2 Custody and Maintenance41-3 Cleaning the Monitor51-4 Safety Precautions62 Installing the Product112-1 Package Contents112-2 Installing the Stand122-3 Connecting the monitor142-4 Kensington Lock153 Using the product163-1 Setting the Optimal Resolution163-2 Standard Signal Mode Table173-3 Installing the Device Driver203-4 Product Operating Buttons213-5 Using the Screen Adjustment Menu (OSD: On Screen Display)233-6 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen284 Installing the Software294-1 Natural Color294-2 MagicTune304-3 MultiScreen315 Troubleshooting325-1 Monitor Self-Diagnosis325-2 Before Requesting Service335-3 FAQ356 More Information366-1 Specifications366-2 Power Saving Function396-3 Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE406-4 Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)456-5 Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)46Taille: 960 koPages: 46Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresBefore Using the Product2Copyright2Icons used in this manual2Symbols for safety precautions2Cleaning3Cleaning3Securing the Installation Space4Precautions for Storage4Safety Precautions4Electricity and Safety4Installation6Operation8Correct posture to use the product12Table Of Contents13Preparations181.1 Checking the Contents181.1.1 Removing the Packaging181.1.2 Checking the Components191.2 Attaching the Stand201.3 Parts221.3.1 Frontal Buttons221.3.2 Reverse Side251.3.3 Tidying Up the Connected Cables261.3.4 Anti-theft Lock261.3.5 Adjusting the Product Tilt273D282.1 3D282.1.1 3D Mode282.1.2 Depth292.1.3 L/R Change302.1.4 3D2D302.2 Standard HDMI-Compatible Formats312.3 Resolution Supported for PC Input (via the HDMI Port)312.4 Playing 3D Games on a PC322.5 Precautions when Viewing 3D Video33Connecting and Using a Source Device343.1 Before Connecting343.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints343.2 Connecting the Power353.3 Connecting and Using a PC363.3.1 Connecting to a PC363.3.2 Driver Installation383.3.3 Changing the Resolution Using a PC383.4 Connecting to a Video Device403.4.1 Connection Using an HDMI Cable403.5 Setting Optimum Resolution423.6 Connecting Headphones42Screen Setup434.1 MAGIC434.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle434.1.2 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright444.1.3 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color454.2 Brightness464.2.1 Configuring Brightness464.3 Contrast474.3.1 Configuring Contrast474.4 Sharpness484.4.1 Configuring Sharpness484.5 Response Time484.5.1 Configuring Response Time494.6 HDMI Black Level49Configuring Tint515.1 Red515.1.1 Configuring Red515.2 Green515.2.1 Configuring Green515.3 Blue525.3.1 Configuring Blue525.4 Color Tone535.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings535.5 Gamma545.5.1 Configuring Gamma54Resizing or Relocating the Screen556.1 Size556.1.1 Changing the Picture Size556.2 Horizontal Position566.2.1 Configuring H-Position566.3 Vertical Position566.3.1 Configuring V-Position566.4 Menu H-Position576.4.1 Configuring Menu H-Position576.5 Menu V-Position586.5.1 Configuring Menu V-Position58Setup and Reset597.1 Eco Saving597.2 Menu Transparency597.2.1 Changing Menu Transparency597.3 Language607.3.1 Changing the Language607.4 PC/AV Mode617.4.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode617.5 Auto Source627.5.1 Configuring Auto Source627.6 Display Time627.6.1 Configuring Display Time627.7 Key Repeat Time637.7.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time637.8 Customized Key647.8.1 Configuring Customized Key647.9 Off Timer On/Off647.9.1 Configuring Off Timer On/Off647.10 Off Timer Setting657.10.1 Configuring Off Timer Setting657.11 Reset667.11.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)66INFORMATION Menu and Others678.1 INFORMATION678.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION678.2 Configuring Brightness in the Startup Screen678.3 Configuring Volume in the Startup Screen68Troubleshooting Guide699.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center699.1.1 Testing the Product699.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency699.1.3 Check the followings.699.2 Q & A72Specifications7410.1 General7410.2 PowerSaver7510.3 Standard Signal Mode Table76Appendix79Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE79Correct Disposal84Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)84Correct disposal of batteries in this product84Terminology85Index87Taille: 3,9 MoPages: 88Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresBefore Using the Product2Copyright2Icons used in this manual2Symbols for safety precautions2Cleaning3Cleaning3Securing the Installation Space4Precautions for Storage4Safety Precautions4Electricity and Safety4Installation6Operation8Correct posture to use the product12Table Of Contents13Preparations181.1 Checking the Contents181.1.1 Removing the Packaging181.1.2 Checking the Components191.2 Attaching the Stand201.3 Parts221.3.1 Frontal Buttons221.3.2 Reverse Side251.3.3 Tidying Up the Connected Cables261.3.4 Anti-theft Lock261.3.5 Adjusting the Product Tilt273D282.1 3D282.1.1 3D Mode282.1.2 Depth292.1.3 L/R Change302.1.4 3D2D302.2 Standard HDMI-Compatible Formats312.3 Resolution Supported for PC Input (via the HDMI Port)312.4 Playing 3D Games on a PC322.5 Precautions when Viewing 3D Video33Connecting and Using a Source Device343.1 Before Connecting343.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints343.2 Connecting the Power353.3 Connecting and Using a PC363.3.1 Connecting to a PC363.3.2 Driver Installation383.3.3 Changing the Resolution Using a PC383.4 Connecting to a Video Device403.4.1 Connection Using an HDMI Cable403.5 Setting Optimum Resolution423.6 Connecting Headphones42Screen Setup434.1 MAGIC434.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle434.1.2 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright444.1.3 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color454.2 Brightness464.2.1 Configuring Brightness464.3 Contrast474.3.1 Configuring Contrast474.4 Sharpness484.4.1 Configuring Sharpness484.5 Response Time484.5.1 Configuring Response Time494.6 HDMI Black Level49Configuring Tint515.1 Red515.1.1 Configuring Red515.2 Green515.2.1 Configuring Green515.3 Blue525.3.1 Configuring Blue525.4 Color Tone535.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings535.5 Gamma545.5.1 Configuring Gamma54Resizing or Relocating the Screen556.1 Size556.1.1 Changing the Picture Size556.2 Horizontal Position566.2.1 Configuring H-Position566.3 Vertical Position566.3.1 Configuring V-Position566.4 Menu H-Position576.4.1 Configuring Menu H-Position576.5 Menu V-Position586.5.1 Configuring Menu V-Position58Setup and Reset597.1 Eco Saving597.2 Menu Transparency597.2.1 Changing Menu Transparency597.3 Language607.3.1 Changing the Language607.4 PC/AV Mode617.4.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode617.5 Auto Source627.5.1 Configuring Auto Source627.6 Display Time627.6.1 Configuring Display Time627.7 Key Repeat Time637.7.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time637.8 Customized Key647.8.1 Configuring Customized Key647.9 Off Timer On/Off647.9.1 Configuring Off Timer On/Off647.10 Off Timer Setting657.10.1 Configuring Off Timer Setting657.11 Reset667.11.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)66INFORMATION Menu and Others678.1 INFORMATION678.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION678.2 Configuring Brightness in the Startup Screen678.3 Configuring Volume in the Startup Screen68Troubleshooting Guide699.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center699.1.1 Testing the Product699.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency699.1.3 Check the followings.699.2 Q & A72Specifications7410.1 General7410.2 PowerSaver7510.3 Standard Signal Mode Table76Appendix79Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE79Correct Disposal84Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)84Correct disposal of batteries in this product84Terminology85Index87Taille: 4,6 MoPages: 88Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresLCD Monitor1Safety Instructions2Notational2Power2Installation3Clean4Others5Introduction10Package Contents10Unpacking10Your Monitor11Initial Settings11Front11Rear12Connections15Connecting Cables15Using the Stand16Folding the base16Attaching a Base16Using the Software18Monitor Driver18Installing the Monitor Driver (Automatic)18Installing the Monitor Driver (Manual)19Natural Color26Natural Color Software Program26How to install the Natural Color software26How to delete the Natural Color software program26MagicTune™27Installation27Installation Problems27System Requirements27Uninstall28MultiScreen28Installation29Installation Problems29System Requirements29Uninstall29Adjusting the Monitor31{2033SW} Direct Functions31AUTO31OSD Lock & Unlock31Customized key32Brightness33SOURCE33{2033SW} OSD Function33Picture33Brightness33Contrast34MagicBright34Color35MagicColor35Color Tone36Color Control36Color Effect37Gamma37Image38Coarse38Fine38Sharpness39H-Position39V-Position39OSD40Language40Transparency40Display Time41Setup41Reset41Customized Key42Off Timer42Auto Source42Image Size43Information43{2233SW} Direct Functions44AUTO44OSD Lock & Unlock44Customized key45Brightness46SOURCE46{2233SW} OSD Function46Picture46Brightness46Contrast47MagicBright47Color48MagicColor48Color Tone49Color Control49Color Effect50Gamma50Image51Coarse51Fine51Sharpness52H-Position52V-Position52OSD53Language53Transparency53Display Time54Setup54Reset54Customized Key55Off Timer55Auto Source55Image Size56Information56Troubleshooting57{2033SW} Self-Test Feature Check57Self-Test Feature Check57Warning Messages57Environment57Useful Tips57{2033SW} Check List58No images on the screen. I cannot turn on the monitor.58I cannot see the On Screen Display.59The screen shows strange colors or just black and white.59The screen suddenly has become unbalanced.59The screen is out of focus or OSD cannot be adjusted.60LED is blinking but no images on the screen.60There are only 16 colors shown on the screen. The screen colors have changed after changing the video card.60There is a message that reads "Unrecognized monitor, Plug & Play (VESA DDC) monitor found".60Check when MagicTune™ does not function properly.60MagicTune™ doesn't work properly.61Check the following items if there is trouble with the monitor.61{2033SW} Q & A61{2233SW} Self-Test Feature Check62Self-Test Feature Check62Warning Messages63Environment63Useful Tips63{2233SW} Check List63No images on the screen. I cannot turn on the monitor.63I cannot see the On Screen Display.64The screen shows strange colors or just black and white.64The screen suddenly has become unbalanced.65The screen is out of focus or OSD cannot be adjusted.65LED is blinking but no images on the screen.65There are only 16 colors shown on the screen. The screen colors have changed after changing the video card.65There is a message that reads "Unrecognized monitor, Plug & Play (VESA DDC) monitor found".66Check when MagicTune™ does not function properly.66MagicTune™ doesn't work properly.66Check the following items if there is trouble with the monitor.66{2233SW} Q & A67Specifications68General68PowerSaver69Preset Timing Modes70General71PowerSaver72Preset Timing Modes73Information74{2033SW} For Better Display74{2033SW} PRODUCT INFORMATION (Image Retention Free)74{2233SW} For Better Display77{2233SW} PRODUCT INFORMATION (Image Retention Free)78Appendix81Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE81Terms83Correct Disposal84Authority84Taille: 4 MoPages: 84Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresLCD Monitor1Instrucciones de seguridad2Símbolos2Alimentación eléctrica2Instalación3Limpieza4Otros5Introducción10Contenido del embalaje10Desembalaje10Su monitor11Configuración inicial11Parte frontal11Parte posterior12Conexiones15Conexión de cables15Uso del soporte16Plegado de la base16Montaje de la base16Uso del software18Controlador del monitor18Instalación del controlador del monitor (automáticamente)18Instalación del controlador del monitor (manualmente)19Natural Color27Programa de software Natural Color27Cómo instalar el software Natural Color27Cómo borrar el programa de software Natural Color27MagicTune™28Instalación28Problemas de instalación28Requisitos del sistema29Desinstalar29MultiScreen30Instalación30Problemas de instalación30Requisitos del sistema30Desinstalar31Ajuste del monitor32{2033SW} Funciones directas32AUTO32Bloqueo y desbloqueo de la pantalla32Tecla personaliz.33Brillo34SOURCE34{2033SW} Funciones OSD34Imagen34Brillo34Contraste35MagicBright35Color36MagicColor36Tono de color37Control de color37Efecto de color38Gamma:38Imagen39Grueso39Fino39Nitidez40Posición-H40Posición-V40OSD41Idioma41Transparenc.41Mostrar hora42Configuración42Restaurar42Tecla personaliz.43Temp. apag.43Fuente autom.43Tamaño de imagen44Información44{2233SW} Funciones directas45AUTO45Bloqueo y desbloqueo de la pantalla45Tecla personaliz.46Brillo47SOURCE47{2233SW} Funciones OSD47Imagen47Brillo47Contraste48MagicBright48Color49MagicColor49Tono de color50Control de color50Efecto de color51Gamma:51Imagen52Grueso52Fino52Nitidez53Posición-H53Posición-V53OSD54Idioma54Transparenc.54Mostrar hora55Configuración55Restaurar55Tecla personaliz.56Temp. apag.56Fuente autom.56Tamaño de imagen57Información57Solución de problemas58{2033SW} Comprobación de las funciones de autoverificación58Comprobación de las funciones de autoverificación58Mensajes de advertencia58Entorno58Consejos útiles58{2033SW} Lista de comprobación59No hay imágenes en la pantalla. No puedo encender el monitor.59No puedo ver la presentación en pantalla (OSD).60La pantalla muestra colores extraños o sólo blanco y negro.60La pantalla súbitamente se vuelve inestable.60La pantalla está desenfocada o la OSD no se puede ajustar.61El LED parpadea pero no se ve ninguna imagen en la pantalla.61Sólo se muestran 16 colores en la pantalla. Los colores de la pantalla se han cambiado después de cambiar la tarjeta de vídeo.61Aparece el mensaje "Monitor no reconocido, encontrado monitor Plug & Play (VESA DDC)".61Compruebe si MagicTune™ funciona correctamente.61MagicTune™ no funciona correctamente.62Compruebe los siguientes elementos si hay problemas en el monitor.62{2033SW} P y R62{2233SW} Comprobación de las funciones de autoverificación63Comprobación de las funciones de autoverificación63Mensajes de advertencia64Entorno64Consejos útiles64{2233SW} Lista de comprobación65No hay imágenes en la pantalla. No puedo encender el monitor.65No puedo ver la presentación en pantalla (OSD).66La pantalla muestra colores extraños o sólo blanco y negro.66La pantalla súbitamente se vuelve inestable.66La pantalla está desenfocada o la OSD no se puede ajustar.66El LED parpadea pero no se ve ninguna imagen en la pantalla.67Sólo se muestran 16 colores en la pantalla. Los colores de la pantalla se han cambiado después de cambiar la tarjeta de vídeo.67Aparece el mensaje "Monitor no reconocido, encontrado monitor Plug & Play (VESA DDC)".67Compruebe si MagicTune™ funciona correctamente.67MagicTune™ no funciona correctamente.67Compruebe los siguientes elementos si hay problemas en el monitor.68{2233SW} P y R68Especificaciones70General70Ahorro de energía71Modos de temporización predefinidos72General73Ahorro de energía74Modos de temporización predefinidos75Información76{2033SW} Para una mejor visualización76{2033SW} INFORMACIÓN DEL PRODUCTO (sin retención de imagen)76{2233SW} Para una mejor visualización79{2233SW} INFORMACIÓN DEL PRODUCTO (sin retención de imagen)80Términos86Eliminación correcta87Autoridad87Taille: 4 MoPages: 88Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières사용하기 전에2저작권2본문에서 사용되는 아이콘2안전을 위한 주의사항에서 사용되는 아이콘2청소하기3청소하기3설치공간 확보하기4보관 시 주의사항4안전을 위한 주의사항4전원 관련4설치 관련6사용 관련7제품의 올바른 사용자세11목차12준비171.1 내용물 확인하기171.1.1 포장상자 분리하기171.1.2 구성품 확인하기181.2 각부의 명칭191.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명191.2.2 뒷면설명211.3 설치하기231.3.1 받침대 조립하기231.3.2 제품의 기울기 및 높낮이 조정241.3.3 모니터 회전하기241.3.4 걸이용 받침대 설치251.3.5 도난 방지용 잠금장치261.4 "MagicRotation Auto"27외부기기 연결 및 사용하기282.1 연결 전 확인 사항282.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.282.2 PC와 연결 및 사용하기292.2.1 PC와 연결하기292.2.2 제품 드라이버 설치하기312.2.3 최적해상도 설정하기322.2.4 PC로 해상도 설정하기332.3 헤드폰 연결하기 (SA850 모델만 해당 됩니다.)362.4 USB HUB 연결 및 사용하기 (SA850 모델만 해당 됩니다.)372.4.1 제품과 PC 연결하기372.4.2 USB HUB 활용하기372.5 전원 연결하기38화면 설정하기393.1 MAGIC393.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright393.1.2 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color403.2 밝기413.2.1 밝기를 설정하려면413.3 명암423.3.1 명암을 설정하려면423.4 선명도433.4.1 선명도를 설정하려면433.5 주파수 조정443.5.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면443.6 미세 조정453.6.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면453.7 응답속도463.7.1 응답속도를 설정하려면46색상 설정하기474.1 적474.1.1 적을 설정하려면474.2 녹484.2.1 녹을 설정하려면484.3 청494.3.1 청을 설정하려면494.4 바탕색 조정504.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면504.5 감마 조정514.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면51크기 및 위치 설정하기525.1 화면 크기525.1.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면525.2 수평 위치 & 수직 위치535.2.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면535.3 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치545.3.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면54설정 및 초기화하기556.1 ECO556.1.1 에코 모션 센서556.1.2 에코 라이트 센서576.1.3 에코 세이빙606.1.4 에코 아이콘 표시616.2 메뉴 투명도626.2.1 메뉴 투명도를 설정하려면636.3 메뉴 언어646.3.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면646.4 PC/AV 모드656.4.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면656.5 자동 입력 선택666.5.1 자동 입력 선택을 설정하려면666.6 메뉴 표시 시간676.6.1 메뉴 표시 시간을 설정하려면676.7 키반복 시간설정686.7.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면686.8 맞춤키696.8.1 맞춤키를 설정하려면696.9 꺼짐 예약 동작/해제706.9.1 꺼짐 예약 동작/해제를 설정하려면706.10 꺼짐 예약 설정716.10.1 꺼짐 예약 설정을 설정하려면716.11 초기화726.11.1 초기화를 설정하려면72정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴737.1 정보 표시737.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면737.2 초기화면에서 밝기 설정73문제발생 시 해결방안748.1 고장신고 전 확인사항748.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기748.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기748.1.3 확인해 보세요.748.2 궁금해요.(Q&A)77제품규격789.1 제품사양789.2 절전 기능799.3 표준신호모드표80기타 정보82고객 등록82서비스센터 안내83재활용 정보84무료처리84유료 처리84삼성전자의 [녹색경영]84용어설명85찾아보기87Taille: 4,4 MoPages: 88Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster TA3001Contenido3Introducción4Listado de características11Accesorios11Aspecto general del panel de control12Aspecto general del Control remoto13Cómo desplazarse por los menús14Conexión de una antena14Plug & Play (configuración inicial)15Conexiones16Conexión a un dispositivo AV16Conexión a la PC17Cambio de la fuente de entrada19Funciones básicas20Menú Canal20Visualización de canales20Uso de los canales favoritos20Memorización de canales20Edición de canales21Otras funciones21Menú de la imagen22Cambio del modo de la imagen preseleccionado22Ajuste de la configuración de la imagen22Cambio de las opciones de la imagen23Menú del sonido25Cambio del modo de sonido preseleccionado25Ajuste de la configuración del sonido25Configuración del sonido25Menú de configuración26Configuración de la hora26Uso del temporizador de desconexión26Activación y desactivación del temporizador26Programas de bloqueo27Otras funciones28Menú de asistencia técnica30Funciones avanzadas31Media Play (USB)31Conexión de un dispositivo USB31Información adicional35Instalación del soporte de pared/soporte de escritorio35Bloqueo Anti-robo Kensington36Montaje de los cables36Solución de problemas37Almacenamiento y mantenimiento39Licencia39Especificaciones40Índice41Taille: 9,8 MoPages: 42Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresAntes de usar el producto2Copyright2Iconos utilizados en este manual3Símbolos de precauciones de seguridad3Limpieza4Limpieza4Seguridad en el espacio de instalación5Precauciones de almacenamiento5Precauciones de seguridad5Electricidad y seguridad5Instalación7Funcionamiento9Postura correcta para utilizar el producto13Índice14Preparativos191.1 Comprobación del contenido191.1.1 Extracción del embalaje191.1.2 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Partes211.2.1 Botones delanteros211.2.2 Parte posterior231.3 Instalación251.3.1 Instalación del soporte251.3.2 Ajuste de la inclinación y la altura del producto261.3.3 Giro del monitor261.3.4 Instalación de un equipo de montaje mural o un soporte de escritorio271.3.5 Bloqueo antirrobo281.4 "MagicRotation Auto"29Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente302.1 Antes de conectar302.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión302.2 Conexión y uso de un PC312.2.1 Conexión a un PC312.2.2 Instalación de controladores332.2.3 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima342.2.4 Cambio de la resolución mediante un PC352.3 Conexión de auriculares (sólo para el modelo SA850)382.4 Conexión del producto a un PC a modo de HUB USB (sólo para el modelo SA850)392.4.1 Conexión de un PC al producto392.4.2 Utilización del producto a modo de HUB USB392.5 Conexión de la alimentación40Configuración de pantalla413.1 MAGIC413.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright413.1.2 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color423.2 Brillo433.2.1 Configuración de Brillo433.3 Contraste443.3.1 Configuración de Contraste443.4 Nitidez453.4.1 Configuración de Nitidez453.5 Grueso463.5.1 Ajuste de Grueso463.6 Fino473.6.1 Ajuste de Fino473.7 Tiempo respuesta483.7.1 Configuración de Tiempo respuesta48Configuración del matiz494.1 Rojo494.1.1 Configuración de Rojo494.2 Verde504.2.1 Configuración de Verde504.3 Azul514.3.1 Configuración de Azul514.4 Tono de color524.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color524.5 Gamma534.5.1 Configuración de Gamma53Cambio de tamaño o reubicación de la pantalla545.1 Tamaño de imagen545.1.1 Cambio del Tamaño de la imagen545.2 Posición-H y Posición-V555.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V555.3 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú565.3.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú56Configuración y restauración576.1 ECO576.1.1 Sensor mov. econ.576.1.2 Sensor lum. econ.596.1.3 Ahorro energía626.1.4 Most. icono econ.636.2 Transp. menú656.2.1 Modificación de Transp. menú656.3 Idioma666.3.1 Cambio del Idioma666.4 Modo PC/AV676.4.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV676.5 Fuente autom.686.5.1 Configuración de Fuente autom.686.6 Mostrar hora696.6.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora696.7 Frec. rep. tecla706.7.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla706.8 Tecla personaliz.716.8.1 Configuración de Tecla personaliz.716.9 Act/des temp apag726.9.1 Configuración de Act/des temp apag726.10 Conf.temp.apagado736.10.1 Configuración de Conf.temp.apagado736.11 Restaurar746.11.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)74Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros757.1 INFORMACIÓN757.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN757.2 Configuración del Brillo de la pantalla de inicio75Solución de problemas768.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung768.1.1 Prueba del producto768.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia768.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.768.2 P y R79Especificaciones819.1 General819.2 Ahorro de energía839.3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar84Apéndice86Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE86Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)92Terminología93Índice95Taille: 4,1 MoPages: 96Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster S20A550H,S23A550H,S27A550H1차례21 주요 안전 사항31-1 사용설명서를 읽기 전에31-2 보관 및 관리41-3 청소하기51-4 안전을 위한 주의사항62 설치하기122-1 구성품 확인122-2 받침대 조립하기132-3 PC와 연결162-4 HDMI와 연결182-5 도난 방지용 잠금 장치193 사용하기203-1 최적해상도 설정203-2 표준신호모드표213-3 표준신호모드표223-4 표준신호모드표233-5 제품 드라이버 설치243-6 제품 조작 버튼 설명253-7 화면 조정 메뉴(OSD:On Screen Display) 사용하기274 소프트웨어 설치384-1 Natural Color384-2 MagicTune394-3 MultiScreen415 문제 해결425-1 모니터 자체 진단하기425-2 고장 신고 전 확인사항435-3 궁금해요456 기타정보466-1 제품규격466-2 절전 기능476-3 제품규격486-4 절전 기능496-5 제품규격506-6 절전 기능516-7 고객 등록526-8 서비스 센터 안내536-9 재활용 정보54Taille: 1,7 MoPages: 54Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster TA3001Contents3Getting Started4List of Features11Accessories11Viewing the Control Panel12Viewing the Remote Control13How to Navigate Menus14Connecting to an Antenna14Plug & Play (Initial Setup)15Connections16Connecting to an AV Device16Connecting to a PC17Changing the Input Source19Basic Features20Channel Menu20Seeing Channels20Using Favorite Channels20Memorizing Channels20Editing Channels21Other Features21Picture Menu22Changing the Preset Picture Mode22Adjusting Picture Settings22Changing the Picture Options23Sound Menu25Changing the Preset Sound Mode25Adjusting sound settings25Sound Settings25Setup Menu26Setting the Time26Using the Sleep Timer26Setting the On/Off Timer26Locking Programs27Other Features28Support Menu30Advanced Features31Media Play (USB)31Connecting a USB Device31Other Information35Attaching a Wall Mount/Desktop Stand35Anti-theft Kensington Lock36Assembling the Cables36Troubleshooting37Storage and Maintenance39License39Specifications40Index41Taille: 7 MoPages: 42Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières사용하기 전에2저작권2본문에서 사용되는 아이콘2안전을 위한 주의사항에서 사용되는 아이콘2청소하기3청소하기3설치공간 확보하기4보관 시 주의사항4안전을 위한 주의사항5전원 관련5설치 관련6사용 관련8제품의 올바른 사용자세12목차13준비171.1 내용물 확인하기171.1.1 포장상자 분리하기171.1.2 구성품 확인하기181.2 각부의 명칭191.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명191.2.2 뒷면설명211.3 설치하기221.3.1 받침대 조립하기221.3.2 제품의 기울기 및 높낮이 조정231.3.3 모니터 화면 회전하기231.3.4 걸이용 받침대 설치241.3.5 도난 방지용 잠금장치251.4 "MagicRotation Auto"26외부기기 연결 및 사용하기272.1 연결 전 확인 사항272.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.272.2 PC와 연결 및 사용하기282.2.1 PC와 연결하기282.2.2 제품 드라이버 설치하기292.2.3 최적해상도 설정하기302.2.4 PC로 해상도 설정하기312.3 헤드폰 연결하기342.4 USB HUB 연결 및 사용하기352.4.1 제품과 PC 연결하기352.4.2 USB HUB 활용하기352.5 전원 연결하기36화면 설정하기373.1 MAGIC373.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright373.1.2 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color383.2 밝기393.2.1 밝기를 설정하려면393.3 명암403.3.1 명암을 설정하려면403.4 선명도413.4.1 선명도를 설정하려면413.5 응답속도423.5.1 응답속도를 설정하려면42색상 설정하기434.1 적434.1.1 적을 설정하려면434.2 녹444.2.1 녹을 설정하려면444.3 청454.3.1 청을 설정하려면454.4 바탕색 조정464.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면464.5 감마 조정474.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면47크기 및 위치 설정하기485.1 PBP485.1.1 모드485.1.2 명암495.2 화면 크기505.2.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면505.3 수평 위치 & 수직 위치515.3.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면51설정 및 초기화하기526.1 ECO526.1.1 에코 모션 센서526.1.2 에코 라이트 센서546.1.3 에코 세이빙576.1.4 에코 아이콘 표시586.2 메뉴 투명도606.2.1 메뉴 투명도를 설정하려면606.3 메뉴 언어616.3.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면616.4 PC/AV 모드626.4.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면626.5 자동 입력 선택636.5.1 자동 입력 선택을 설정하려면636.6 메뉴 표시 시간646.6.1 메뉴 표시 시간을 설정하려면646.7 키반복 시간설정656.7.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면656.8 맞춤키666.8.1 맞춤키를 설정하려면666.9 꺼짐 예약 동작/해제676.9.1 꺼짐 예약 동작/해제를 설정하려면676.10 꺼짐 예약 설정686.10.1 꺼짐 예약 설정을 설정하려면686.11 초기화696.11.1 초기화를 설정하려면69정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴707.1 정보 표시707.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면707.2 초기화면에서 밝기 설정70문제발생 시 해결방안718.1 고장신고 전 확인사항718.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기718.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기718.1.3 확인해 보세요.718.2 궁금해요.(Q&A)73제품규격749.1 제품사양749.2 절전 기능759.3 표준신호모드표76기타 정보78고객 등록78서비스센터 안내79재활용 정보80무료처리80유료 처리80삼성전자의 [녹색경영]80용어설명81찾아보기83Taille: 5 MoPages: 84Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières사용하기 전에2저작권2본문에서 사용되는 아이콘2안전을 위한 주의사항에서 사용되는 아이콘2청소하기3청소하기3설치공간 확보하기4보관 시 주의사항4안전을 위한 주의사항5전원 관련5설치 관련6사용 관련8제품의 올바른 사용자세12목차13준비181.1 내용물 확인하기181.1.1 포장상자 분리하기181.1.2 구성품 확인하기191.2 각부의 명칭201.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명201.2.2 뒷면설명221.3 설치하기231.3.1 받침대 조립하기231.3.2 제품의 기울기 및 높낮이 조정241.3.3 모니터 회전하기241.3.4 걸이용 받침대 설치251.3.5 도난 방지용 잠금장치261.4 "MagicRotation Auto"27외부기기 연결 및 사용하기282.1 연결 전 확인 사항282.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.282.2 PC와 연결 및 사용하기292.2.1 PC와 연결하기292.2.2 제품 드라이버 설치하기312.2.3 최적해상도 설정하기322.2.4 PC로 해상도 설정하기332.3 헤드폰 연결하기362.4 USB HUB 연결 및 사용하기372.4.1 제품과 PC 연결하기372.4.2 USB HUB 활용하기372.5 전원 연결하기38화면 설정하기393.1 MAGIC393.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright393.1.2 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color403.2 밝기413.2.1 밝기를 설정하려면413.3 명암423.3.1 명암을 설정하려면423.4 선명도433.4.1 선명도를 설정하려면433.5 주파수 조정443.5.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면443.6 미세 조정453.6.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면453.7 응답 속도463.7.1 응답 속도를 설정하려면46색상 설정하기474.1 적474.1.1 적을 설정하려면474.2 녹484.2.1 녹을 설정하려면484.3 청494.3.1 청을 설정하려면494.4 바탕색 조정504.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면504.5 감마 조정514.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면51크기 및 위치 설정하기525.1 화면 크기525.1.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면525.2 수평 위치 & 수직 위치535.2.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면535.3 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치545.3.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면54설정 및 초기화하기556.1 ECO556.1.1 에코 모션 센서556.1.2 에코 라이트 센서576.1.3 에코 세이빙606.1.4 에코 아이콘 표시616.2 메뉴 투명도636.2.1 메뉴 투명도를 설정하려면636.3 메뉴 언어646.3.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면646.4 PC/AV 모드656.4.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면656.5 자동 입력 선택666.5.1 자동 입력 선택을 설정하려면666.6 메뉴 표시 시간676.6.1 메뉴 표시 시간을 설정하려면676.7 키반복 시간설정686.7.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면686.8 맞춤키696.8.1 맞춤키를 설정하려면696.9 꺼짐 예약 동작/해제706.9.1 꺼짐 예약 동작/해제를 설정하려면706.10 꺼짐 예약 설정716.10.1 꺼짐 예약 설정을 설정하려면716.11 초기화726.11.1 초기화를 설정하려면72정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴737.1 정보 표시737.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면737.2 초기화면에서 밝기 설정73문제발생 시 해결방안748.1 고장신고 전 확인사항748.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기748.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기748.1.3 확인해 보세요.748.2 궁금해요.(Q&A)77제품규격789.1 제품사양789.2 절전 기능799.3 표준신호모드표80기타 정보82고객 등록82서비스센터 안내83재활용 정보84무료처리84유료 처리84삼성전자의 [녹색경영]84용어설명85찾아보기87Taille: 5,2 MoPages: 88Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresS19B350N/S19B350B/S20B350H/S22B350N/S22B350B/S22B350H/S23B350N/ S23B350B/S23B350H/S24B350BL/S24B350HL/S24B350B/S24B350H/S27B350H1Table Of Contents21 Major Safety Precautions41-1 Before You Start41-2 Custody and Maintenance51-3 Cleaning the Monitor61-4 Safety Precautions72 Installing the Product132-1 Package Contents132-2 Installing the Stand142-3 Connecting the monitor162-4 Kensington Lock193 Using the product203-1 Setting the Optimal Resolution203-2 Standard Signal Mode Table213-3 Standard Signal Mode Table223-4 Standard Signal Mode Table233-5 Standard Signal Mode Table243-6 Standard Signal Mode Table253-7 Standard Signal Mode Table263-8 Standard Signal Mode Table273-9 Standard Signal Mode Table283-10 Standard Signal Mode Table293-11 Standard Signal Mode Table303-12 Standard Signal Mode Table313-13 Standard Signal Mode Table323-14 Standard Signal Mode Table333-15 Standard Signal Mode Table343-16 Installing the Device Driver353-17 Product Operating Buttons363-18 Using the Screen Adjustment Menu (OSD: On Screen Display)383-19 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen464 Installing the Software474-1 Natural Color474-2 MagicTune484-3 MultiScreen495 Troubleshooting505-1 Monitor Self-Diagnosis505-2 Before Requesting Service515-3 FAQ536 More Information556-1 Specifications556-2 Power Saving Function566-3 Specifications576-4 Power Saving Function586-5 Specifications596-6 Power Saving Function606-7 Specifications616-8 Power Saving Function626-9 Specifications636-10 Power Saving Function646-11 Specifications656-12 Power Saving Function666-13 Specifications676-14 Power Saving Function686-15 Specifications696-16 Power Saving Function706-17 Specifications716-18 Power Saving Function726-19 Specifications736-20 Power Saving Function746-21 Specifications756-22 Power Saving Function766-23 Specifications776-24 Power Saving Function786-25 Specifications796-26 Power Saving Function806-27 Specifications816-28 Power Saving Function826-29 Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE836-30 Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)886-31 Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)89Taille: 1,2 MoPages: 89Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresS19B350N/S19B350B/S20B350H/S22B350N/S22B350B/S22B350H/S23B350N/ S23B350B/S23B350H/S24B350BL/S24B350HL/S24B350B/S24B350H/S27B350H1차례21 주요 안전 사항41-1 사용설명서를 읽기 전에41-2 보관 및 관리51-3 청소하기61-4 안전을 위한 주의사항72 설치하기122-1 구성품 확인122-2 받침대 조립하기132-3 모니터에 외부기기 연결하기152-4 도난 방지용 잠금 장치183 사용하기193-1 최적해상도 설정193-2 표준신호모드표203-3 표준신호모드표213-4 표준신호모드표223-5 표준신호모드표233-6 표준신호모드표243-7 표준신호모드표253-8 표준신호모드표263-9 표준신호모드표273-10 표준신호모드표283-11 표준신호모드표293-12 표준신호모드표303-13 표준신호모드표313-14 표준신호모드표323-15 표준신호모드표333-16 제품 드라이버 설치343-17 제품 조작 버튼 설명353-18 화면 조정 메뉴(OSD:On Screen Display) 사용하기373-19 초기화면에서 밝기 , 명암 설정454 소프트웨어 설치464-1 Natural Color464-2 MagicTune474-3 MultiScreen485 문제 해결495-1 모니터 자체 진단하기495-2 고장 신고 전 확인사항505-3 궁금해요526 기타정보536-1 제품규격536-2 절전 기능546-3 제품규격556-4 절전 기능566-5 제품규격576-6 절전 기능586-7 제품규격596-8 절전 기능606-9 제품규격616-10 절전 기능626-11 제품규격636-12 절전 기능646-13 제품규격656-14 절전 기능666-15 제품규격676-16 절전 기능686-17 제품규격696-18 절전 기능706-19 제품규격716-20 절전 기능726-21 제품규격736-22 절전 기능746-23 제품규격756-24 절전 기능766-25 제품규격776-26 절전 기능786-27 제품규격796-28 절전 기능806-29 고객 등록816-30 서비스 센터 안내826-31 유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임836-32 재활용 정보84Taille: 1,5 MoPages: 84Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster S19A350B/S19A350N/S20A350B/S20A350N/S22A350B/S22A350H/ S23A350B/S23A350H/S24A350B/S24A350H/S27A350B/S27A350H1Índice21 Principales precauciones de seguridad41-1 Antes de comenzar41-2 Conservación y mantenimiento51-3 Limpieza del monitor61-4 Precauciones de seguridad72 Instalación del producto142-1 Contenido del embalaje142-2 Instalación del soporte152-3 Conexión con un PC172-4 Conexión de un cable HDMI192-5 Bloqueo Kensington203 Uso del producto213-1 Configuración de la resolución óptima213-2 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar223-3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar233-4 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar243-5 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar253-6 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar263-7 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar283-8 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar303-9 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar323-10 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar343-11 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar363-12 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar383-13 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar403-14 Instalación del controlador del dispositivo423-15 Botones de funcionamiento del producto433-16 Uso del menú de ajuste de la pantalla (OSD: presentación en pantalla)454 Instalación del software534-1 Natural Color534-2 MagicTune544-3 MultiScreen565 Solución de problemas575-1 Autodiagnóstico de monitor575-2 Antes de solicitar un servicio585-3 Preguntas habituales616 Más información636-1 Especificaciones636-2 Función de ahorro de energía646-3 Especificaciones656-4 Función de ahorro de energía666-5 Especificaciones676-6 Función de ahorro de energía686-7 Especificaciones696-8 Función de ahorro de energía706-9 Especificaciones716-10 Función de ahorro de energía726-11 Especificaciones736-12 Función de ahorro de energía746-13 Especificaciones756-14 Función de ahorro de energía766-15 Especificaciones776-16 Función de ahorro de energía786-17 Especificaciones796-18 Función de ahorro de energía806-19 Especificaciones816-20 Función de ahorro de energía826-21 Especificaciones836-22 Función de ahorro de energía846-23 Especificaciones856-24 Función de ahorro de energía866-25 Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE876-26 Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos) - Sólo Europa91Taille: 1,3 MoPages: 91Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresAntes de usar el producto2Copyright2Iconos utilizados en este manual3Símbolos de precauciones de seguridad3Limpieza4Limpieza4Seguridad en el espacio de instalación5Precauciones de almacenamiento5Precauciones de seguridad6Electricidad y seguridad6Instalación7Funcionamiento9Postura correcta para utilizar el producto13Índice14Preparativos191.1 Comprobación del contenido191.1.1 Extracción del embalaje191.1.2 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Partes221.2.1 Botones delanteros221.2.2 Parte posterior241.3 Instalación251.3.1 Instalación del soporte251.3.2 Ajuste de la inclinación y la altura del producto261.3.3 Giro del monitor261.3.4 Instalación de un equipo de montaje mural o un soporte de escritorio271.3.5 Bloqueo antirrobo281.4 "MagicRotation Auto"29Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente302.1 Antes de conectar302.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión302.2 Conexión y uso de un PC312.2.1 Conexión a un PC312.2.2 Instalación de controladores332.2.3 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima342.2.4 Cambio de la resolución mediante un PC352.3 Conexión de auriculares382.4 Conexión del producto a un PC a modo de HUB USB392.4.1 Conexión de un PC al producto392.4.2 Utilización del producto a modo de HUB USB392.5 Conexión de la alimentación40Configuración de pantalla413.1 MAGIC413.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright413.1.2 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color423.2 Brillo433.2.1 Configuración de Brillo433.3 Contraste443.3.1 Configuración de Contraste443.4 Nitidez453.4.1 Configuración de Nitidez453.5 Grueso463.5.1 Ajuste de Grueso463.6 Fino473.6.1 Ajuste de Fino473.7 Tiempo respuesta483.7.1 Configuración de Tiempo respuesta48Configuración del matiz494.1 Rojo494.1.1 Configuración de Rojo494.2 Verde504.2.1 Configuración de Verde504.3 Azul514.3.1 Configuración de Azul514.4 Tono de color524.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color524.5 Gamma534.5.1 Configuración de Gamma53Cambio de tamaño o reubicación de la pantalla545.1 Tamaño de imagen545.1.1 Cambio del Tamaño de la imagen545.2 Posición-H y Posición-V555.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V555.3 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú565.3.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú56Configuración y restauración576.1 ECO576.1.1 Sensor mov. econ.576.1.2 Sensor lum. econ.596.1.3 Ahorro energía626.1.4 Most. icono econ.636.2 Transp. menú656.2.1 Modificación de Transp. menú656.3 Idioma666.3.1 Cambio del Idioma666.4 Modo PC/AV676.4.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV676.5 Fuente autom.686.5.1 Configuración de Fuente autom.686.6 Mostrar hora696.6.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora696.7 Frec. rep. tecla706.7.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla706.8 Tecla personaliz.716.8.1 Configuración de Tecla personaliz.716.9 Act/des temp apag726.9.1 Configuración de Act/des temp apag726.10 Conf.temp.apagado736.10.1 Configuración de Conf.temp.apagado736.11 Restaurar746.11.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)74Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros757.1 INFORMACIÓN757.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN757.2 Configuración del Brillo de la pantalla de inicio75Solución de problemas768.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung768.1.1 Prueba del producto768.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia768.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.768.2 P y R79Especificaciones819.1 General819.2 Ahorro de energía829.3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar83Apéndice85Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE85Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)91Terminología92Índice94Taille: 5,4 MoPages: 95Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresS24B240BL/S24B240KL/S27B240B/S27B240K1Table Of Contents21 Major Safety Precautions31-1 Before You Start31-2 Custody and Maintenance41-3 Cleaning the Monitor51-4 Safety Precautions62 Installing the Product122-1 Package Contents122-2 Installing the Stand132-3 Connecting the monitor152-4 Kensington Lock173 Using the product183-1 Standard Signal Mode Table183-2 Installing the Device Driver203-3 Product Operating Buttons213-4 Using the Screen Adjustment Menu (OSD: On Screen Display)224 Troubleshooting254-1 Monitor Self-Diagnosis254-2 Before Requesting Service264-3 FAQ285 More Information295-1 Specifications295-2 Power Saving Function315-3 Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE325-4 Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)375-5 Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)38Taille: 820 koPages: 38Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières목차2사용하기 전에7저작권7본문에서 사용되는 아이콘7안전을 위한 주의사항에서 사용되는 아이콘7청소하기8청소하기8설치공간 확보하기9보관 시 주의사항9안전을 위한 주의사항10전원 관련10설치 관련11사용 관련13제품의 올바른 사용자세16준비171.1 내용물 확인하기171.1.1 포장상자 분리하기171.1.2 구성품 확인하기181.2 각부의 명칭191.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명191.2.2 뒷면설명211.3 설치하기221.3.1 받침대 조립하기221.3.2 제품의 기울기 및 높낮이 조정231.3.3 모니터 회전하기231.3.4 걸이용 받침대 설치241.3.5 도난 방지용 잠금장치25외부기기 연결 및 사용하기262.1 연결 전 확인 사항262.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요262.2 전원 연결하기262.3 PC와 연결 및 사용하기272.3.1 PC와 연결하기272.3.2 제품 드라이버 설치하기302.3.3 최적해상도 설정하기312.3.4 PC로 해상도 설정하기32화면 설정하기363.1 밝기363.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면363.2 명암373.2.1 명암을 설정하려면373.3 선명도383.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면383.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright393.4.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면393.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle403.5.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle을 설정하려면403.6 주파수 조정413.6.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면413.7 미세 조정423.7.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면42색상 설정하기434.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color434.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color를 설정하려면434.2 적444.2.1 적을 설정하려면444.3 녹454.3.1 녹을 설정하려면454.4 청464.4.1 청을 설정하려면464.5 바탕색 조정474.5.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면474.6 감마 조정484.6.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면48크기 및 위치 설정하기495.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치495.1.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면495.2 화면 크기505.2.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면505.3 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치525.3.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면52설정 및 초기화하기536.1 초기화536.1.1 초기화를 설정하려면536.2 메뉴 언어546.2.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면546.3 에코 세이빙556.3.1 에코 세이빙을 설정하려면556.4 꺼짐 예약 동작/해제566.4.1 꺼짐 예약 동작/해제를 설정하려면566.5 꺼짐 예약 설정576.5.1 꺼짐 예약 설정을 설정하려면576.6 PC / AV 모드586.6.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면586.7 키반복 시간설정596.7.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면596.8 맞춤키606.8.1 맞춤키를 설정하려면606.9 자동 입력 선택616.9.1 자동 입력 선택을 설정하려면616.10 메뉴 표시 시간626.10.1 메뉴 표시 시간을 설정하려면626.11 메뉴 투명도636.11.1 메뉴 투명도를 설정하려면63정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴647.1 정보 표시647.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면647.2 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암 설정65소프트웨어 설치668.1 Magic Tune668.1.1 MagicTune이란?668.1.2 설치668.1.3 설치 제거678.2 MultiScreen688.2.1 MultiScreen 설치688.2.2 MultiScreen 삭제698.3 MagicRotation708.3.1 설치708.3.2 설치 제거71문제발생 시 해결방안729.1 고장신고 전 확인사항729.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기729.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기729.1.3 확인해 보세요729.2 궁금해요(Q&A)74제품규격7610.1 제품사양7610.2 절전 기능7910.3 표준신호모드표80기타 정보85고객 등록85서비스센터 안내85유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임86제품 고장이 아닌경우86소비자 과실로 고장이 난 경우86그 밖의 경우86재활용 정보87무료처리87유료 처리87삼성전자의 [녹색경영]87용어설명88찾아보기90Taille: 4,4 MoPages: 91Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto7Copyright7Iconos utilizados en este manual7Símbolos de precauciones de seguridad8Limpieza9Limpieza9Seguridad en el espacio de instalación10Precauciones de almacenamiento10Precauciones de seguridad11Electricidad y seguridad11Instalación12Funcionamiento14Postura correcta para utilizar el producto18Preparativos191.1 Comprobación del contenido191.1.1 Extracción del embalaje191.1.2 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Partes211.2.1 Botones delanteros211.2.2 Parte posterior231.3 Instalación241.3.1 Instalación del soporte241.3.2 Ajuste de la inclinación y la altura del producto251.3.3 Giro del monitor251.3.4 Instalación de un equipo de montaje mural o un soporte de escritorio261.3.5 Bloqueo antirrobo27Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente292.1 Antes de conectar292.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión292.2 Conexión de la alimentación292.3 Conexión y uso de un PC302.3.1 Conexión a un PC302.3.2 Instalación de controladores332.3.3 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima342.3.4 Cambio de la resolución mediante un PC35Configuración de pantalla393.1 Brillo393.1.1 Configuración de Brillo393.2 Contraste403.2.1 Configuración de Contraste403.3 Nitidez413.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez413.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright423.4.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright423.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle433.5.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle433.6 Grueso453.6.1 Ajuste de Grueso453.7 Fino463.7.1 Ajuste de Fino46Configuración del matiz474.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color474.1.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Color474.2 Rojo484.2.1 Configuración de Rojo484.3 Verde494.3.1 Configuración de Verde494.4 Azul504.4.1 Configuración de Azul504.5 Tono de color514.5.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color514.6 Gamma524.6.1 Configuración de Gamma52Cambio de tamaño o reubicación de la pantalla535.1 Posición-H y Posición-V535.1.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V535.2 Tamaño de imagen545.2.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen545.3 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú565.3.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú56Configuración y restauración576.1 Restaurar576.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)576.2 Idioma586.2.1 Cambio del Idioma586.3 Ahorro energía596.3.1 Configuración de la función Ahorro energía596.4 Act/des temp apag606.4.1 Configuración de Act/des temp apag606.5 Conf.temp.apagado616.5.1 Configuración de Conf.temp.apagado616.6 Modo PC/AV626.6.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV626.7 Frec. rep. tecla636.7.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla636.8 Tecla personaliz.646.8.1 Configuración de Tecla personaliz.646.9 Fuente autom.656.9.1 Configuración de Fuente autom.656.10 Mostrar hora666.10.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora666.11 Transp. menú676.11.1 Modificación de Transp. menú67Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros687.1 INFORMACIÓN687.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN687.2 Configuración de Brillo y Contraste en la pantalla inicial69Instalación del software708.1 Magic Tune708.1.1 ¿Qué es MagicTune?708.1.2 Instalación del software708.1.3 Eliminación del software718.2 MultiScreen728.2.1 Instalación del software728.2.2 Eliminación del software738.3 MagicRotation748.3.1 Instalación del software748.3.2 Eliminación del software76Solución de problemas779.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung779.1.1 Prueba del producto779.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia779.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.779.2 P y R80Especificaciones8210.1 General8210.2 Ahorro de energía8610.3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar87Apéndice93Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE93Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago (Coste para los Clientes)99No se trata de un defecto del producto99El daño del producto ha sido causado por el cliente99Otros100Eliminación correcta101Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)101Terminología102Índice104Taille: 4 MoPages: 105Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresAntes de usar el producto2Copyright2Iconos utilizados en este manual3Símbolos de precauciones de seguridad3Limpieza4Limpieza4Seguridad en el espacio de instalación5Precauciones de almacenamiento5Precauciones de seguridad6Electricidad y seguridad6Instalación7Funcionamiento9Postura correcta para utilizar el producto13Índice14Preparativos181.1 Comprobación del contenido181.1.1 Extracción del embalaje181.1.2 Comprobación de los componentes191.2 Partes201.2.1 Botones delanteros201.2.2 Parte posterior221.3 Instalación231.3.1 Instalación del soporte231.3.2 Ajuste de la inclinación y la altura del producto241.3.3 Giro de la pantalla del monitor241.3.4 Instalación de un equipo de montaje mural o un soporte de escritorio251.3.5 Bloqueo antirrobo261.4 "MagicRotation Auto"27Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente282.1 Antes de conectar282.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión282.2 Conexión y uso de un PC292.2.1 Conexión a un PC292.2.2 Instalación de controladores302.2.3 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima312.2.4 Cambio de la resolución mediante un PC322.3 Conexión de auriculares352.4 Conexión del producto a un PC a modo de HUB USB362.4.1 Conexión de un PC al producto362.4.2 Utilización del producto a modo de HUB USB362.5 Conexión de la alimentación37Configuración de pantalla383.1 MAGIC383.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright383.1.2 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color393.2 Brillo403.2.1 Configuración de Brillo403.3 Contraste413.3.1 Configuración de Contraste413.4 Nitidez423.4.1 Configuración de Nitidez423.5 Tiempo respuesta433.5.1 Configuración de Tiempo respuesta43Configuración del matiz444.1 Rojo444.1.1 Configuración de Rojo444.2 Verde454.2.1 Configuración de Verde454.3 Azul464.3.1 Configuración de Azul464.4 Tono de color474.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color474.5 Gamma484.5.1 Configuración de Gamma48Cambio de tamaño o reubicación de la pantalla495.1 PBP495.1.1 Modo495.1.2 Contraste505.2 Tamaño de imagen515.2.1 Cambio del Tamaño de la imagen515.3 Posición-H y Posición-V525.3.1 Configuración de Posición-H o Posición-V52Configuración y restauración536.1 ECO536.1.1 Sensor mov. econ.536.1.2 Sensor lum. econ.556.1.3 Ahorro energía586.1.4 Most. icono econ.596.2 Transp. menú616.2.1 Modificación de Transp. menú616.3 Idioma626.3.1 Cambio del Idioma626.4 Modo PC/AV636.4.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV636.5 Fuente autom.646.5.1 Configuración de Fuente autom.646.6 Mostrar hora656.6.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora656.7 Frec. rep. tecla666.7.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla666.8 Tecla personaliz.676.8.1 Configuración de Tecla personaliz.676.9 Act/des temp apag686.9.1 Configuración de Act/des temp apag686.10 Conf.temp.apagado696.10.1 Configuración de Conf.temp.apagado696.11 Restaurar706.11.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)70Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros717.1 INFORMACIÓN717.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN717.2 Configuración del Brillo de la pantalla de inicio71Solución de problemas728.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung728.1.1 Prueba del producto728.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia728.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.728.2 P y R75Especificaciones779.1 General779.2 Ahorro de energía789.3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar79Apéndice81Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE81Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)86Terminología87Índice89Taille: 4,8 MoPages: 90Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières목차2사용하기 전에7저작권7본문에서 사용되는 아이콘7안전을 위한 주의사항에서 사용되는 아이콘7청소하기8청소하기8설치공간 확보하기9보관 시 주의사항9안전을 위한 주의사항10전원 관련10설치 관련11사용 관련13제품의 올바른 사용자세17준비181.1 내용물 확인하기181.1.1 포장상자 분리하기181.1.2 구성품 확인하기191.2 각부의 명칭201.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명201.2.2 뒷면설명221.3 설치하기231.3.1 받침대 조립하기231.3.2 제품의 기울기 및 높낮이 조정241.3.3 모니터 화면 회전하기241.3.4 걸이용 받침대 설치251.3.5 도난 방지용 잠금장치261.4 "MagicRotation Auto"27외부기기 연결 및 사용하기282.1 연결 전 확인 사항282.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.282.2 PC와 연결 및 사용하기292.2.1 PC와 연결하기292.2.2 제품 드라이버 설치하기302.2.3 최적해상도 설정하기312.2.4 PC로 해상도 설정하기322.3 헤드폰 연결하기352.4 USB HUB 연결 및 사용하기362.4.1 제품과 PC 연결하기362.4.2 USB HUB 활용하기362.5 전원 연결하기37화면 설정하기383.1 MAGIC383.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright383.1.2 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color393.2 밝기403.2.1 밝기를 설정하려면403.3 명암413.3.1 명암을 설정하려면413.4 선명도423.4.1 선명도를 설정하려면423.5 응답속도433.5.1 응답속도를 설정하려면43색상 설정하기444.1 적444.1.1 적을 설정하려면444.2 녹454.2.1 녹을 설정하려면454.3 청464.3.1 청을 설정하려면464.4 바탕색 조정474.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면474.5 감마 조정484.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면48크기 및 위치 설정하기495.1 PBP495.1.1 모드495.1.2 명암505.2 화면 크기515.2.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면515.3 수평 위치 & 수직 위치525.3.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면52설정 및 초기화하기536.1 ECO536.1.1 에코 모션 센서536.1.2 에코 라이트 센서556.1.3 에코 세이빙586.1.4 에코 아이콘 표시596.2 메뉴 투명도616.2.1 메뉴 투명도를 설정하려면616.3 메뉴 언어626.3.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면626.4 PC/AV 모드636.4.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면636.5 자동 입력 선택646.5.1 자동 입력 선택을 설정하려면646.6 메뉴 표시 시간656.6.1 메뉴 표시 시간을 설정하려면656.7 키반복 시간설정666.7.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면666.8 맞춤키676.8.1 맞춤키를 설정하려면676.9 꺼짐 예약 동작/해제686.9.1 꺼짐 예약 동작/해제를 설정하려면686.10 꺼짐 예약 설정696.10.1 꺼짐 예약 설정을 설정하려면696.11 초기화706.11.1 초기화를 설정하려면70정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴717.1 정보 표시717.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면717.2 초기화면에서 밝기 설정71문제발생 시 해결방안728.1 고장신고 전 확인사항728.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기728.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기728.1.3 확인해 보세요.728.2 궁금해요.(Q&A)74제품규격759.1 제품사양759.2 절전 기능769.3 표준신호모드표77기타 정보79고객 등록79서비스센터 안내80유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임81제품 고장이 아닌 경우81소비자 과실로 고장이 난 경우81그 밖의 경우81재활용 정보82무료처리82유료 처리82삼성전자의 [녹색경영]82용어설명83찾아보기85Taille: 5,1 MoPages: 86Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual8Symbols for safety precautions8Cleaning9Cleaning9Securing the Installation Space10Precautions for storage10Safety Precautions11Electricity and Safety11Installation12Operation14Correct posture to use the product18Preparations191.1 Checking the Contents191.1.1 Removing the Packaging191.1.2 Checking the Components201.2 Parts211.2.1 Frontal Buttons211.2.2 Reverse Side231.3 Installation241.3.1 Attaching the Stand241.3.2 Adjusting the Product Tilt and Height251.3.3 Rotating the Monitor Screen251.3.4 Installing a Wall-mount Kit or Desktop Stand261.3.5 Anti-theft Lock271.4 "MagicRotation Auto"28Connecting and Using a Source Device292.1 Before Connecting292.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints292.2 Connecting and Using a PC302.2.1 Connecting to a PC302.2.2 Driver Installation312.2.3 Setting Optimum Resolution322.2.4 Changing the Resolution Using a PC332.3 Connecting Headphones362.4 Connecting the Product to a PC as a USB HUB372.4.1 Connecting a PC to the Product372.4.2 Utilizing the Product as a USB HUB372.5 Connecting the Power38Screen Setup393.1 MAGIC393.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright393.1.2 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color403.2 Brightness413.2.1 Configuring Brightness413.3 Contrast423.3.1 Configuring Contrast423.4 Sharpness433.4.1 Configuring Sharpness433.5 Response Time443.5.1 Configuring Response Time44Configuring Tint454.1 Red454.1.1 Configuring Red454.2 Green464.2.1 Configuring Green464.3 Blue474.3.1 Configuring Blue474.4 Color Tone484.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings484.5 Gamma494.5.1 Configuring Gamma49Resizing or Relocating the Screen505.1 PBP505.1.1 Mode505.1.2 Contrast515.2 Image Size525.2.1 Changing the Picture Size525.3 H-Position & V-Position535.3.1 Configuring H-Position or V-Position53Setup and Reset546.1 ECO546.1.1 Eco Motion Sensor546.1.2 Eco Light Sensor566.1.3 Eco Saving596.1.4 Eco Icon Display606.2 Menu Transparency626.2.1 Changing Menu Transparency626.3 Language636.3.1 Changing the Language636.4 PC/AV Mode646.4.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode646.5 Auto Source656.5.1 Configuring Auto Source656.6 Display Time666.6.1 Configuring Display Time666.7 Key Repeat Time676.7.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time676.8 Customized Key686.8.1 Configuring Customized Key686.9 Off Timer On/Off696.9.1 Configuring Off Timer On/Off696.10 Off Timer Setting706.10.1 Configuring Off Timer Setting706.11 Reset716.11.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)71INFORMATION Menu and Others727.1 INFORMATION727.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION727.2 Configuring Brightness in the Startup Screen72Troubleshooting Guide738.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center738.1.1 Testing the Product738.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency738.1.3 Check the followings.738.2 Q & A76Specifications789.1 General789.2 PowerSaver799.3 Standard Signal Mode Table80Appendix82Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE82Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)88Not a product defect88A Product damage caused by customer's fault88Others88Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)90Terminology91Index93Taille: 4,9 MoPages: 94Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto7Copyright7Iconos utilizados en este manual8Símbolos de precauciones de seguridad8Limpieza9Limpieza9Seguridad en el espacio de instalación10Precauciones de almacenamiento10Precauciones de seguridad11Electricidad y seguridad11Instalación12Funcionamiento14Postura correcta para utilizar el producto18Preparativos191.1 Comprobación del contenido191.1.1 Extracción del embalaje191.1.2 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Partes211.2.1 Botones delanteros211.2.2 Parte posterior231.3 Instalación241.3.1 Instalación del soporte241.3.2 Ajuste de la inclinación y la altura del producto251.3.3 Giro de la pantalla del monitor251.3.4 Instalación de un equipo de montaje mural o un soporte de escritorio261.3.5 Bloqueo antirrobo271.4 "MagicRotation Auto"28Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente292.1 Antes de conectar292.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión292.2 Conexión y uso de un PC302.2.1 Conexión a un PC302.2.2 Instalación de controladores312.2.3 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima322.2.4 Cambio de la resolución mediante un PC332.3 Conexión de auriculares362.4 Conexión del producto a un PC a modo de HUB USB372.4.1 Conexión de un PC al producto372.4.2 Utilización del producto a modo de HUB USB372.5 Conexión de la alimentación38Configuración de pantalla393.1 MAGIC393.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright393.1.2 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color403.2 Brillo413.2.1 Configuración de Brillo413.3 Contraste423.3.1 Configuración de Contraste423.4 Nitidez433.4.1 Configuración de Nitidez433.5 Tiempo respuesta443.5.1 Configuración de Tiempo respuesta44Configuración del matiz454.1 Rojo454.1.1 Configuración de Rojo454.2 Verde464.2.1 Configuración de Verde464.3 Azul474.3.1 Configuración de Azul474.4 Tono de color484.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color484.5 Gamma494.5.1 Configuración de Gamma49Cambio de tamaño o reubicación de la pantalla505.1 PBP505.1.1 Modo505.1.2 Contraste515.2 Tamaño de imagen525.2.1 Cambio del Tamaño de la imagen525.3 Posición-H y Posición-V535.3.1 Configuración de Posición-H o Posición-V53Configuración y restauración546.1 ECO546.1.1 Sensor mov. econ.546.1.2 Sensor lum. econ.566.1.3 Ahorro energía596.1.4 Most. icono econ.606.2 Transp. menú626.2.1 Modificación de Transp. menú626.3 Idioma636.3.1 Cambio del Idioma636.4 Modo PC/AV646.4.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV646.5 Fuente autom.656.5.1 Configuración de Fuente autom.656.6 Mostrar hora666.6.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora666.7 Frec. rep. tecla676.7.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla676.8 Tecla personaliz.686.8.1 Configuración de Tecla personaliz.686.9 Act/des temp apag696.9.1 Configuración de Act/des temp apag696.10 Conf.temp.apagado706.10.1 Configuración de Conf.temp.apagado706.11 Restaurar716.11.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)71Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros727.1 INFORMACIÓN727.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN727.2 Configuración del Brillo de la pantalla de inicio72Solución de problemas738.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung738.1.1 Prueba del producto738.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia738.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.738.2 P y R76Especificaciones789.1 General789.2 Ahorro de energía799.3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar80Apéndice82Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE82Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago (Coste para los Clientes)88No se trata de un defecto del producto88El daño del producto ha sido causado por el cliente88Otros89Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)90Terminología91Índice93Taille: 4,9 MoPages: 94Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster S19B310B/S22B310B1차례21 주요 안전 사항31-1 사용설명서를 읽기 전에31-2 보관 및 관리41-3 청소하기51-4 안전을 위한 주의사항62 설치하기112-1 구성품 확인112-2 받침대 조립하기122-3 PC와 연결142-4 도난 방지용 잠금 장치163 사용하기173-1 최적해상도 설정173-2 표준신호모드표183-3 제품 드라이버 설치203-4 제품 조작 버튼 설명213-5 화면 조정 메뉴(OSD:On Screen Display) 사용하기234 소프트웨어 설치304-1 Natural Color304-2 MagicTune314-3 MultiScreen335 문제 해결345-1 모니터 자체 진단하기345-2 고장 신고 전 확인사항355-3 궁금해요376 기타정보386-1 제품규격386-2 절전 기능396-3 고객 등록406-4 서비스 센터 안내416-5 재활용 정보42Taille: 1,7 MoPages: 42Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster S19B310B/S22B310B1Table Of Contents21 Major Safety Precautions31-1 Before You Start31-2 Custody and Maintenance41-3 Cleaning the Monitor51-4 Safety Precautions62 Installing the Product112-1 Package Contents112-2 Installing the Stand122-3 Connecting with a PC142-4 Kensington Lock163 Using the product173-1 Setting the Optimal Resolution173-2 Standard Signal Mode Table183-3 Installing the Device Driver203-4 Product Operating Buttons213-5 Using the Screen Adjustment Menu (OSD: On Screen Display)234 Installing the Software304-1 Natural Color304-2 MagicTune314-3 MultiScreen335 Troubleshooting345-1 Monitor Self-Diagnosis345-2 Before Requesting Service355-3 FAQ376 More Information386-1 Specifications386-2 Power Saving Function396-3 Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE406-4 Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)44Taille: 2,1 MoPages: 44Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières목차2사용하기 전에10저작권10본문에서 사용되는 아이콘10청소 관련11설치공간 확보하기12보관 시 주의사항12안전을 위한 주의사항13안전을 위한 주의사항에서 사용되는 아이콘13전원 관련14설치 관련15사용 관련17제품의 올바른 사용자세21준비221.1 내용물 확인하기221.1.1 포장상자 분리하기221.1.2 구성품 확인하기231.2 각부의 명칭 (S19C350NW)241.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명241.2.2 바로가기 버튼251.2.3 기능 버튼 화면261.3 각부의 명칭 (S22C350B / S23C350B / S24C350BL / S22C350H / S23C340H / S23C350H / S24C340HL / S24C350H / S24C350HL / S27C350H)281.3.1 앞면 버튼 설명281.3.2 바로가기 버튼291.3.3 기능 버튼 화면301.3.4 뒷면설명 (S19C350NW)321.3.5 뒷면설명 (S22C350B / S23C350B / S24C350BL)331.3.6 뒷면설명 (S22C350H / S23C340H / S23C350H / S24C340HL / S24C350H / S24C350HL / S27C350H)341.4 설치하기351.4.1 스탠드 장착하기351.4.2 받침대 제거하기361.4.3 제품의 기울기 조정371.4.4 도난 방지용 잠금장치38외부기기와 연결 및 사용하기392.1 연결 전 확인 사항392.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.392.2 PC와 연결 및 사용하기402.2.1 D-SUB 케이블 연결 방식(아날로그 방식)402.2.2 DVI 케이블 연결 방식 (S22C350B / S23C350B / S24C350BL)412.2.3 DVI-HDMI 케이블 연결 방식 (S22C350B / S23C350B / S24C350BL)412.2.4 HDMI 케이블 연결 방식 (S22C350H / S23C340H / S23C350H / S24C340HL / S24C350H / S24C350HL / S27C350H)422.2.5 HDMI-DVI 케이블 연결 방식 (S22C350H / S23C340H / S23C350H / S24C340HL / S24C350H / S24C350HL / S27C350H)422.2.6 헤드폰 연결하기 (S22C350H / S23C340H / S23C350H / S24C340HL / S24C350H / S24C350HL / S27C350H)432.2.7 전원 연결432.2.8 연결된 케이블 정리하기442.2.9 Windows 사운드 설정 변경하기452.2.10 제품 드라이버 설치하기462.2.11 최적해상도 설정하기472.2.12 PC로 해상도 설정하기48화면 설정하기 (S19C350NW)523.1 밝기523.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면523.2 명암533.2.1 명암을 설정하려면533.3 선명도543.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면543.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright553.4.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면553.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle563.5.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle을 설정하려면563.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale573.6.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale을 설정하려면573.7 화면 크기583.7.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면583.8 수평 위치 & 수직 위치593.8.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면593.9 주파수 조정603.9.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면603.10 미세 조정613.10.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면61화면 설정하기 (S22C350B / S23C350B / S24C350BL)624.1 밝기624.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면624.2 명암634.2.1 명암을 설정하려면634.3 선명도644.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면644.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright654.4.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면654.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle664.5.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle을 설정하려면664.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale674.6.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale을 설정하려면674.7 화면 크기684.7.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면684.8 수평 위치 & 수직 위치704.8.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면704.9 주파수 조정714.9.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면714.10 미세 조정724.10.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면72화면 설정하기 (S22C350H / S23C340H / S23C350H / S24C340HL / S24C350H / S24C350HL / S27C350H)735.1 밝기735.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면735.2 명암745.2.1 명암을 설정하려면745.3 선명도755.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면755.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright765.4.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면765.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle785.5.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle을 설정하려면785.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale795.6.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale을 설정하려면795.7 화면 크기805.7.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면805.8 HDMI 블랙 레벨825.8.1 HDMI 블랙 레벨을 설정하려면825.9 수평 위치 & 수직 위치835.9.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면835.10 주파수 조정845.10.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면845.11 미세 조정855.11.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면85색상 설정하기866.1 적866.1.1 적을 설정하려면866.2 녹876.2.1 녹을 설정하려면876.3 청886.3.1 청을 설정하려면886.4 바탕색 조정896.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면896.5 감마 조정906.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면90OSD 조정하기917.1 메뉴 언어917.1.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면917.2 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치927.2.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면927.3 표시 시간937.3.1 표시 시간을 설정하려면937.4 투명도947.4.1 투명도를 설정하려면94설정 및 초기화하기 (S19C350NW)958.1 초기화958.1.1 초기화를 설정하려면958.2 에코 세이빙968.2.1 에코 세이빙을 설정하려면968.3 꺼짐 예약978.3.1 꺼짐 예약을 설정하려면978.4 꺼짐 시간설정988.4.1 꺼짐 시간설정을 설정하려면988.5 키반복 시간설정998.5.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면998.6 전원 LED 켜짐1008.6.1 전원 LED 켜짐을 설정하려면100설정 및 초기화하기 (S22C350B / S23C350B / S24C350BL)1019.1 초기화1019.1.1 초기화를 설정하려면1019.2 에코 세이빙1029.2.1 에코 세이빙을 설정하려면1029.3 꺼짐 예약1039.3.1 꺼짐 예약을 설정하려면1039.4 꺼짐 시간설정1049.4.1 꺼짐 시간설정을 설정하려면1049.5 PC/AV 모드1059.5.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면1059.6 키반복 시간설정1069.6.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면1069.7 입력 인식1079.7.1 입력 인식을 설정하려면1079.8 전원 LED 켜짐1089.8.1 전원 LED 켜짐을 설정하려면108설정 및 초기화하기 (S22C350H / S23C340H / S23C350H / S24C340HL / S24C350H / S24C350HL / S27C350H)10910.1 초기화10910.1.1 초기화를 설정하려면10910.2 에코 세이빙11010.2.1 에코 세이빙을 설정하려면11010.3 꺼짐 예약11110.3.1 꺼짐 예약을 설정하려면11110.4 꺼짐 시간설정11210.4.1 꺼짐 시간설정을 설정하려면11210.5 PC/AV 모드11310.5.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면11310.6 키반복 시간설정11410.6.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면11410.7 입력 인식11510.7.1 입력 인식을 설정하려면11510.8 전원 LED 켜짐11610.8.1 전원 LED 켜짐을 설정하려면116정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴11711.1 정보 표시11711.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면11711.2 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암 설정11811.3 초기화면에서 음량 설정119소프트웨어 설치12012.1 MagicTune12012.1.1 "MagicTune"이란?12012.1.2 설치12012.1.3 설치 제거12112.2 MultiScreen12212.2.1 MultiScreen 설치12212.2.2 MultiScreen 삭제123문제발생 시 해결방안12413.1 고장신고 전 확인사항12413.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기12413.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기12413.1.3 확인해 보세요.12413.2 궁금해요 (Q&A)127제품규격12914.1 제품사양 (S19C350NW)12914.2 제품사양 (S22C350B / S23C350B / S24C350BL)13114.3 제품사양 (S22C350H / S23C340H)13314.4 제품사양 (S23C350H / S24C340HL)13514.5 제품사양 (S24C350HL / S24C350H / S27C350H)13714.6 절전 기능13914.7 표준신호모드표141기타 정보143고객 등록143서비스센터 안내143유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임144제품 고장이 아닌경우144소비자 과실로 고장이 난 경우144그 밖의 경우144폐 전자제품 처리 안내145삼성전자의 [녹색경영]145용어설명146찾아보기148Taille: 6,6 MoPages: 149Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières목차2사용하기 전에7저작권7본문에서 사용되는 아이콘7청소 관련8설치공간 확보하기9보관 시 주의사항9안전을 위한 주의사항10안전을 위한 주의사항에서 사용되는 아이콘10전원 관련11설치 관련12사용 관련14제품의 올바른 사용자세18준비191.1 내용물 확인하기191.1.1 포장상자 분리하기191.1.2 구성품 확인하기201.2 각부의 명칭211.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명211.2.2 뒷면설명231.3 설치하기241.3.1 받침대 조립하기241.3.2 받침대 제거하기251.3.3 제품의 기울기 및 높낮이 조정261.3.4 도난 방지용 잠금장치27외부기기 연결 및 사용하기282.1 연결 전 확인 사항282.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.282.2 PC와 연결 및 사용하기292.2.1 D-SUB 케이블 연결 방식 (아날로그 방식)292.2.2 HDMI 케이블 연결 방식302.2.3 HDMI-DVI 케이블 연결 방식302.2.4 전원 연결하기312.2.5 제품 드라이버 설치하기322.2.6 최적해상도 설정하기332.2.7 PC로 해상도 설정하기34화면 설정하기383.1 밝기383.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면383.2 명암393.2.1 명암을 설정하려면393.3 선명도403.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면403.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright413.4.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면413.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle433.5.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle을 설정하려면433.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale443.6.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale을 설정하려면443.7 화면 크기453.7.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면453.8 HDMI 블랙 레벨473.8.1 HDMI 블랙 레벨을 설정하려면473.9 수평 위치 & 수직 위치483.9.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면483.10 주파수 조정493.10.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면493.11 미세 조정503.11.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면50색상 설정하기514.1 적514.1.1 적을 설정하려면514.2 녹524.2.1 녹을 설정하려면524.3 청534.3.1 청을 설정하려면534.4 바탕색 조정544.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면544.5 감마 조정554.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면55OSD 조정하기565.1 메뉴 언어565.1.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면565.2 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치575.2.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면575.3 표시 시간585.3.1 표시 시간을 설정하려면585.4 투명도595.4.1 투명도를 설정하려면59설정 및 초기화하기606.1 초기화606.1.1 초기화를 설정하려면606.2 에코 세이빙616.2.1 에코 세이빙을 설정하려면616.3 꺼짐 예약626.3.1 꺼짐 예약를 설정하려면626.4 꺼짐 시간설정636.4.1 꺼짐 시간설정을 설정하려면636.5 PC/AV 모드646.5.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면646.6 키반복 시간설정656.6.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면656.7 입력 인식666.7.1 입력 인식을 설정하려면666.8 맞춤키676.8.1 맞춤키를 설정하려면67정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴687.1 정보 표시687.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면687.2 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암 설정69소프트웨어 설치708.1 MagicTune708.1.1 "MagicTune"이란?708.1.2 설치708.1.3 설치 제거718.2 MultiScreen728.2.1 MultiScreen 설치728.2.2 MultiScreen 삭제73문제발생 시 해결방안749.1 고장신고 전 확인사항749.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기749.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기749.1.3 확인해 보세요.749.2 궁금해요 (Q&A)76제품규격7810.1 제품사양7810.2 절전 기능8010.3 표준신호모드표81기타 정보83고객 등록83서비스센터 안내84유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임85제품 고장이 아닌경우85소비자 과실로 고장이 난 경우85그 밖의 경우85재활용 정보86무료처리86유료 처리86삼성전자의 [녹색경영]86용어설명87찾아보기89Taille: 2,5 MoPages: 90Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto7Copyright7Iconos utilizados en este manual7Limpieza8Seguridad en el espacio de instalación9Precauciones de almacenamiento9Precauciones de seguridad10Símbolos de precauciones de seguridad10Electricidad y seguridad11Instalación12Funcionamiento14Postura correcta para utilizar el producto18Preparativos191.1 Comprobación del contenido191.1.1 Extracción del embalaje191.1.2 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Partes211.2.1 Botones delanteros211.2.2 Parte posterior231.3 Instalación241.3.1 Instalación del soporte241.3.2 Extracción del soporte251.3.3 Ajuste de la inclinación del producto261.3.4 Bloqueo antirrobo27Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente282.1 Antes de conectar282.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión282.2 Conexión y uso de un PC292.2.1 Conexión mediante el cable D-SUB (tipo Analógico)292.2.2 Conexión mediante un cable HDMI302.2.3 Conexión mediante un cable HDMI-DVI312.2.4 Conexión de la alimentación312.2.5 Instalación de controladores322.2.6 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima332.2.7 Cambio de la resolución mediante un PC34Configuración de pantalla383.1 Brillo383.1.1 Configuración de Brillo383.2 Contraste393.2.1 Configuración de Contraste393.3 Nitidez403.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez403.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright413.4.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright413.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle433.5.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle433.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale453.6.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale453.7 Tamaño de imagen463.7.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen463.8 N.neg HDMI483.8.1 Ajuste de la configuración de N.neg HDMI483.9 Posición-H y Posición-V493.9.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V493.10 Grueso503.10.1 Ajuste de Grueso503.11 Fino513.11.1 Ajuste de Fino51Configuración del matiz524.1 Rojo524.1.1 Configuración de Rojo524.2 Verde534.2.1 Configuración de Verde534.3 Azul544.3.1 Configuración de Azul544.4 Tono de color554.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color554.5 Gamma564.5.1 Configuración de Gamma56Coordinación de OSD575.1 Idioma575.1.1 Configuración de Idioma575.2 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú585.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú585.3 Mostrar hora595.3.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora595.4 Transparencia605.4.1 Modificación de Transparencia60Configuración y restauración616.1 Restaurar616.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)616.2 Ahorro energía626.2.1 Configuración de Ahorro energía626.3 Temp. apag.636.3.1 Configuración de Temp. apag.636.4 Apagar tras646.4.1 Configuración de Apagar tras646.5 Modo PC/AV656.5.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV656.6 Frec. rep. tecla666.6.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla666.7 Detección fuente676.7.1 Configuración de Detección fuente676.8 Tecla personaliz.686.8.1 Configuración de Tecla personaliz.68Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros697.1 INFORMACIÓN697.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN697.2 Configuración de Brillo y Contraste en la pantalla inicial70Instalación del software718.1 MagicTune718.1.1 ¿Qué es "MagicTune"?718.1.2 Instalación del software718.1.3 Eliminación del software728.2 MultiScreen738.2.1 Instalación del software738.2.2 Eliminación del software74Solución de problemas759.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung759.1.1 Prueba del producto759.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia759.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.759.2 P y R78Especificaciones8010.1 General8010.2 Ahorro de energía8210.3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar83Apéndice85Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE85Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago (Coste para los Clientes)91No se trata de un defecto del producto91El daño del producto ha sido causado por el cliente91Otros92Eliminación correcta93Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)93Terminología94Índice96Taille: 3,9 MoPages: 97Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Symbols for safety precautions10Electricity and Safety11Installation and Safety12Operation14Correct posture to use the product18Preparations191.1 Checking the Contents191.1.1 Removing the Packaging191.1.2 Checking the Components201.2 Parts211.2.1 Frontal Button211.2.2 Reverse Side231.3 Installation241.3.1 Attaching the Stand241.3.2 Removing the Stand251.3.3 Adjusting the Product Tilt261.3.4 Anti-theft Lock27Connecting and Using a Source Device282.1 Before Connecting282.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints282.2 Connecting and Using a PC292.2.1 Connection Using the D-SUB Cable (Analogue Type)292.2.2 Connection Using the HDMI Cable302.2.3 Connection Using an HDMI-DVI Cable302.2.4 Connecting the Power312.2.5 Driver Installation322.2.6 Setting Optimum Resolution332.2.7 Changing the Resolution Using a PC34Screen Setup383.1 Brightness383.1.1 Configuring Brightness383.2 Contrast393.2.1 Configuring Contrast393.3 Sharpness403.3.1 Configuring Sharpness403.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright413.4.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright413.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle433.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle433.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale443.6.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale443.7 Image Size453.7.1 Changing the Image Size453.8 HDMI Black Level473.8.1 Configuring the HDMI Black Level Settings473.9 H-Position & V-Position483.9.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position483.10 Coarse493.10.1 Adjusting Coarse493.11 Fine503.11.1 Adjusting Fine50Configuring Tint514.1 Red514.1.1 Configuring Red514.2 Green524.2.1 Configuring Green524.3 Blue534.3.1 Configuring Blue534.4 Color Tone544.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings544.5 Gamma554.5.1 Configuring Gamma55Coordinating OSD565.1 Language565.1.1 Configuring Language565.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position575.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position575.3 Display Time585.3.1 Configuring Display Time585.4 Transparency595.4.1 Changing Transparency59Setup and Reset606.1 Reset606.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)606.2 Eco Saving616.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving616.3 Off Timer626.3.1 Configuring Off Timer626.4 Turn Off After636.4.1 Configuring Turn Off After636.5 PC/AV Mode646.5.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode646.6 Key Repeat Time656.6.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time656.7 Source Detection666.7.1 Configuring Source Detection666.8 Customized Key676.8.1 Configuring Customized Key67INFORMATION Menu and Others687.1 INFORMATION687.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION687.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen69Installing the Software708.1 MagicTune708.1.1 What is "MagicTune"?708.1.2 Installing the Software708.1.3 Removing the Software718.2 MultiScreen728.2.1 Installing the Software728.2.2 Removing the Software73Troubleshooting Guide749.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center749.1.1 Testing the Product749.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency749.1.3 Check the following.749.2 Q & A77Specifications7910.1 General7910.2 PowerSaver8110.3 Standard Signal Mode Table82Appendix84Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE84Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)90Not a product defect90A Product damage caused by customer's fault90Others90Correct Disposal92Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)92Terminology93Index95Taille: 3,7 MoPages: 96Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières목차2사용하기 전에7저작권7본문에서 사용되는 아이콘7청소하기8청소하기8설치공간 확보하기9보관 시 주의사항9안전을 위한 주의사항10표시 내용10전원 관련11설치 관련12사용 관련14제품의 올바른 사용자세17준비181.1 내용물 확인하기181.1.1 포장상자 분리하기181.1.2 구성품 확인하기191.2 각부의 명칭201.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명201.2.2 뒷면설명221.2.3 옆면 우측 설명231.3 설치하기241.3.1 받침대 조립하기241.3.2 제품의 기울기 및 높낮이 조정251.3.3 모니터 회전하기251.3.4 걸이용 받침대 설치261.3.5 도난 방지용 잠금장치27외부기기 연결 및 사용하기282.1 연결 전 확인 사항282.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.282.2 전원 연결하기282.3 PC와 연결 및 사용하기292.3.1 PC와 연결하기292.3.2 제품 드라이버 설치하기332.3.3 최적해상도 설정하기342.3.4 PC로 해상도 설정하기35화면 설정하기393.1 밝기393.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면393.2 명암403.2.1 명암을 설정하려면403.3 선명도413.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면413.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright423.4.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면423.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle433.5.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle을 설정하려면433.6 화면 크기443.6.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면443.7 수평 위치 & 수직 위치453.7.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면453.8 주파수 조정463.8.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면463.9 미세 조정473.9.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면47색상 설정하기484.1 적484.1.1 적을 설정하려면484.2 녹494.2.1 녹을 설정하려면494.3 청504.3.1 청을 설정하려면504.4 바탕색 조정514.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면514.5 감마 조정524.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면52크기 및 위치 설정하기535.1 메뉴 언어535.1.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면535.2 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치545.2.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면545.3 표시 시간555.3.1 표시 시간을 설정하려면555.4 투명도565.4.1 투명도를 설정하려면56설정 및 초기화하기576.1 초기화576.1.1 초기화를 설정하려면576.2 에코 세이빙586.2.1 에코 세이빙을 설정하려면586.3 꺼짐 예약596.3.1 꺼짐 예약를 설정하려면596.4 꺼짐 시간설정606.4.1 꺼짐 시간설정을 설정하려면606.5 PC/AV 모드616.5.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면616.6 키반복 시간설정626.6.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면626.7 입력 인식636.7.1 입력 인식을 설정하려면636.8 맞춤키646.8.1 맞춤키를 설정하려면64정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴657.1 정보 표시657.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면657.2 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암 설정66소프트웨어 설치678.1 MagicTune678.1.1 "MagicTune"이란?678.1.2 설치678.1.3 설치 제거688.2 MultiScreen698.2.1 설치698.2.2 삭제708.3 MagicRotation718.3.1 설치718.3.2 설치 제거73문제발생 시 해결방안749.1 고장신고 전 확인사항749.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기749.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기749.1.3 확인해 보세요.749.2 궁금해요 (Q&A)76제품규격7810.1 제품사양7810.2 절전 기능8210.3 표준신호모드표83기타 정보89고객 등록89서비스센터 안내90유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임91제품 고장이 아닌경우91소비자 과실로 고장이 난 경우91그 밖의 경우91재활용 정보92무료처리92유료 처리92삼성전자의 [녹색경영]92용어설명93찾아보기95Taille: 5,3 MoPages: 96Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières목차2사용하기 전에7저작권7본문에서 사용되는 아이콘7청소하기8설치공간 확보하기9보관 시 주의사항9안전을 위한 주의사항10표시 내용10전원 관련11설치 관련12사용 관련14제품의 올바른 사용자세18준비191.1 내용물 확인하기191.1.1 구성품 확인하기191.2 각부의 명칭211.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명211.2.2 뒷면 설명231.2.3 옆면 우측 설명241.3 설치하기251.3.1 받침대 조립하기251.3.2 제품의 기울기 및 높낮이 조정261.3.3 모니터 회전하기271.3.4 걸이용 받침대 설치281.3.5 도난 방지용 잠금장치30외부기기 연결 및 사용하기312.1 연결 전 확인 사항312.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요312.2 PC와 연결 및 사용하기322.2.1 PC와 연결하기322.2.2 전원 연결하기352.2.3 제품 드라이버 설치하기382.2.4 최적 해상도 설정하기39화면 설정하기403.1 밝기403.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면403.2 명암413.2.1 명암을 설정하려면413.3 선명도423.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면423.4 눈 보호 모드433.4.1 눈 보호 모드를 설정하려면433.5 게임 모드443.5.1 게임 모드를 설정하려면443.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright453.6.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면453.7 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle463.7.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle을 설정하려면463.8 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale473.8.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale을 설정하려면473.9 화면 크기483.9.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면483.10 수평 위치 & 수직 위치503.10.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면503.11 주파수 조정513.11.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면513.12 미세 조정523.12.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면52색상 설정하기534.1 적534.1.1 적을 설정하려면534.2 녹544.2.1 녹을 설정하려면544.3 청554.3.1 청을 설정하려면554.4 바탕색 조정564.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면564.5 감마 조정574.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면57크기 및 위치 설정하기585.1 메뉴 언어585.1.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면585.2 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치595.2.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면595.3 표시 시간605.3.1 표시 시간을 설정하려면605.4 투명도615.4.1 투명도를 설정하려면61설정 및 초기화하기626.1 전체 초기화626.1.1 전체 초기화를 설정하려면626.2 스마트 에코 세이빙636.2.1 스마트 에코 세이빙을 설정하려면636.3 절전 타이머646.3.1 꺼짐 예약를 설정하려면646.3.2 절전 꺼짐 예약을 설정하려면666.4 PC/AV 모드686.4.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면686.5 키반복 시간설정696.5.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면696.6 입력 인식706.6.1 입력 인식을 설정하려면70정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴717.1 정보 표시717.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면717.2 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암, 선명도 설정72소프트웨어 설치738.1 MultiScreen738.1.1 MultiScreen 설치738.1.2 MultiScreen 삭제74문제발생 시 해결방안759.1 고장신고 전 확인사항759.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기759.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기759.1.3 확인해 보세요.759.2 궁금해요 (Q&A)77제품규격7810.1 제품사양 (S22C450D)7810.2 제품사양 (S24C450D)7910.3 제품사양 (S24C450DL)8010.4 제품사양 (S27C450D)8110.5 절전 기능8210.6 표준신호모드표83기타 정보85서비스센터 안내85유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임86제품 고장이 아닌경우86소비자 과실로 고장이 난 경우86그 밖의 경우86폐 전자제품 처리 안내87삼성전자의 [녹색경영]87용어설명88찾아보기90Taille: 2,7 MoPages: 91Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto7Copyright7Iconos utilizados en este manual7Limpieza8Limpieza8Seguridad en el espacio de instalación9Precauciones de almacenamiento9Precauciones de seguridad10Símbolos10Electricidad y seguridad11Instalación12Funcionamiento14Postura correcta para utilizar el producto18Preparativos191.1 Comprobación del contenido191.1.1 Extracción del embalaje191.1.2 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Partes211.2.1 Botones delanteros211.2.2 Parte posterior231.2.3 Vista lateral derecha241.3 Instalación251.3.1 Instalación de la base251.3.2 Ajuste de la inclinación y la altura del producto261.3.3 Giro del monitor261.3.4 Instalación de un equipo de montaje mural o un soporte de escritorio271.3.5 Bloqueo antirrobo28Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente292.1 Antes de conectar292.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión292.2 Conexión de la alimentación292.3 Conexión y uso de un PC302.3.1 Conexión a un PC302.3.2 Instalación de controladores342.3.3 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima352.3.4 Cambio de la resolución mediante un PC36Configuración de pantalla403.1 Brillo403.1.1 Configuración de Brillo403.2 Contraste413.2.1 Configuración de Contraste413.3 Nitidez423.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez423.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright433.4.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright433.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle443.5.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle443.6 Tamaño de imagen463.6.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen463.7 Posición-H y Posición-V483.7.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V483.8 Grueso493.8.1 Ajuste de Grueso493.9 Fino503.9.1 Ajuste de Fino50Configuración del matiz514.1 Rojo514.1.1 Configuración de Rojo514.2 Verde524.2.1 Configuración de Verde524.3 Azul534.3.1 Configuración de Azul534.4 Tono de color544.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color544.5 Gamma554.5.1 Configuración de Gamma55Cambio de tamaño o reubicación de la pantalla565.1 Idioma565.1.1 Configuración de Idioma565.2 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú575.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú575.3 Mostrar hora585.3.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora585.4 Transparencia595.4.1 Modificación de Transparencia59Configuración y restauración606.1 Restaurar606.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)606.2 Ahorro energía616.2.1 Configuración de Ahorro energía616.3 Temp. apag.626.3.1 Configuración de Temp. apag.626.4 Apagar tras636.4.1 Configuración de Apagar tras636.5 Modo PC/AV646.5.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV646.6 Frec. rep. tecla656.6.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla656.7 Detección fuente666.7.1 Configuración de Detección fuente666.8 Tecla personaliz.676.8.1 Configuración de Tecla personaliz.67Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros687.1 INFORMACIÓN687.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN687.2 Configuración de Brillo y Contraste en la pantalla inicial69Instalación del software708.1 MagicTune708.1.1 ¿Qué es "MagicTune"?708.1.2 Instalación del software708.1.3 Eliminación del software718.2 MultiScreen728.2.1 Instalación del software728.2.2 Eliminación del software738.3 MagicRotation748.3.1 Instalación del software748.3.2 Eliminación del software76Solución de problemas779.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung779.1.1 Prueba del producto779.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia779.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.779.2 P y R80Especificaciones8210.1 General8210.2 Ahorro de energía8410.3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar85Apéndice87Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE87Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago (Coste para los Clientes)93No se trata de un defecto del producto93El daño del producto ha sido causado por el cliente93Otros94Eliminación correcta95Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)95Terminología96Índice98Taille: 4,2 MoPages: 99Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières목차2사용하기 전에7저작권7본문에서 사용되는 아이콘7청소하기8청소하기8설치공간 확보하기9보관 시 주의사항9안전을 위한 주의사항10표시 내용10전원 관련11설치 관련12사용 관련14제품의 올바른 사용자세17준비181.1 내용물 확인하기181.1.1 포장상자 분리하기181.1.2 구성품 확인하기191.2 각부의 명칭201.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명201.2.2 뒷면설명221.2.3 옆면 우측 설명231.3 설치하기241.3.1 받침대 조립하기241.3.2 제품의 기울기 및 높낮이 조정251.3.3 모니터 회전하기251.3.4 걸이용 받침대 설치261.3.5 도난 방지용 잠금장치27외부기기 연결 및 사용하기282.1 연결 전 확인 사항282.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.282.2 전원 연결하기282.3 PC와 연결 및 사용하기292.3.1 PC와 연결하기292.3.2 제품 드라이버 설치하기332.3.3 최적해상도 설정하기342.3.4 PC로 해상도 설정하기35화면 설정하기393.1 밝기393.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면393.2 명암403.2.1 명암을 설정하려면403.3 선명도413.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면413.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright423.4.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면423.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle433.5.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle을 설정하려면433.6 화면 크기443.6.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면443.7 수평 위치 & 수직 위치463.7.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면463.8 주파수 조정473.8.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면473.9 미세 조정483.9.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면48색상 설정하기494.1 적494.1.1 적을 설정하려면494.2 녹504.2.1 녹을 설정하려면504.3 청514.3.1 청을 설정하려면514.4 바탕색 조정524.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면524.5 감마 조정534.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면53크기 및 위치 설정하기545.1 메뉴 언어545.1.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면545.2 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치555.2.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면555.3 표시 시간565.3.1 표시 시간을 설정하려면565.4 투명도575.4.1 투명도를 설정하려면57설정 및 초기화하기586.1 초기화586.1.1 초기화를 설정하려면586.2 에코 세이빙596.2.1 에코 세이빙을 설정하려면596.3 꺼짐 예약606.3.1 꺼짐 예약를 설정하려면606.4 꺼짐 시간설정616.4.1 꺼짐 시간설정을 설정하려면616.5 PC / AV 모드626.5.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면626.6 키반복 시간설정636.6.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면636.7 입력 인식646.7.1 입력 인식을 설정하려면646.8 맞춤키656.8.1 맞춤키를 설정하려면65정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴667.1 정보 표시667.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면667.2 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암 설정67소프트웨어 설치688.1 MagicTune688.1.1 "MagicTune"이란?688.1.2 설치688.1.3 설치 제거698.2 MultiScreen708.2.1 "MultiScreen" 설치708.2.2 MultiScreen 삭제718.3 MagicRotation728.3.1 설치728.3.2 설치 제거74문제발생 시 해결방안759.1 고장신고 전 확인사항759.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기759.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기759.1.3 확인해 보세요.759.2 궁금해요 (Q&A)77제품규격7910.1 제품사양7910.2 절전 기능8110.3 표준신호모드표82기타 정보84고객 등록84서비스센터 안내85유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임86제품 고장이 아닌경우86소비자 과실로 고장이 난 경우86그 밖의 경우86재활용 정보87무료처리87유료 처리87삼성전자의 [녹색경영]87용어설명88찾아보기90Taille: 4,5 MoPages: 91Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Symbols10Electricity and Safety11Installation and Safety12Operation and Safety14Correct posture to use the product18Preparations191.1 Checking the Components191.1.1 Checking the Components191.2 Parts211.2.1 Frontal Buttons211.2.2 Reverse Side231.2.3 Right Side View241.3 Installation251.3.1 Attaching the Stand251.3.2 Adjusting the Product Tilt and Height261.3.3 Rotating the Monitor271.3.4 Installing a Wall-mount Kit or Desktop Stand281.3.5 Anti-theft Lock30Connecting and Using a Source Device312.1 Before Connecting312.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints312.2 Connecting and Using a PC322.2.1 Connecting to a PC322.2.2 Connecting the Power352.2.3 Driver Installation382.2.4 Setting Optimum Resolution39Screen Setup403.1 Brightness403.1.1 Configuring Brightness403.2 Contrast413.2.1 Configuring Contrast413.3 Sharpness423.3.1 Configuring Sharpness423.4 Eye Saver Mode433.4.1 Configuring Eye Saver Mode433.5 Game Mode443.5.1 Configuring Game Mode443.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright453.6.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright453.7 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle463.7.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle463.8 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale483.8.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale483.9 Image Size493.9.1 Changing the Image Size493.10 H-Position & V-Position513.10.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position513.11 Coarse523.11.1 Adjusting Coarse523.12 Fine533.12.1 Adjusting Fine53Configuring Tint544.1 Red544.1.1 Configuring Red544.2 Green554.2.1 Configuring Green554.3 Blue564.3.1 Configuring Blue564.4 Color Tone574.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings574.5 Gamma584.5.1 Configuring Gamma58Resizing or Relocating the Screen595.1 Language595.1.1 Changing the Language595.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position605.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position605.3 Display Time615.3.1 Configuring Display Time615.4 Transparency625.4.1 Changing Transparency62Setup and Reset636.1 Reset All636.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset All)636.2 Smart Eco Saving646.2.1 Configuring Smart Eco Saving646.3 Off Timer Plus656.3.1 Configuring Off Timer656.3.2 Configuring Eco Timer676.4 PC/AV Mode696.4.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode696.5 Key Repeat Time706.5.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time706.6 Source Detection716.6.1 Configuring Source Detection71INFORMATION Menu and Others727.1 INFORMATION727.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION727.2 Configuring Brightness, Contrast and Sharpness from the Initial Screen73Installing the Software748.1 MultiScreen748.1.1 Installing the Software748.1.2 Removing the Software75Troubleshooting Guide769.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center769.1.1 Testing the Product769.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency769.1.3 Check the following.769.2 Q & A79Specifications8110.1 General (S22C450D)8110.2 General (S24C450D)8310.3 General (S24C450DL)8510.4 General (S27C450D)8710.5 PowerSaver8910.6 Standard Signal Mode Table90Appendix92Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)92Not a product defect92A Product damage caused by customer's fault92Others92Correct Disposal94Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)94Extended warranty94Terminology95Index97Taille: 4,5 MoPages: 98Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto7Copyright7Iconos utilizados en este manual7Limpieza8Seguridad en el espacio de instalación9Precauciones de almacenamiento9Precauciones de seguridad10Símbolos10Electricidad y seguridad11Instalación12Funcionamiento14Postura correcta para utilizar el producto19Preparativos201.1 Comprobación de los componentes201.1.1 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Partes221.2.1 Botones delanteros221.2.2 Parte posterior241.2.3 Vista lateral derecha251.3 Instalación261.3.1 Instalación del soporte261.3.2 Ajuste de la inclinación y la altura del producto271.3.3 Giro del monitor281.3.4 Instalación de un equipo de montaje mural o un soporte de escritorio291.3.5 Bloqueo antirrobo31Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente322.1 Antes de conectar322.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión322.2 Conexión y uso de un PC332.2.1 Conexión a un PC332.2.2 Conexión de la alimentación362.2.3 Instalación de controladores392.2.4 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima40Configuración de pantalla413.1 Brillo413.1.1 Configuración de Brillo413.2 Contraste423.2.1 Configuración de Contraste423.3 Nitidez433.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez433.4 Modo descanso ojos443.4.1 Configuración de Modo descanso ojos443.5 Modo Juego453.5.1 Configuración de Modo Juego453.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright463.6.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright463.7 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle473.7.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle473.8 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale493.8.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale493.9 Tamaño de imagen503.9.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen503.10 Posición-H y Posición-V523.10.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V523.11 Grueso533.11.1 Ajuste de Grueso533.12 Fino543.12.1 Ajuste de Fino54Configuración del matiz554.1 Rojo554.1.1 Configuración de Rojo554.2 Verde564.2.1 Configuración de Verde564.3 Azul574.3.1 Configuración de Azul574.4 Tono de color584.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color584.5 Gamma594.5.1 Configuración de Gamma59Cambio de tamaño o reubicación de la pantalla605.1 Idioma605.1.1 Cambio del Idioma605.2 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú615.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú615.3 Mostrar hora625.3.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora625.4 Transparencia635.4.1 Modificación de Transparencia63Configuración y restauración646.1 Restablecer todo646.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restablecer Todo)646.2 Ahorro energ. int.656.2.1 Configuración de Ahorro energ. int.656.3 Temp. apag. Plus666.3.1 Configuración de Temp. apag.666.3.2 Configuración de Temp. ecológico686.4 Modo PC/AV706.4.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV706.5 Frec. rep. tecla716.5.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla716.6 Detección fuente726.6.1 Configuración de Detección fuente72Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros737.1 INFORMACIÓN737.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN737.2 Configuración de Brillo, Contraste y Nitidez desde la pantalla inicial74Instalación del software758.1 MultiScreen758.1.1 Instalación del software758.1.2 Eliminación del software76Solución de problemas779.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung779.1.1 Prueba del producto779.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia779.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.779.2 P y R80Especificaciones8210.1 General (S22C450D)8210.2 General (S24C450D)8310.3 General (S24C450DL)8410.4 General (S27C450D)8510.5 Ahorro de energía8610.6 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar87Apéndice89Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago (Coste para los Clientes)89No se trata de un defecto del producto89El daño del producto ha sido causado por el cliente89Otros90Eliminación correcta91Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)91Extended warranty91Terminología92Índice94Taille: 3,6 MoPages: 95Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières목차2사용하기 전에7저작권7본문에서 사용되는 아이콘7청소하기8설치공간 확보하기9보관 시 주의사항9안전을 위한 주의사항10표시 내용10전원 관련11설치 관련12사용 관련14제품의 올바른 사용자세17준비181.1 내용물 확인하기181.1.1 포장상자 분리하기181.1.2 구성품 확인하기191.2 각부의 명칭201.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명201.2.2 뒷면설명221.3 설치하기231.3.1 받침대 조립하기231.3.2 제품의 기울기 및 높낮이 조정241.3.3 모니터 회전하기241.3.4 도난 방지용 잠금장치251.4 "MagicRotation Auto"26외부기기 연결 및 사용하기272.1 연결 전 확인 사항272.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.272.2 PC와 연결 및 사용하기282.2.1 PC와 연결하기282.2.2 전원 연결하기302.2.3 제품 드라이버 설치하기322.2.4 최적해상도 설정하기332.2.5 PC로 해상도 설정하기34화면 설정하기383.1 밝기383.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면383.2 명암393.2.1 명암을 설정하려면393.3 선명도403.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면403.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright413.4.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면413.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale433.5.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale을 설정하려면433.6 화면 크기443.6.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면443.7 HDMI 블랙 레벨463.7.1 HDMI 블랙 레벨을 설정하려면463.8 응답 속도473.8.1 응답 속도를 설정하려면473.9 수평 위치 & 수직 위치483.9.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면483.10 주파수 조정493.10.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면493.11 미세 조정503.11.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면50색상 설정하기514.1 적514.1.1 적을 설정하려면514.2 녹524.2.1 녹을 설정하려면524.3 청534.3.1 청을 설정하려면534.4 바탕색 조정544.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면544.5 감마 조정554.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면55OSD 조정하기565.1 메뉴 언어565.1.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면565.2 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치575.2.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면575.3 표시 시간585.3.1 표시 시간을 설정하려면585.4 투명도595.4.1 투명도를 설정하려면59설정 및 초기화하기606.1 초기화606.1.1 초기화를 설정하려면606.2 에코 세이빙616.2.1 에코 세이빙을 설정하려면616.3 꺼짐 예약626.3.1 꺼짐 예약를 설정하려면626.4 꺼짐 시간설정636.4.1 꺼짐 시간설정을 설정하려면636.5 PC / AV 모드646.5.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면646.6 키반복 시간설정656.6.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면656.7 입력 인식666.7.1 입력 인식을 설정하려면666.8 맞춤키676.8.1 맞춤키를 설정하려면67정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴687.1 정보 표시687.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면687.2 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암 설정697.3 초기화면에서 음량 설정70소프트웨어 설치718.1 MagicTune718.1.1 "MagicTune"이란?718.1.2 설치718.1.3 설치 제거728.2 MultiScreen738.2.1 "MultiScreen" 설치738.2.2 MultiScreen 삭제74문제발생 시 해결방안759.1 고장신고 전 확인사항759.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기759.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기759.1.3 확인해 보세요.759.2 궁금해요 (Q&A)78제품규격7910.1 제품사양7910.2 절전 기능8110.3 표준신호모드표82기타 정보84고객 등록84서비스센터 안내85유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임86제품 고장이 아닌경우86소비자 과실로 고장이 난 경우86그 밖의 경우86재활용 정보87무료처리87유료 처리87삼성전자의 [녹색경영]87용어설명88찾아보기90Taille: 4,2 MoPages: 91Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto7Copyright7Iconos utilizados en este manual7Limpieza8Limpieza8Seguridad en el espacio de instalación9Precauciones de almacenamiento9Precauciones de seguridad10Símbolos10Electricidad y seguridad11Instalación12Funcionamiento14Postura correcta para utilizar el producto19Preparativos201.1 Comprobación del contenido201.1.1 Extracción del embalaje201.1.2 Comprobación de los componentes211.2 Partes221.2.1 Botones delanteros221.2.2 Parte posterior241.3 Instalación251.3.1 Instalación de la base251.3.2 Ajuste de la inclinación y la altura del producto271.3.3 Giro del monitor271.3.4 Bloqueo antirrobo281.4 "MagicRotation Auto"29Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente302.1 Antes de conectar302.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión302.2 Conexión de la alimentación302.3 Conexión y uso de un PC312.3.1 Conexión a un PC312.3.2 Instalación de controladores352.3.3 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima362.3.4 Cambio de la resolución mediante un PC37Configuración de pantalla413.1 Brillo413.1.1 Configuración de Brillo413.2 Contraste423.2.1 Configuración de Contraste423.3 Nitidez433.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez433.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright443.4.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright443.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale463.5.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale463.6 Tamaño de imagen473.6.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen473.7 N.neg HDMI493.7.1 Ajuste de la configuración de N.neg HDMI493.8 Tiempo respuesta503.8.1 Configuración de Tiempo respuesta503.9 Posición-H y Posición-V513.9.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V513.10 Grueso523.10.1 Ajuste de Grueso523.11 Fino533.11.1 Ajuste de Fino53Configuración del matiz544.1 Rojo544.1.1 Configuración de Rojo544.2 Verde554.2.1 Configuración de Verde554.3 Azul564.3.1 Configuración de Azul564.4 Tono de color574.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color574.5 Gamma584.5.1 Configuración de Gamma58Coordinación de OSD595.1 Idioma595.1.1 Configuración de Idioma595.2 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú605.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú605.3 Mostrar hora615.3.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora615.4 Transparencia625.4.1 Modificación de Transparencia62Configuración y restauración636.1 Restaurar636.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)636.2 Ahorro energía646.2.1 Configuración de Ahorro energía646.3 Temp. apag.656.3.1 Configuración de Temp. apag.656.4 Apagar tras666.4.1 Configuración de Apagar tras666.5 Modo PC/AV676.5.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV676.6 Frec. rep. tecla686.6.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla686.7 Detección fuente696.7.1 Configuración de Detección fuente696.8 Tecla personaliz.706.8.1 Configuración de Tecla personaliz.70Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros717.1 INFORMACIÓN717.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN717.2 Configuración de Brillo y Contraste en la pantalla inicial727.3 Configuración de Volumen en la pantalla inicial73Instalación del software748.1 MagicTune748.1.1 ¿Qué es "MagicTune"?748.1.2 Instalación del software748.1.3 Eliminación del software758.2 MultiScreen768.2.1 Instalación del software768.2.2 Eliminación del software77Solución de problemas789.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung789.1.1 Prueba del producto789.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia789.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.789.2 P y R80Especificaciones8210.1 General8210.2 Ahorro de energía8310.3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar84Apéndice86Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE86Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago(Coste para los Clientes)92No se trata de un defecto del producto92El daño del producto ha sido causado por el cliente92Otros93Eliminación correcta94Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)94Terminología95Índice97Taille: 4 MoPages: 98Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster TB300 / TB3501Índice3Introducción4Medidas de seguridad4Lista de funciones11Accesorios11Visualización del panel de control12Visualización del mando a distancia13Navegación por los menús14Conexión a la antena14Plug & Play (Configuración inicial)15Conexiones16Conexión a un dispositivo de AV16Conexión a un dispositivo de audio17Conexión a una computadora17Modificación de la fuente de entrada19Funciones básicas20Menú de canales20Menú de imagen22Menú de sonido25Menú de configuración26Menú de soporte técnico30Funciones avanzadas31Media Play (USB)31Otra información37Instalación de un soporte de pared o soporte para escritorio37Candado de seguridad antirrobo Kensington38Solución de problemas39Almacenamiento y mantenimiento41Licencia41Especificaciones42Taille: 8 MoPages: 43Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières목차2사용하기 전에7저작권7본문에서 사용되는 아이콘7청소 관련8설치공간 확보하기9보관 시 주의사항9안전을 위한 주의사항10안전을 위한 주의사항에서 사용되는 아이콘10전원 관련11설치 관련12사용 관련14제품의 올바른 사용자세18준비191.1 내용물 확인하기191.1.1 포장상자 분리하기191.1.2 구성품 확인하기201.2 각부의 명칭211.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명211.2.2 뒷면설명231.3 설치하기241.3.1 받침대 조립하기241.3.2 받침대 제거하기251.3.3 제품의 기울기 및 높낮이 조정261.3.4 도난 방지용 잠금장치27외부기기 연결 및 사용하기282.1 연결 전 확인 사항282.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.282.2 PC와 연결 및 사용하기292.2.1 D-SUB 케이블 연결 방식 (아날로그 방식)292.2.2 HDMI 케이블 연결 방식302.2.3 HDMI-DVI 케이블 연결 방식302.2.4 헤드폰 연결하기312.3 전원 연결하기312.3.1 연결된 케이블 정리하기322.3.2 Windows에서 사운드 설정하기332.3.3 제품 드라이버 설치하기342.3.4 최적해상도 설정하기352.3.5 PC로 해상도 설정하기36화면 설정하기403.1 밝기403.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면403.2 명암413.2.1 명암을 설정하려면413.3 선명도423.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면423.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright433.4.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면433.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle453.5.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle을 설정하려면453.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale463.6.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale을 설정하려면463.7 화면 크기473.7.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면473.8 HDMI 블랙 레벨493.8.1 HDMI 블랙 레벨을 설정하려면493.9 수평 위치 & 수직 위치503.9.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면503.10 주파수 조정513.10.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면513.11 미세 조정523.11.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면52색상 설정하기534.1 적534.1.1 적을 설정하려면534.2 녹544.2.1 녹을 설정하려면544.3 청554.3.1 청을 설정하려면554.4 바탕색 조정564.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면564.5 감마 조정574.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면57OSD 조정하기585.1 메뉴 언어585.1.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면585.2 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치595.2.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면595.3 표시 시간605.3.1 표시 시간을 설정하려면605.4 투명도615.4.1 투명도를 설정하려면61설정 및 초기화하기626.1 초기화626.1.1 초기화를 설정하려면626.2 에코 세이빙636.2.1 에코 세이빙을 설정하려면636.3 꺼짐 예약646.3.1 꺼짐 예약를 설정하려면646.4 꺼짐 시간설정656.4.1 꺼짐 시간설정을 설정하려면656.5 PC/AV 모드666.5.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면666.6 키반복 시간설정676.6.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면676.7 입력 인식686.7.1 입력 인식을 설정하려면686.8 맞춤키696.8.1 맞춤키를 설정하려면69정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴707.1 정보 표시707.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면707.2 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암 설정717.3 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암 설정72소프트웨어 설치738.1 MagicTune738.1.1 "MagicTune"이란?738.1.2 설치738.1.3 설치 제거748.2 MultiScreen758.2.1 MultiScreen 설치758.2.2 MultiScreen 삭제76문제발생 시 해결방안779.1 고장신고 전 확인사항779.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기779.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기779.1.3 확인해 보세요.779.2 궁금해요 (Q&A)80제품규격8210.1 제품사양8210.2 절전 기능8410.3 표준신호모드표85기타 정보87고객 등록87서비스센터 안내88유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임89제품 고장이 아닌경우89소비자 과실로 고장이 난 경우89그 밖의 경우89재활용 정보90무료처리90유료 처리90삼성전자의 [녹색경영]90용어설명91찾아보기93Taille: 4,4 MoPages: 94Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresTable Of Contents2Before Using the Product7Copyright7Icons used in this manual7Cleaning8Securing the Installation Space9Precautions for storage9Safety Precautions10Symbols for safety precautions10Electricity and Safety11Installation and Safety12Operation14Correct posture to use the product18Preparations191.1 Checking the Contents191.1.1 Removing the Packaging191.1.2 Checking the Components201.2 Parts211.2.1 Frontal Button211.2.2 Reverse Side231.3 Installation241.3.1 Attaching the Stand241.3.2 Removing the Stand251.3.3 Adjusting the Product Tilt261.3.4 Anti-theft Lock27Connecting and Using a Source Device282.1 Before Connecting282.1.1 Pre-connection Checkpoints282.2 Connecting and Using a PC292.2.1 Connection Using the D-SUB Cable (Analogue Type)292.2.2 Connection Using the HDMI Cable302.2.3 Connection Using an HDMI-DVI Cable302.2.4 Connecting to Headphones312.3 Connecting the Power312.3.1 Tidying Up the Connected Cables322.3.2 Changing the sound settings on Windows332.3.3 Driver Installation342.3.4 Setting Optimum Resolution352.3.5 Changing the Resolution Using a PC36Screen Setup403.1 Brightness403.1.1 Configuring Brightness403.2 Contrast413.2.1 Configuring Contrast413.3 Sharpness423.3.1 Configuring Sharpness423.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright433.4.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright433.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle453.5.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle453.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale463.6.1 Configuring SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale463.7 Image Size473.7.1 Changing the Image Size473.8 HDMI Black Level493.8.1 Configuring the HDMI Black Level Settings493.9 H-Position & V-Position503.9.1 Configuring H-Position & V-Position503.10 Coarse513.10.1 Adjusting Coarse513.11 Fine523.11.1 Adjusting Fine52Configuring Tint534.1 Red534.1.1 Configuring Red534.2 Green544.2.1 Configuring Green544.3 Blue554.3.1 Configuring Blue554.4 Color Tone564.4.1 Configuring the Color Tone Settings564.5 Gamma574.5.1 Configuring Gamma57Coordinating OSD585.1 Language585.1.1 Configuring Language585.2 Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position595.2.1 Configuring Menu H-Position & Menu V-Position595.3 Display Time605.3.1 Configuring Display Time605.4 Transparency615.4.1 Changing Transparency61Setup and Reset626.1 Reset626.1.1 Initializing Settings (Reset)626.2 Eco Saving636.2.1 Configuring Eco Saving636.3 Off Timer646.3.1 Configuring Off Timer646.4 Turn Off After656.4.1 Configuring Turn Off After656.5 PC/AV Mode666.5.1 Configuring PC/AV Mode666.6 Key Repeat Time676.6.1 Configuring Key Repeat Time676.7 Source Detection686.7.1 Configuring Source Detection686.8 Customized Key696.8.1 Configuring Customized Key69INFORMATION Menu and Others707.1 INFORMATION707.1.1 Displaying INFORMATION707.2 Configuring Brightness and Contrast in the Initial Screen717.3 Configuring Volume in the Initial Screen72Installing the Software738.1 MagicTune738.1.1 What is "MagicTune"?738.1.2 Installing the Software738.1.3 Removing the Software748.2 MultiScreen758.2.1 Installing the Software758.2.2 Removing the Software76Troubleshooting Guide779.1 Requirements Before Contacting Samsung Customer Service Center779.1.1 Testing the Product779.1.2 Checking the Resolution and Frequency779.1.3 Check the following.779.2 Q & A80Specifications8210.1 General8210.2 PowerSaver8410.3 Standard Signal Mode Table85Appendix87Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE87Responsibility for the Pay Service (Cost to Customers)93Not a product defect93A Product damage caused by customer's fault93Others93Correct Disposal94Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)94Terminology95Index97Taille: 4 MoPages: 98Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières목차2사용하기 전에7저작권7본문에서 사용되는 아이콘7청소 관련8청소하기8설치공간 확보하기9보관 시 주의사항9안전을 위한 주의사항10안전을 위한 주의사항에서 사용되는 아이콘10전원 관련11설치 관련12사용 관련14제품의 올바른 사용자세18준비191.1 내용물 확인하기191.1.1 포장상자 분리하기191.1.2 구성품 확인하기201.2 각부의 명칭211.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명211.2.2 뒷면설명231.3 설치하기241.3.1 받침대 조립하기241.3.2 받침대 제거하기251.3.3 제품의 기울기 및 높낮이 조정261.3.4 도난 방지용 잠금장치27외부기기 연결 및 사용하기282.1 연결 전 확인 사항282.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.282.2 전원 연결하기282.3 PC와 연결 및 사용하기292.3.1 D-SUB 케이블 연결 방식 (아날로그 방식)292.3.2 HDMI 케이블 연결 방식302.3.3 HDMI-DVI 케이블 연결 방식302.3.4 제품 드라이버 설치하기312.3.5 최적 해상도 설정하기322.3.6 PC로 해상도 설정하기33화면 설정하기373.1 밝기373.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면373.2 명암383.2.1 명암을 설정하려면383.3 선명도393.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면393.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright403.4.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면403.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale423.5.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale을 설정하려면423.6 화면 크기433.6.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면433.7 HDMI 블랙 레벨453.7.1 HDMI 블랙 레벨을 설정하려면453.8 응답속도463.8.1 응답속도를 설정하려면463.9 수평 위치 & 수직 위치473.9.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면473.10 주파수 조정483.10.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면483.11 미세 조정493.11.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면49색상 설정하기504.1 적504.1.1 적을 설정하려면504.2 녹514.2.1 녹을 설정하려면514.3 청524.3.1 청을 설정하려면524.4 바탕색 조정534.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면534.5 감마 조정544.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면54OSD 조정하기555.1 메뉴 언어555.1.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면555.2 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치565.2.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면565.3 표시 시간575.3.1 표시 시간을 설정하려면575.4 투명도585.4.1 투명도를 설정하려면58설정 및 초기화하기596.1 초기화596.1.1 초기화를 설정하려면596.2 에코 세이빙606.2.1 에코 세이빙을 설정하려면606.3 꺼짐 예약616.3.1 꺼짐 예약를 설정하려면616.4 꺼짐 시간설정626.4.1 꺼짐 시간설정을 설정하려면626.5 PC/AV 모드636.5.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면636.6 키반복 시간설정646.6.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면646.7 입력 인식656.7.1 입력 인식을 설정하려면656.8 맞춤키666.8.1 맞춤키를 설정하려면66정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴677.1 정보 표시677.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면677.2 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암 설정68소프트웨어 설치698.1 MagicTune698.1.1 "MagicTune"이란?698.1.2 설치698.1.3 설치 제거708.2 MultiScreen718.2.1 MultiScreen 설치718.2.2 MultiScreen 삭제72문제발생 시 해결방안739.1 고장신고 전 확인사항739.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기739.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기739.1.3 확인해 보세요.739.2 궁금해요 (Q&A)75제품규격7710.1 제품사양7710.2 절전 기능7910.3 표준신호모드표80기타 정보82고객 등록82서비스센터 안내83유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임84제품 고장이 아닌경우84소비자 과실로 고장이 난 경우84그 밖의 경우84재활용 정보85무료처리85유료 처리85삼성전자의 [녹색경영]85용어설명86찾아보기88Taille: 2,6 MoPages: 89Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto7Copyright7Iconos utilizados en este manual7Limpieza8Seguridad en el espacio de instalación9Precauciones de almacenamiento9Precauciones de seguridad10Símbolos de precauciones de seguridad10Electricidad y seguridad11Instalación12Funcionamiento14Postura correcta para utilizar el producto18Preparativos191.1 Comprobación del contenido191.1.1 Extracción del embalaje191.1.2 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Partes211.2.1 Botones delanteros211.2.2 Parte posterior231.3 Instalación241.3.1 Instalación del soporte241.3.2 Extracción del soporte251.3.3 Ajuste de la inclinación del producto261.3.4 Bloqueo antirrobo27Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente282.1 Antes de conectar282.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión282.2 Conexión y uso de un PC292.2.1 Conexión mediante el cable D-SUB (tipo Analógico)292.2.2 Conexión mediante un cable HDMI302.2.3 Conexión mediante un cable HDMI-DVI302.2.4 Conexión de los auriculares312.3 Conexión de la alimentación312.3.1 Sujeción de los cables conectados322.3.2 Cambiar la configuración del sonido en Windows.332.3.3 Instalación de controladores342.3.4 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima352.3.5 Cambio de la resolución mediante un PC36Configuración de pantalla403.1 Brillo403.1.1 Configuración de Brillo403.2 Contraste413.2.1 Configuración de Contraste413.3 Nitidez423.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez423.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright433.4.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright433.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle453.5.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle453.6 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale473.6.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale473.7 Tamaño de imagen483.7.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen483.8 N.neg HDMI503.8.1 Ajuste de la configuración de N.neg HDMI503.9 Posición-H y Posición-V513.9.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V513.10 Grueso523.10.1 Ajuste de Grueso523.11 Fino533.11.1 Ajuste de Fino53Configuración del matiz544.1 Rojo544.1.1 Configuración de Rojo544.2 Verde554.2.1 Configuración de Verde554.3 Azul564.3.1 Configuración de Azul564.4 Tono de color574.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color574.5 Gamma584.5.1 Configuración de Gamma58Coordinación de OSD595.1 Idioma595.1.1 Configuración de Idioma595.2 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú605.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú605.3 Mostrar hora615.3.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora615.4 Transparencia625.4.1 Modificación de Transparencia62Configuración y restauración636.1 Restaurar636.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)636.2 Ahorro energía646.2.1 Configuración de Ahorro energía646.3 Temp. apag.656.3.1 Configuración de Temp. apag.656.4 Apagar tras666.4.1 Configuración de Apagar tras666.5 Modo PC/AV676.5.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV676.6 Frec. rep. tecla686.6.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla686.7 Detección fuente696.7.1 Configuración de Detección fuente696.8 Tecla personaliz.706.8.1 Configuración de Tecla personaliz.70Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros717.1 INFORMACIÓN717.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN717.2 Configuración de Brillo y Contraste en la pantalla inicial727.3 Configuración de Volumen en la pantalla inicial72Instalación del software748.1 MagicTune748.1.1 ¿Qué es "MagicTune"?748.1.2 Instalación del software748.1.3 Eliminación del software758.2 MultiScreen768.2.1 Instalación del software768.2.2 Eliminación del software77Solución de problemas789.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung789.1.1 Prueba del producto789.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia789.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.789.2 P y R81Especificaciones8310.1 General8310.2 Ahorro de energía8510.3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar86Apéndice88Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE88Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago (Coste para los Clientes)94No se trata de un defecto del producto94El daño del producto ha sido causado por el cliente94Otros95Eliminación correcta96Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)96Terminología97Índice99Taille: 4,1 MoPages: 100Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières사용하기 전에2저작권2본문에서 사용되는 아이콘2안전을 위한 주의사항에서 사용되는 아이콘2청소하기3청소하기3설치공간 확보하기4보관 시 주의사항4안전을 위한 주의사항5전원 관련5설치 관련6사용 관련8제품의 올바른 사용자세12목차13준비171.1 내용물 확인하기171.1.1 포장상자 분리하기171.1.2 구성품 확인하기181.2 각부의 명칭191.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명191.2.2 뒷면설명211.3 설치하기221.3.1 받침대 조립하기221.3.2 제품의 기울기 및 높낮이 조정231.3.3 모니터 화면 회전하기231.3.4 걸이용 받침대 설치241.3.5 도난 방지용 잠금장치251.4 "MagicRotation Auto"26외부기기 연결 및 사용하기272.1 연결 전 확인 사항272.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.272.2 PC와 연결 및 사용하기282.2.1 PC와 연결하기282.2.2 제품 드라이버 설치하기302.2.3 최적해상도 설정하기312.2.4 PC로 해상도 설정하기322.3 헤드폰 연결하기352.4 USB HUB 연결 및 사용하기362.4.1 제품과 PC 연결하기362.4.2 USB HUB 활용하기362.5 전원 연결하기37화면 설정하기383.1 MAGIC383.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright383.1.2 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color393.2 밝기403.2.1 밝기를 설정하려면403.3 명암413.3.1 명암을 설정하려면413.4 선명도423.4.1 선명도를 설정하려면423.5 응답속도433.5.1 응답속도를 설정하려면433.6 HDMI 블랙 레벨443.6.1 HDMI 블랙 레벨을 설정하려면44색상 설정하기454.1 적454.1.1 적을 설정하려면454.2 녹464.2.1 녹을 설정하려면464.3 청474.3.1 청을 설정하려면474.4 바탕색 조정484.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면484.5 감마 조정494.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면49크기 및 위치 설정하기505.1 화면 크기505.1.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면505.2 수평 위치 & 수직 위치515.2.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면515.3 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치525.3.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면52설정 및 초기화하기536.1 ECO536.1.1 에코 모션 센서536.1.2 에코 라이트 센서556.1.3 에코 세이빙586.1.4 에코 아이콘 표시596.2 메뉴 투명도616.2.1 메뉴 투명도를 설정하려면616.3 메뉴 언어626.3.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면626.4 PC/AV 모드636.4.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면636.5 자동 입력 선택646.5.1 자동 입력 선택을 설정하려면646.6 메뉴 표시 시간656.6.1 메뉴 표시 시간을 설정하려면656.7 키반복 시간설정666.7.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면666.8 맞춤키676.8.1 맞춤키를 설정하려면676.9 꺼짐 예약 동작/해제686.9.1 꺼짐 예약 동작/해제를 설정하려면686.10 꺼짐 예약 설정696.10.1 꺼짐 예약 설정을 설정하려면696.11 초기화706.11.1 초기화를 설정하려면70정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴717.1 정보 표시717.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면717.2 초기화면에서 밝기 설정71문제발생 시 해결방안728.1 고장신고 전 확인사항728.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기728.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기728.1.3 확인해 보세요.728.2 궁금해요.(Q&A)74제품규격759.1 제품사양759.2 절전 기능769.3 표준신호모드표77기타 정보79고객 등록79서비스센터 안내80재활용 정보81무료처리81유료 처리81삼성전자의 [녹색경영]81용어설명82찾아보기84Taille: 5,6 MoPages: 85Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresS19B150N/S22B150N/S24B150NL1Índice21 Principales precauciones de seguridad31-1 Antes de comenzar31-2 Conservación y mantenimiento51-3 Limpieza del monitor61-4 Precauciones de seguridad72 Instalación del producto132-1 Contenido del embalaje132-2 Instalación del soporte142-3 Conexión del monitor162-4 Bloqueo Kensington173 Uso del producto183-1 Configuración de la resolución óptima183-2 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar193-3 Instalación del controlador del dispositivo223-4 Botones de funcionamiento del producto233-5 Uso del menú de ajuste de la pantalla (OSD: presentación en pantalla)253-6 Configuración de Brillo y Contraste en la pantalla inicial314 Instalación del software324-1 Natural Color324-2 MagicTune334-3 MultiScreen345 Solución de problemas355-1 Autodiagnóstico de monitor355-2 Antes de solicitar un servicio365-3 Preguntas habituales386 Más información406-1 Especificaciones406-2 Función de ahorro de energía436-3 Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE446-4 Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago (Coste para los Clientes)496-5 Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)50Taille: 800 koPages: 50Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresS19B150N/S22B150N/S24B150NL1차례21 주요 안전 사항31-1 사용설명서를 읽기 전에31-2 보관 및 관리41-3 청소하기51-4 안전을 위한 주의사항62 설치하기112-1 구성품 확인112-2 받침대 조립하기122-3 모니터에 외부기기 연결하기142-4 도난 방지용 잠금 장치153 사용하기163-1 최적해상도 설정163-2 표준신호모드표173-3 제품 드라이버 설치203-4 제품 조작 버튼 설명213-5 화면 조정 메뉴(OSD:On Screen Display) 사용하기233-6 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암 설정284 소프트웨어 설치294-1 Natural Color294-2 MagicTune304-3 MultiScreen315 문제 해결325-1 모니터 자체 진단하기325-2 고장 신고 전 확인사항335-3 궁금해요356 기타정보366-1 제품규격366-2 절전 기능396-3 고객 등록406-4 서비스센터 안내416-5 유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임426-6 재활용 정보43Taille: 1,6 MoPages: 43Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto7Copyright7Iconos utilizados en este manual7Limpieza8Limpieza8Seguridad en el espacio de instalación9Precauciones de almacenamiento9Precauciones de seguridad10Símbolos de precauciones de seguridad10Electricidad y seguridad11Instalación12Funcionamiento14Postura correcta para utilizar el producto18Preparativos191.1 Comprobación del contenido191.1.1 Extracción del embalaje191.1.2 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Partes211.2.1 Parte posterior231.3 Instalación241.3.1 Instalación del soporte241.3.2 Extracción del soporte251.3.3 Ajuste de la inclinación del producto261.3.4 Bloqueo antirrobo27Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente282.1 Antes de conectar282.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión282.2 Conexión de la alimentación292.3 Conexión y uso de un PC302.3.1 Conexión mediante el cable D-SUB (tipo Analógico)302.3.2 Conexión mediante un cable HDMI302.3.3 Conexión mediante un cable HDMI-DVI312.3.4 Instalación de controladores322.3.5 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima332.3.6 Cambio de la resolución mediante un PC34Configuración de pantalla383.1 Brillo383.1.1 Configuración de Brillo383.2 Contraste393.2.1 Configuración de Contraste393.3 Nitidez403.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez403.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright413.4.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright413.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale433.5.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale433.6 Tamaño de imagen443.6.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen443.7 N.neg HDMI463.7.1 Ajuste de la configuración de N.neg HDMI463.8 Tiempo respuesta473.8.1 Configuración de Tiempo respuesta473.9 Posición-H y Posición-V483.9.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V483.10 Grueso493.10.1 Ajuste de Grueso493.11 Fino503.11.1 Ajuste de Fino50Configuración del matiz514.1 Rojo514.1.1 Configuración de Rojo514.2 Verde524.2.1 Configuración de Verde524.3 Azul534.3.1 Configuración de Azul534.4 Tono de color544.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color544.5 Gamma554.5.1 Configuración de Gamma55Coordinación de OSD565.1 Idioma565.1.1 Configuración de Idioma565.2 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú575.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú575.3 Mostrar hora585.3.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora585.4 Transparencia595.4.1 Modificación de Transparencia59Configuración y restauración606.1 Restaurar606.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)606.2 Ahorro energía616.2.1 Configuración de Ahorro energía616.3 Temp. apag.626.3.1 Configuración de Temp. apag.626.4 Apagar tras636.4.1 Configuración de Apagar tras636.5 Modo PC/AV646.5.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV646.6 Frec. rep. tecla656.6.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla656.7 Detección fuente666.7.1 Configuración de Detección fuente666.8 Tecla personaliz.676.8.1 Configuración de Tecla personaliz.67Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros687.1 INFORMACIÓN687.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN687.2 Configuración de Brillo y Contraste en la pantalla inicial69Instalación del software708.1 MagicTune708.1.1 ¿Qué es "MagicTune"?708.1.2 Instalación del software708.1.3 Eliminación del software718.2 MultiScreen728.2.1 Instalación del software728.2.2 Eliminación del software73Solución de problemas749.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung749.1.1 Prueba del producto749.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia749.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.749.2 P y R77Especificaciones7910.1 General7910.2 Ahorro de energía8110.3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar82Apéndice84Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE84Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago (Coste para los Clientes)90No se trata de un defecto del producto90El daño del producto ha sido causado por el cliente90Otros91Eliminación correcta92Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)92Terminología93Índice95Taille: 3,7 MoPages: 96Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster TB7501Contenido3Introducción5Medidas de seguridad5Ventilación adecuada del producto13Lista de funciones13Accesorios y cables14Uso del panel de control15Uso de Smart Hub16Control remoto estándar17Botones del control remoto estándar18Cómo navegar por los menús19Conexión del cable de alimentación y la conexión de antena o cable20Configuración inicial de los parámetros básicos21Conexiones25Conexión a dispositivos AV (reproductores Blu-ray o de DVD, etc.)25Conexión a dispositivos de audio27Conexión de cable para servicio técnico28Conexión a una PC28Cambio de la fuente de entrada30Funciones básicas del monitor33Postura correcta para utilizar el producto33Cambio del modo preestablecido de la imagen33Ajuste de configuración de imagen34Cambio del tamaño de imagen35Calibración de la visualización de pantalla36Cambio de las opciones de imagen37Cambio de los modos preestablecidos de sonido38Ajuste de la configuración de sonido39Funciones básicas del TV41Uso del menú Canal41Memorización de canales49Otras funciones50Cambio del modo preestablecido de la imagen51Ajuste de configuración de imagen52Cambio del tamaño de imagen53Cambio de las opciones de imagen55Cambio de los modos preestablecidos de sonido58Ajuste de la configuración de sonido59Funciones de la red61Conexión a la red61Configuración de la red cableada64Configuración de la red inalámbrica67Administración de los dispositivos conectados a la red71Funciones de preferencia73Configuración de la hora73Soluciones económicas75Bloqueo de programas76Imagen dentro de imagen (PIP)79Uso del producto con un teclado y un mouse80Otras funciones81Menú de soporte técnico85Funciones avanzadas89Smart Hub89Uso de Samsung Apps98Buscar101Your Video103Family Story104Fitness106Kids107Navegador Web110AllShare Play115Mi lis. (En AllShare Play)118Videos (En AllShare Play)120Fotos (En AllShare Play)124Música (En AllShare Play)128Uso de la función de DLNA130Uso de la función MHL132Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)133Otra información136Solución de problemas136Formatos de subtítulos y AllShare Play admitidos147Ajuste de la inclinación del producto150Bloqueo antirrobo Kensington150Montaje de los cables151Almacenamiento y mantenimiento151Licencia152Especificaciones153Índice154Taille: 8 MoPages: 156Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresInformación importante sobre la garantía relativa al formato de visualización del televisor2Advertencia de imagen fija2Seguridad en el espacio de instalación2Introducción4Precauciones de seguridad4Relacionadas con la alimentación4Relacionadas con la instalación5Relacionadas con la limpieza7Relacionadas con el uso7Lista de funciones11Accesorios11Visualización del panel de control12Visualización del control remoto13Cómo navegar los menús14Conexión a una antena14Plug & Play (configuración inicial)15Conexiones16Conexión a un dispositivo AV16Conexión de los auriculares17Conexión a una PC17Funciones básicas19Cambio de la fuente de entrada19Menú Canal19Visualización de canales19Uso de los canales favoritos20Memorización de canales20Edición de los canales20Otras funciones20Menú Imagen22Cambio del Modo de Imagen preestablecido22Ajuste de configuración de imagen22Tiempo de respuesta22Ajuste Automático t22Cambio de las opciones de imagen23Menú de sonido25Cambio de los modos preestablecidos de Modo sonido25Ajuste de la configuración de sonido25Configuración de sonido25Menú de configuración26Configuración de la hora26Uso del temporizador26Configuración del temporizador de encendido/apagado26Bloqueo de programas27Otras funciones28Menú de soporte técnico30Funciones avanzadas31Media Play (USB)31Conexión de un dispositivo USB31Modo Fútbol36Otra información37Instalación de un montaje de pared/soporte de escritorio37Bloqueo antirrobo Kensington38Solución de problemas39Almacenamiento y mantenimiento41Licencia42Especificaciones43Taille: 13 MoPages: 44Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster TB7501Contents3Getting Started5Safety Precautions5Providing Proper Ventilation for Your Product13List of Features13Accessories and Cables14Using the Control Panel15Using Smart Hub16The Standard Remote Control17The Standard Remote Control Buttons18How to Navigate Menus19Connecting the Power Cord and the Antenna or Cable Connection20Configuring the Basic Settings in Initial Setup21Connections25Connecting to AV Devices (Blu-ray Players, DVD Players, etc.)25Connecting to Audio Devices27The Service Cable Connection28Connecting to a PC28Changing the Input Source30Basic Features for the Monitor33Correct posture to use the product33Changing the Preset Picture Mode33Adjusting Picture Settings34Changing the Picture Size35Calibrating the Screen Display36Changing the Picture Options37Changing the Preset Sound Mode38Adjusting Sound Settings39Basic Features for the TV41Using the Channel Menu41Memorizing Channels49Other Features50Changing the Preset Picture Mode51Adjusting Picture Settings52Changing the Picture Size53Changing the Picture Options55Changing the Preset Sound Mode58Adjusting Sound Settings59Network Features61Connecting to the Network61Setting up the Wired Network64Setting up the Wireless Network67Managing the Network Connected Devices71Preference Features73Setting the Time73Economical Solutions75Blocking Programs76Picture In Picture (PIP)79Using the Product with a Keyboard and a Mouse80Other Features81Support Menu85Advanced Features89Smart Hub89Using the Samsung Apps98Search101Your Video103Family Story104Fitness106Kids107Web Browser110AllShare Play115My List (In AllShare Play)118Videos (In AllShare Play)120Photos (In AllShare Play)124Music (In AllShare Play)128Using the DLNA Function130Using the MHL function132Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)133Other Information136Troubleshooting136Supported Subtitle and AllShare Play file formats147Adjusting the Product Tilt150Anti-theft Kensington Lock150Assembling the Cables151Storage and Maintenance151License152Specifications153Index154Taille: 7,9 MoPages: 156Language: EnglishOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières사용하기 전에2저작권2본문에서 사용되는 아이콘2안전을 위한 주의사항에서 사용되는 아이콘2청소하기3청소하기3설치공간 확보하기4보관 시 주의사항4안전을 위한 주의사항4전원 관련4설치 관련6사용 관련7제품의 올바른 사용자세11목차12준비171.1 내용물 확인하기171.1.1 포장상자 분리하기171.1.2 구성품 확인하기181.2 받침대 조립하기191.3 각부의 명칭211.3.1 앞면 버튼 설명211.3.2 뒷면설명231.3.3 연결된 케이블 정리하기241.3.4 도난 방지용 잠금장치241.3.5 제품의 기울기 조정25입체영상262.1 입체영상262.1.1 3D 모드262.1.2 입체감272.1.3 좌/우 영상 변경282.1.4 일반영상으로 보기282.2 표준 HDMI 지원 포맷292.3 PC 신호(HDMI 단자와 연결)에서 지원되는 해상도292.4 PC에서 3D 게임을 즐기려면302.5 시청 시 주의사항31외부기기 연결 및 사용하기323.1 연결 전 확인 사항323.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.323.2 전원 연결하기323.3 PC와 연결 및 사용하기333.3.1 PC와 연결하기333.3.2 제품 드라이버 설치하기353.3.3 PC로 해상도 설정하기363.4 영상 기기와 연결하기373.4.1 HDMI 케이블 연결 방식373.5 최적해상도 설정하기383.6 헤드폰 연결하기38화면 설정하기394.1 MAGIC394.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle394.1.2 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright404.1.3 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color414.2 밝기424.2.1 밝기를 설정하려면424.3 명암434.3.1 명암을 설정하려면434.4 선명도434.4.1 선명도를 설정하려면434.5 응답속도444.5.1 응답속도를 설정하려면444.6 HDMI 블랙 레벨45색상 설정하기465.1 적465.1.1 적을 설정하려면465.2 녹465.2.1 녹을 설정하려면465.3 청475.3.1 청을 설정하려면475.4 바탕색 조정475.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면485.5 감마 조정495.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면49크기 및 위치 설정하기506.1 화면 크기506.1.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면506.2 수평 위치516.2.1 수평 위치를 설정하려면516.3 수직 위치516.3.1 수직 위치를 설정하려면516.4 메뉴 수평 위치526.4.1 메뉴 수평 위치를 설정하려면526.5 메뉴 수직 위치526.5.1 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면53설정 및 초기화하기547.1 에코 세이빙547.2 메뉴 투명도547.2.1 메뉴 투명도를 설정하려면547.3 메뉴 언어557.3.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면557.4 PC/AV 모드567.4.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면567.5 자동 입력 선택577.5.1 자동 입력 선택을 설정하려면577.6 메뉴 표시 시간577.6.1 메뉴 표시 시간을 설정하려면577.7 키반복 시간설정587.7.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면587.8 맞춤키597.8.1 맞춤키를 설정하려면597.9 꺼짐 예약 동작/해제597.9.1 꺼짐 예약 동작/해제를 설정하려면597.10 꺼짐 예약 설정607.10.1 꺼짐 예약 설정을 설정하려면607.11 초기화617.11.1 초기화를 설정하려면61정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴628.1 정보 표시628.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면628.2 초기화면에서 밝기 설정628.3 초기화면에서 음량 설정63문제발생 시 해결방안649.1 고장신고 전 확인사항649.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기649.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기649.1.3 확인해 보세요.649.2 궁금해요.(Q&A)66제품규격6710.1 제품사양6710.2 절전 기능6810.3 표준신호모드표69기타 정보72고객 등록72서비스센터 안내73재활용 정보74무료처리74유료 처리74삼성전자의 [녹색경영]74용어설명75찾아보기77Taille: 4,7 MoPages: 78Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto7Copyright7Iconos utilizados en este manual7Limpieza8Limpieza8Seguridad en el espacio de instalación9Precauciones de almacenamiento9Precauciones de seguridad10Símbolos10Electricidad y seguridad10Instalación12Funcionamiento14Postura correcta para utilizar el producto18Preparativos191.1 Comprobación del contenido191.1.1 Extracción del embalaje191.1.2 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Partes211.2.1 Botones delanteros211.2.2 Parte posterior231.2.3 Vista lateral derecha251.3 Instalación261.3.1 Instalación del soporte261.3.2 Ajuste de la inclinación y la altura del producto271.3.3 Giro del monitor271.3.4 Instalación de un equipo de montaje mural o un soporte de escritorio281.3.5 Bloqueo antirrobo30Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente312.1 Antes de conectar312.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión312.2 Conexión de la alimentación312.3 Conexión y uso de un PC322.3.1 Conexión a un PC322.3.2 Instalación de controladores392.3.3 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima402.3.4 Cambio de la resolución mediante un PC41Configuración de pantalla453.1 Brillo453.1.1 Configuración de Brillo453.2 Contraste463.2.1 Configuración de Contraste463.3 Nitidez473.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez473.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright483.4.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright483.5 Tamaño de imagen503.5.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen503.6 N.neg HDMI523.6.1 Ajuste de la configuración de N.neg HDMI523.7 Tiempo respuesta533.7.1 Configuración de Tiempo respuesta533.8 Posición-H y Posición-V533.8.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V543.9 Grueso553.9.1 Ajuste de Grueso553.10 Fino563.10.1 Ajuste de Fino56Configuración del matiz574.1 Rojo574.1.1 Configuración de Rojo574.2 Verde584.2.1 Configuración de Verde584.3 Azul594.3.1 Configuración de Azul594.4 Tono de color604.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color604.5 Gamma614.5.1 Configuración de Gamma61Cambio de tamaño o reubicación de la pantalla625.1 Idioma625.1.1 Cambio del Idioma625.2 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú635.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú635.3 Mostrar hora645.3.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora645.4 Transparencia655.4.1 Modificación de Transparencia65Configuración y restauración666.1 Restaurar666.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)666.2 Ahorro energía676.2.1 Configuración de la función Ahorro energía676.3 Temp. apag.686.3.1 Configuración de Temp. apag.686.4 Apagar tras696.4.1 Configuración de Apagar tras696.5 Modo PC/AV706.5.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV706.6 Frec. rep. tecla726.6.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla726.7 Detección fuente736.7.1 Configuración de Detección fuente736.8 Tecla personaliz.746.8.1 Configuración de Tecla personaliz.74Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros757.1 INFORMACIÓN757.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN757.2 Configuración de Brillo y Contraste en la pantalla inicial757.3 Configuración de Volumen en la pantalla inicial76Instalación del software778.1 Magic Tune778.1.1 ¿Qué es MagicTune?778.1.2 Instalación del software778.1.3 Eliminación del software778.2 MultiScreen798.2.1 Instalación del software798.2.2 Eliminación del software808.3 MagicRotation818.3.1 Instalación del software818.3.2 Eliminación del software83Solución de problemas849.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung849.1.1 Prueba del producto849.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia849.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.849.2 P y R87Especificaciones8910.1 General8910.2 Ahorro de energía9510.3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar97Apéndice105Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE105Responsabilidad por el Servicio de Pago (Coste para los Clientes)111No se trata de un defecto del producto111El daño del producto ha sido causado por el cliente111Otros112Eliminación correcta113Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)113Terminología114Índice116Taille: 5,7 MoPages: 117Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresAntes de usar el producto2Copyright2Iconos utilizados en este manual2Símbolos de precauciones de seguridad3Limpieza4Limpieza4Seguridad en el espacio de instalación5Precauciones de almacenamiento5Precauciones de seguridad5Electricidad y seguridad5Instalación7Funcionamiento9Postura correcta para utilizar el producto13Índice14Preparativos191.1 Comprobación del contenido191.1.1 Extracción del embalaje191.1.2 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Instalación del soporte211.3 Piezas231.3.1 Botones delanteros231.3.2 Parte posterior261.3.3 Sujeción de los cables conectados271.3.4 Bloqueo antirrobo271.3.5 Ajuste de la inclinación del producto283D292.1 3D292.1.1 Modo 3D292.1.2 Profundidad302.1.3 Cambio I/D312.1.4 3D2D312.2 Resolution Supported for PC Input (via the HDMI Port)322.3 Resolución admitida para la entrada PC (a través del puerto HDMI)332.4 Reproducción de juegos 3D en un PC342.5 Precauciones cuando se ven vídeos 3D35Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente363.1 Antes de la conexión363.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión363.2 Conexión de la alimentación373.3 Conexión y utilización de un PC383.3.1 Conexión a un PC383.3.2 Instalación de controladores403.3.3 Cambio de la resolución mediante un PC403.4 Conexión a un dispositivo de vídeo423.4.1 Conexión mediante un cable HDMI423.5 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima443.6 Conexión de auriculares44Configuración de pantalla454.1 MAGIC454.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle454.1.2 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright464.1.3 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color484.2 Brillo494.2.1 Configuración de Brillo494.3 Contraste494.3.1 Configuración de Contraste494.4 Nitidez504.4.1 Configuración de Nitidez504.5 Tiempo respuesta514.5.1 Configuración de Tiempo respuesta514.6 N.neg HDMI51Configuración del matiz535.1 Rojo535.1.1 Configuración de Rojo535.2 Verde535.2.1 Configuración de Verde535.3 Azul545.3.1 Configuración de Azul545.4 Tono de color555.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color555.5 Gamma565.5.1 Configuración de Gamma56Cambio de tamaño o reubicación de la pantalla586.1 Tamaño586.1.1 Cambio del Tamaño de la imagen586.2 Posición-H596.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H596.3 Posición-V596.3.1 Configuración de Posición-V606.4 Posición-H menú606.4.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú606.5 Posición-V menú616.5.1 Configuración de Posición-V menú61Configuración y restauración627.1 Ahorro energía627.2 Transp. menú627.2.1 Modificación de Transp. menú627.3 Idioma637.3.1 Cambio del Idioma637.4 Modo PC/AV647.4.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV647.5 Fuente autom.657.5.1 Configuración de Fuente autom.657.6 Mostrar hora657.6.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora657.7 Frec. rep. tecla667.7.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla667.8 Tecla personaliz.677.8.1 Configuración de Tecla personaliz.677.9 Act/des temp apag677.9.1 Configuración de Act/des temp apag677.10 Conf.temp.apagado687.10.1 Configuración de Conf.temp.apagado687.11 Restaurar697.11.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)69Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros708.1 INFORMACIÓN708.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN708.2 Configuración de Brillo en la pantalla inicial708.3 Configuración de Volumen en la pantalla inicial71Solución de problemas729.1 Requisitos previos para ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio al cliente de Samsung729.1.1 Prueba del producto729.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia729.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.729.2 P y R75Especificaciones7710.1 General7710.2 Ahorro de energía7810.3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar80Apéndice83Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE83Correcta eliminación88Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)88Eliminación correcta de las baterías de este producto88Terminología89Índice91Taille: 4,6 MoPages: 91Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières사용하기 전에2저작권2본문에서 사용되는 아이콘2안전을 위한 주의사항에서 사용되는 아이콘2청소하기3청소하기3설치공간 확보하기4보관 시 주의사항4안전을 위한 주의사항4전원 관련4설치 관련6사용 관련7제품의 올바른 사용자세11목차12준비171.1 내용물 확인하기171.1.1 포장상자 분리하기171.1.2 구성품 확인하기181.2 받침대 조립하기191.3 각부의 명칭211.3.1 앞면 버튼 설명211.3.2 뒷면설명231.3.3 연결된 케이블 정리하기241.3.4 도난 방지용 잠금장치241.3.5 제품의 기울기 조정25입체영상262.1 입체영상262.1.1 3D 모드262.1.2 입체감272.1.3 좌/우 영상 변경282.1.4 일반영상으로 보기282.2 표준 HDMI 지원 포맷292.3 PC 신호(HDMI 단자와 연결)에서 지원되는 해상도292.4 PC에서 3D 게임을 즐기려면302.5 시청 시 주의사항31외부기기 연결 및 사용하기323.1 연결 전 확인 사항323.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.323.2 전원 연결하기323.3 PC와 연결 및 사용하기333.3.1 PC와 연결하기333.3.2 제품 드라이버 설치하기353.3.3 PC로 해상도 설정하기363.4 영상 기기와 연결하기373.4.1 HDMI 케이블 연결 방식373.5 최적해상도 설정하기393.6 헤드폰 연결하기39화면 설정하기404.1 MAGIC404.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle404.1.2 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright414.1.3 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color424.2 밝기434.2.1 밝기를 설정하려면434.3 명암444.3.1 명암을 설정하려면444.4 선명도444.4.1 선명도를 설정하려면444.5 응답속도454.5.1 응답속도를 설정하려면454.6 HDMI 블랙 레벨46색상 설정하기475.1 적475.1.1 적을 설정하려면475.2 녹475.2.1 녹을 설정하려면475.3 청485.3.1 청을 설정하려면485.4 바탕색 조정485.4.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면495.5 감마 조정505.5.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면50크기 및 위치 설정하기516.1 화면 크기516.1.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면516.2 수평 위치526.2.1 수평 위치를 설정하려면526.3 수직 위치526.3.1 수직 위치를 설정하려면526.4 메뉴 수평 위치536.4.1 메뉴 수평 위치를 설정하려면536.5 메뉴 수직 위치536.5.1 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면54설정 및 초기화하기557.1 에코 세이빙557.2 메뉴 투명도557.2.1 메뉴 투명도를 설정하려면557.3 메뉴 언어567.3.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면567.4 PC/AV 모드577.4.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면577.5 자동 입력 선택587.5.1 자동 입력 선택을 설정하려면587.6 메뉴 표시 시간587.6.1 메뉴 표시 시간을 설정하려면587.7 키반복 시간설정597.7.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면597.8 맞춤키607.8.1 맞춤키를 설정하려면607.9 꺼짐 예약 동작/해제607.9.1 꺼짐 예약 동작/해제를 설정하려면607.10 꺼짐 예약 설정617.10.1 꺼짐 예약 설정을 설정하려면617.11 초기화627.11.1 초기화를 설정하려면62정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴638.1 정보 표시638.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면638.2 초기화면에서 밝기 설정638.3 초기화면에서 음량 설정64문제발생 시 해결방안659.1 고장신고 전 확인사항659.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기659.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기659.1.3 확인해 보세요.659.2 궁금해요.(Q&A)67제품규격6810.1 제품사양6810.2 절전 기능6910.3 표준신호모드표70기타 정보73고객 등록73서비스센터 안내74재활용 정보75무료처리75유료 처리75삼성전자의 [녹색경영]75용어설명76찾아보기78Taille: 4 MoPages: 79Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresAntes de usar el producto2Copyright2Iconos utilizados en este manual2Símbolos de precauciones de seguridad3Limpieza4Limpieza4Seguridad en el espacio de instalación5Precauciones de almacenamiento5Precauciones de seguridad5Electricidad y seguridad5Instalación7Funcionamiento9Postura correcta para utilizar el producto13Índice14Preparativos191.1 Comprobación del contenido191.1.1 Extracción del embalaje191.1.2 Comprobación de los componentes201.2 Instalación del soporte211.3 Piezas231.3.1 Botones delanteros231.3.2 Parte posterior261.3.3 Sujeción de los cables conectados271.3.4 Bloqueo antirrobo271.3.5 Ajuste de la inclinación del producto283D292.1 3D292.1.1 Modo 3D292.1.2 Profundidad302.1.3 Cambio I/D312.1.4 3D2D312.2 Resolution Supported for PC Input (via the HDMI Port)322.3 Resolución admitida para la entrada PC (a través del puerto HDMI)332.4 Reproducción de juegos 3D en un PC342.5 Precauciones cuando se ven vídeos 3D35Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente363.1 Antes de la conexión363.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión363.2 Conexión de la alimentación373.3 Conexión y utilización de un PC383.3.1 Conexión a un PC383.3.2 Instalación de controladores403.3.3 Cambio de la resolución mediante un PC403.4 Conexión a un dispositivo de vídeo423.4.1 Conexión mediante un cable HDMI423.5 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima443.6 Conexión de auriculares44Configuración de pantalla454.1 MAGIC454.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle454.1.2 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright464.1.3 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color484.2 Brillo494.2.1 Configuración de Brillo494.3 Contraste494.3.1 Configuración de Contraste494.4 Nitidez504.4.1 Configuración de Nitidez504.5 Tiempo respuesta514.5.1 Configuración de Tiempo respuesta514.6 N.neg HDMI51Configuración del matiz535.1 Rojo535.1.1 Configuración de Rojo535.2 Verde535.2.1 Configuración de Verde535.3 Azul545.3.1 Configuración de Azul545.4 Tono de color555.4.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color555.5 Gamma565.5.1 Configuración de Gamma56Cambio de tamaño o reubicación de la pantalla586.1 Tamaño586.1.1 Cambio del Tamaño de la imagen586.2 Posición-H596.2.1 Configuración de Posición-H596.3 Posición-V596.3.1 Configuración de Posición-V606.4 Posición-H menú606.4.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú606.5 Posición-V menú616.5.1 Configuración de Posición-V menú61Configuración y restauración627.1 Ahorro energía627.2 Transp. menú627.2.1 Modificación de Transp. menú627.3 Idioma637.3.1 Cambio del Idioma637.4 Modo PC/AV647.4.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV647.5 Fuente autom.657.5.1 Configuración de Fuente autom.657.6 Mostrar hora657.6.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora657.7 Frec. rep. tecla667.7.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla667.8 Tecla personaliz.677.8.1 Configuración de Tecla personaliz.677.9 Act/des temp apag677.9.1 Configuración de Act/des temp apag677.10 Conf.temp.apagado687.10.1 Configuración de Conf.temp.apagado687.11 Restaurar697.11.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)69Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros708.1 INFORMACIÓN708.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN708.2 Configuración de Brillo en la pantalla inicial708.3 Configuración de Volumen en la pantalla inicial71Solución de problemas729.1 Requisitos previos para ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio al cliente de Samsung729.1.1 Prueba del producto729.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia729.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.729.2 P y R75Especificaciones7710.1 General7710.2 Ahorro de energía7810.3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar80Apéndice83Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE83Correcta eliminación88Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)88Eliminación correcta de las baterías de este producto88Terminología89Índice91Taille: 3,9 MoPages: 91Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster P2450H1차례31 주요 안전 사항51-1 사용설명서를 읽기 전에51-2 보관 및 관리61-3 안전을 위한 주의사항72 설치하기132-1 구성품 확인132-2 받침대 조립하기142-3 받침대 제거하기162-4 걸이용 받침대 설치172-5 PC와 연결182-6 HDMI와 연결202-7 앰프와 연결212-8 도난 방지용 잠금 장치223 사용하기233-1 최적해상도 설정233-2 표준신호모드표243-3 제품 드라이버 설치253-4 제품 조작 버튼 설명263-5 화면 조정 메뉴(OSD:On Screen Display) 사용하기284 소프트웨어 설치334-1 Natural Color334-2 MagicTune344-3 MultiScreen365 문제 해결375-1 모니터 자체 진단하기375-2 고장 신고 전 확인사항385-3 궁금해요406 기타정보416-1 제품규격416-2 절전 기능426-3 고객 등록436-4 서비스 센터 안내446-5 재활용 정보45Taille: 1,4 MoPages: 46Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresÍndice2Antes de usar el producto7Copyright7Iconos utilizados en este manual7Símbolos de precauciones de seguridad8Limpieza9Limpieza9Seguridad en el espacio de instalación10Precauciones de almacenamiento10Precauciones de seguridad11Electricidad y seguridad11Instalación12Funcionamiento14Postura correcta para utilizar el producto19Preparativos201.1 Comprobación del contenido201.1.1 Extracción del embalaje201.1.2 Comprobación de los componentes211.2 Partes221.2.1 Botones delanteros221.2.2 Parte posterior251.2.3 Ajuste de la inclinación del producto261.2.4 Bloqueo antirrobo26Utilización de "MHL(Mobile High-Definition Link)"282.1 "MHL" (Mobile High-Definition Link)282.1.1 Uso de "MHL"292.1.2 Desactivación de "MHL"31Conexión y uso de un dispositivo fuente323.1 Antes de conectar323.1.1 Puntos de control previos a la conexión323.2 Conexión de la alimentación323.3 Conexión y uso de un PC333.3.1 Conexión a un PC333.3.2 Conexión de auriculares o altavoces (S24B750V / S27B750V)353.3.3 Instalación de controladores373.3.4 Establecimiento de la resolución óptima383.3.5 Cambio de la resolución mediante un PC39Configuración de pantalla424.1 Brillo424.1.1 Configuración de Brillo424.2 Contraste434.2.1 Configuración de Contraste434.3 Nitidez444.3.1 Configuración de Nitidez444.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright454.4.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright454.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle464.5.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle464.6 Grueso484.6.1 Ajuste de Grueso484.7 Fino494.7.1 Ajuste de Fino494.8 Tiempo respuesta504.8.1 Configuración de Tiempo respuesta504.9 N.neg HDMI514.9.1 Ajuste de la configuración de N.neg HDMI51Configuración del matiz525.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color525.1.1 Configuración de SAMSUNG MAGIC Color525.2 Rojo535.2.1 Configuración de Rojo535.3 Verde545.3.1 Configuración de Verde545.4 Azul555.4.1 Configuración de Azul555.5 Tono de color565.5.1 Ajuste de la configuración de Tono de color565.6 Gamma575.6.1 Configuración de Gamma57Cambio de tamaño o reubicación de la pantalla586.1 Posición-H y Posición-V586.1.1 Configuración de Posición-H y Posición-V586.2 Tamaño de imagen596.2.1 Cambio del Tamaño de imagen596.3 Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú606.3.1 Configuración de Posición-H menú y Posición-V menú60Configuración y restauración617.1 Restaurar617.1.1 Configuración de inicialización (Restaurar)617.2 Idioma627.2.1 Cambio del Idioma627.3 Ahorro energía637.3.1 Configuración de Ahorro energía637.4 Act/des temp apag647.4.1 Configuración de Act/des temp apag647.5 Conf.temp.apagado657.5.1 Configuración de Conf.temp.apagado657.6 Modo PC/AV667.6.1 Configuración de Modo PC/AV667.7 Frec. rep. tecla677.7.1 Configuración de Frec. rep. tecla677.8 Tecla personaliz. (S24B750H / S27B750H)687.8.1 Configuración de Tecla personaliz.687.9 Fuente autom.697.9.1 Configuración de Fuente autom.697.10 Mostrar hora707.10.1 Configuración de Mostrar hora707.11 Transp. menú717.11.1 Modificación de Transp. menú71Menú INFORMACIÓN y otros728.1 INFORMACIÓN728.1.1 Acceso a INFORMACIÓN728.2 Configuración del Volumen en la pantalla de inicio (S24B750V / S27B750V)738.2.1 Volumen738.2.2 Modo de sonido748.3 Configuración de Brightness y Contrast en la pantalla inicial (S24B750H / S27B750H)75Instalación del software769.1 Magic Tune769.1.1 ¿Qué es MagicTune?769.1.2 Instalación del software769.1.3 Eliminación del software77Solución de problemas7810.1 Requisitos antes de ponerse en contacto con el Centro de servicio técnico de Samsung7810.1.1 Prueba del producto7810.1.2 Comprobación de la resolución y la frecuencia7810.1.3 Compruebe lo siguiente.7810.2 P y R81Especificaciones8311.1 General8311.2 Ahorro de energía8511.3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar86Apéndice88Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE88Eliminación correcta94Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)94Terminología95Índice97Taille: 4,2 MoPages: 98Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières목차2사용하기 전에7저작권7본문에서 사용되는 아이콘7안전을 위한 주의사항에서 사용되는 아이콘7청소 관련8청소하기8설치공간 확보하기9보관 시 주의사항9안전을 위한 주의사항10전원 관련10설치 관련11사용 관련13제품의 올바른 사용자세17준비181.1 내용물 확인하기181.1.1 포장상자 분리하기181.1.2 구성품 확인하기191.2 각부의 명칭201.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명201.2.2 뒷면설명221.3 설치하기231.3.1 받침대 조립하기231.3.2 제품의 기울기 조정241.3.3 걸이용 받침대 설치251.3.4 도난 방지용 잠금장치27"MHL(Mobile High-Definition Link)" 사용하기282.1 "MHL"(Mobile High-Definition Link)282.1.1 "MHL" 사용하기292.1.2 "MHL" 해제하기31외부기기 연결 및 사용하기323.1 연결 전 확인 사항323.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요323.2 전원 연결하기323.3 PC와 연결 및 사용하기333.3.1 PC와 연결하기333.3.2 헤드폰이나 스피커 연결하기353.3.3 제품 드라이버 설치하기373.3.4 최적해상도 설정하기383.3.5 PC로 해상도 설정하기39화면 설정하기434.1 밝기434.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면434.2 명암444.2.1 명암을 설정하려면444.3 선명도454.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면454.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright464.4.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면464.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle484.5.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle을 설정하려면484.6 주파수 조정494.6.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면494.7 미세 조정504.7.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면504.8 응답 속도514.8.1 응답 속도를 설정하려면514.9 HDMI 블랙 레벨524.9.1 HDMI 블랙 레벨을 설정하려면52색상 설정하기535.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color535.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color를 설정하려면535.2 적545.2.1 적을 설정하려면545.3 녹555.3.1 녹을 설정하려면555.4 청565.4.1 청을 설정하려면565.5 바탕색 조정575.5.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면575.6 감마 조정585.6.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면58크기 및 위치 설정하기596.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치596.1.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면596.2 화면 크기606.2.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면606.3 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치616.3.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면61설정 및 초기화하기627.1 초기화627.1.1 초기화를 설정하려면627.2 메뉴 언어637.2.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면637.3 에코 세이빙647.3.1 에코 세이빙을 설정하려면647.4 꺼짐 예약 동작/해제657.4.1 꺼짐 예약 동작/해제를 설정하려면657.5 꺼짐 예약 설정667.5.1 꺼짐 예약 설정을 설정하려면667.6 PC / AV 모드677.6.1 PC / AV 모드를 설정하려면677.7 키반복 시간설정687.7.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면687.8 자동 입력 선택697.8.1 자동 입력 선택을 설정하려면697.9 메뉴 표시 시간707.9.1 메뉴 표시 시간을 설정하려면707.10 메뉴 투명도717.10.1 메뉴 투명도를 설정하려면71정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴728.1 정보 표시728.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면728.2 초기화면에서 음량 설정738.2.1 음량738.2.2 음향모드74소프트웨어 설치759.1 Magic Tune759.1.1 MagicTune이란?759.1.2 설치759.1.3 설치 제거769.2 MultiScreen779.2.1 MultiScreen 설치779.2.2 MultiScreen 삭제78문제발생 시 해결방안7910.1 고장신고 전 확인사항7910.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기7910.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기7910.1.3 확인해 보세요7910.2 궁금해요(Q&A)82제품규격8411.1 제품사양8411.2 절전 기능8611.3 표준신호모드표87기타 정보90고객 등록90서비스센터 안내91유상 서비스(고객 비용 부담)에 대한 책임92제품 고장이 아닌경우92소비자 과실로 고장이 난 경우92그 밖의 경우92재활용 정보93무료처리93유료처리93삼성전자의 [녹색경영]94용어설명95찾아보기97Taille: 4,5 MoPages: 98Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster BX1931N/BX2031/BX2031N/BX2231/BX2331/BX24311차례21 주요 안전 사항41-1 사용설명서를 읽기 전에41-2 보관 및 관리51-3 안전을 위한 주의사항62 설치하기122-1 구성품 확인122-2 받침대 조립하기132-3 PC와 연결152-4 HDMI와 연결172-5 도난 방지용 잠금 장치183 사용하기193-1 최적해상도 설정193-2 표준신호모드표203-3 표준신호모드표213-4 표준신호모드표223-5 표준신호모드표233-6 표준신호모드표253-7 표준신호모드표273-8 제품 드라이버 설치293-9 제품 조작 버튼 설명303-10 화면 조정 메뉴(OSD:On Screen Display) 사용하기324 소프트웨어 설치414-1 Natural Color414-2 MagicTune424-3 MultiScreen445 문제 해결455-1 모니터 자체 진단하기455-2 고장 신고 전 확인사항465-3 궁금해요486 기타정보496-1 제품규격496-2 절전 기능506-3 제품규격516-4 절전 기능526-5 제품규격536-6 절전 기능546-7 제품규격556-8 절전 기능566-9 제품규격576-10 절전 기능586-11 제품규격596-12 절전 기능606-13 고객 등록616-14 서비스 센터 안내626-15 재활용 정보63Taille: 2,5 MoPages: 63Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matières목차2사용하기 전에7저작권7본문에서 사용되는 아이콘7안전을 위한 주의사항에서 사용되는 아이콘7청소하기8청소하기8설치공간 확보하기9보관 시 주의사항9안전을 위한 주의사항10전원 관련10설치 관련11사용 관련13제품의 올바른 사용자세17준비181.1 내용물 확인하기181.1.1 포장상자 분리하기181.1.2 구성품 확인하기191.2 각부의 명칭201.2.1 앞면 버튼 설명201.2.2 뒷면설명221.2.3 제품의 기울기 조정231.2.4 도난 방지용 잠금장치23"MHL(Mobile High-Definition Link)" 사용하기242.1 "MHL"(Mobile High-Definition Link)242.1.1 "MHL" 사용하기252.1.2 "MHL" 해제하기27외부기기 연결 및 사용하기283.1 연결 전 확인 사항283.1.1 연결 전에 확인하세요.283.2 전원 연결하기283.3 PC와 연결 및 사용하기293.3.1 PC와 연결하기293.3.2 헤드폰이나 스피커 연결하기 (S24B750V / S27B750V)313.3.3 제품 드라이버 설치하기333.3.4 최적해상도 설정하기343.3.5 PC로 해상도 설정하기35화면 설정하기384.1 밝기384.1.1 밝기를 설정하려면384.2 명암394.2.1 명암을 설정하려면394.3 선명도404.3.1 선명도를 설정하려면404.4 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright414.4.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright를 설정하려면414.5 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle424.5.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Angle을 설정하려면424.6 주파수 조정434.6.1 주파수 조정을 설정하려면434.7 미세 조정444.7.1 미세 조정을 설정하려면444.8 응답 속도454.8.1 응답 속도를 설정하려면454.9 HDMI 블랙 레벨464.9.1 HDMI 블랙 레벨을 설정하려면46색상 설정하기475.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color475.1.1 SAMSUNG MAGIC Color를 설정하려면475.2 적485.2.1 적을 설정하려면485.3 녹495.3.1 녹을 설정하려면495.4 청505.4.1 청을 설정하려면505.5 바탕색 조정515.5.1 바탕색 조정을 설정하려면515.6 감마 조정525.6.1 감마 조정을 설정하려면52크기 및 위치 설정하기536.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치536.1.1 수평 위치 & 수직 위치를 설정하려면536.2 화면 크기546.2.1 화면 크기를 설정하려면546.3 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치556.3.1 메뉴 수평 위치 & 메뉴 수직 위치를 설정하려면55설정 및 초기화하기567.1 초기화567.1.1 초기화를 설정하려면567.2 메뉴 언어577.2.1 메뉴 언어를 설정하려면577.3 에코 세이빙587.3.1 에코세이빙을 설정하려면587.4 꺼짐 예약 동작/해제597.4.1 꺼짐 예약 동작/해제를 설정하려면597.5 꺼짐 예약 설정607.5.1 꺼짐 예약 설정을 설정하려면607.6 PC / AV 모드617.6.1 PC/AV 모드를 설정하려면617.7 키반복 시간설정627.7.1 키반복 시간설정을 설정하려면627.8 맞춤키 (S24B750H / S27B750H)637.8.1 맞춤키를 설정하려면637.9 자동 입력 선택647.9.1 자동 입력 선택을 설정하려면647.10 메뉴 표시 시간657.10.1 메뉴 표시 시간을 설정하려면657.11 메뉴 투명도667.11.1 메뉴 투명도를 설정하려면66정보 표시 및 기타 메뉴678.1 정보 표시678.1.1 정보 표시를 보려면678.2 초기화면에서 음량 설정 (S24B750V / S27B750V)678.2.1 음량678.2.2 음향 모드688.3 초기화면에서 밝기, 명암 설정 (S24B750H / S27B750H)68소프트웨어 설치699.1 Magic Tune699.1.1 MagicTune이란?699.1.2 설치699.1.3 설치 제거70문제발생 시 해결방안7110.1 고장신고 전 확인사항7110.1.1 제품 자체 진단하기7110.1.2 해상도 및 주파수 확인하기7110.1.3 확인해 보세요.7110.2 궁금해요.(Q&A)73제품규격7411.1 제품사양7411.2 절전 기능7511.3 표준신호모드표76기타 정보78고객 등록78서비스센터 안내79재활용 정보80무료처리80유료 처리80삼성전자의 [녹색경영]80용어설명81찾아보기83Taille: 4,6 MoPages: 84Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster S19A450BW-1/S19A450BR/S19A450MW/S19A450MR/ S19A450SW/S19A450SR/S22A450BW-1/S22A450MW/S22A450SW/ S24A450B/S24A450BW-1/S24A450M/S24A450MW/S24A450S/ S24A450SW1차례21 주요 안전 사항41-1 사용설명서를 읽기 전에41-2 보관 및 관리51-3 청소하기61-4 안전을 위한 주의사항72 설치하기122-1 구성품 확인122-2 받침대 조립하기132-3 걸이용 받침대 설치152-4 PC와 연결162-5 케이블 고정182-6 스피커192-7 도난 방지용 잠금 장치202-8 USB와 연결하기213 사용하기233-1 최적해상도 설정233-2 표준신호모드표243-3 표준신호모드표253-4 표준신호모드표263-5 표준신호모드표273-6 표준신호모드표283-7 표준신호모드표293-8 표준신호모드표303-9 표준신호모드표313-10 표준신호모드표323-11 표준신호모드표333-12 표준신호모드표353-13 표준신호모드표373-14 표준신호모드표393-15 표준신호모드표413-16 표준신호모드표433-17 제품 드라이버 설치453-18 제품 조작 버튼 설명463-19 화면 조정 메뉴(OSD:On Screen Display) 사용하기484 소프트웨어 설치554-1 Natural Color554-2 MagicTune564-3 MultiScreen584-4 MagicRotation595 문제 해결615-1 모니터 자체 진단하기615-2 고장 신고 전 확인사항625-3 궁금해요646 기타정보656-1 제품규격656-2 절전 기능676-3 제품규격686-4 절전 기능706-5 제품규격716-6 절전 기능736-7 제품규격746-8 절전 기능766-9 제품규격776-10 절전 기능796-11 제품규격806-12 절전 기능826-13 제품규격836-14 절전 기능856-15 제품규격866-16 절전 기능886-17 제품규격896-18 절전 기능916-19 제품규격926-20 절전 기능946-21 제품규격956-22 절전 기능966-23 제품규격976-24 절전 기능996-25 제품규격1006-26 절전 기능1016-27 제품규격1026-28 절전 기능1046-29 제품규격1056-30 절전 기능1066-31 고객 등록1076-32 서비스 센터 안내1086-33 재활용 정보109Taille: 3,6 MoPages: 109Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster BX1931N/BX2031/BX2031N/BX2231/BX2331/BX24311Índice21 Principales precauciones de seguridad41-1 Antes de comenzar41-2 Conservación y mantenimiento51-3 Precauciones de seguridad62 Instalación del producto132-1 Contenido del embalaje132-2 Instalación del soporte142-3 Conexión con un PC162-4 Conexión de un cable HDMI182-5 Bloqueo Kensington193 Uso del producto203-1 Configuración de la resolución óptima203-2 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar213-3 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar223-4 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar233-5 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar243-6 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar263-7 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar283-8 Instalación del controlador del dispositivo303-9 Botones de funcionamiento del producto313-10 Uso del menú de ajuste de la pantalla (OSD: presentación en pantalla)334 Instalación del software424-1 Natural Color424-2 MagicTune434-3 MultiScreen455 Solución de problemas465-1 Autodiagnóstico de monitor465-2 Antes de solicitar un servicio475-3 Preguntas habituales506 Más información526-1 Instrucciones526-2 Función de ahorro de energía536-3 Instrucciones546-4 Función de ahorro de energía556-5 Instrucciones566-6 Función de ahorro de energía576-7 Instrucciones586-8 Función de ahorro de energía596-9 Instrucciones606-10 Función de ahorro de energía616-11 Instrucciones626-12 Función de ahorro de energía636-13 aContacte con SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE646-14 Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos) - Sólo Europa67Taille: 2,4 MoPages: 67Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster XL22701Índice21 Principales precauciones de seguridad31-1 Antes de comenzar31-2 Conservación y mantenimiento41-3 Precauciones de seguridad52 Instalación del producto122-1 Contenido del embalaje122-2 Instalación del soporte132-3 Extracción del soporte152-4 Conexión con un PC162-5 Bloqueo Kensington173 Uso del producto183-1 Configuración de la resolución óptima183-2 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar193-3 Instalación del controlador del dispositivo213-4 Botones de funcionamiento del producto223-5 Uso del menú de ajuste de la pantalla (OSD: presentación en pantalla)244 Instalación del software314-1 Natural Color314-2 MagicTune324-3 MultiScreen345 Solución de problemas355-1 Autodiagnóstico de monitor355-2 Antes de solicitar un servicio365-3 Preguntas habituales386 Más información406-1 Instrucciones406-2 Función de ahorro de energía416-3 Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE426-4 Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos) - Sólo Europa45Taille: 1,4 MoPages: 45Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster XL2270HD XL2370HD1Índice21 Principales precauciones de seguridad31-1 Antes de comenzar31-2 Conservación y mantenimiento51-3 Precauciones de seguridad62 Instalación del producto132-1 Contenido del embalaje132-2 Instalación del soporte142-3 Extracción del soporte162-4 Instalación del montaje mural/soporte de escritorio172-5 Conexión a un ordenador182-6 Utilización como televisor212-7 Conexión de un cable HDMI222-8 Conexión mediante un cable DVI a HDMI232-9 Conexión de un cable de componentes242-10 Conexión de un cable Scart252-11 Conexión de la INTERFAZ COMÚN262-12 Conexión de un amplificador272-13 Conexión de los auriculares282-14 Bloqueo Kensington293 Uso del producto303-1 Función Plug & Play303-2 Vista del panel de control323-3 Mando a distancia333-4 Función de teletexto363-5 Uso del menú de ajuste de la pantalla (OSD: presentación en pantalla)373-6 Instalación del controlador del dispositivo603-7 Tabla de los modos de señal estándar614 Instalación del software634-1 Natural Color634-2 MultiScreen645 Solución de problemas655-1 Autodiagnóstico de monitor655-2 Antes de solicitar un servicio665-3 Preguntas habituales686 Más información696-1 Instrucciones696-2 Función de ahorro de energía706-3 Contacte con SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE716-4 Eliminación correcta73Taille: 2,2 MoPages: 73Language: EspañolOuvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster Magic XL2370, P25701차례31 주요 안전 사항51-1 사용설명서를 읽기 전에51-2 보관 및 관리61-3 안전을 위한 주의사항72 설치하기132-1 구성품 확인132-2 받침대 조립하기142-3 받침대 제거하기162-4 PC와 연결172-5 HDMI와 연결182-6 앰프와 연결192-7 도난 방지용 잠금 장치203 사용하기213-1 최적해상도 설정213-2 표준신호모드표223-3 제품 드라이버 설치233-4 제품 조작 버튼 설명243-5 화면 조정 메뉴(OSD:On Screen Display) 사용하기264 소프트웨어 설치314-1 Natural Color314-2 MagicTune324-3 MultiScreen345 문제 해결355-1 모니터 자체 진단하기355-2 고장 신고 전 확인사항365-3 궁금해요386 기타정보396-1 제품규격396-2 절전 기능406-3 고객 등록416-4 서비스 센터 안내426-5 재활용 정보43Taille: 1,4 MoPages: 44Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster XL301안전을 위한 주의사항2표기법2전원 관련2설치 관련4청소 및 사용5기타6제품설명10구성품10앞면11뒷면12기본설치15케이블 연결15받침대 변경 및 후드 설치15문제발생시 해결방안21확인해 보세요21궁금해요23모니터 자체 진단23제품 규격25제품 사양25절전 기능26표준신호모드표26서비스 안내 및 기타28고객등록28서비스센터 안내28재활용 정보29최상의 화질을 즐기시려면30용어설명 및 기타31ADOBE 소프트웨어 제품(유럽)에 대한 진술서32잔상 방지 안내문34Taille: 1,7 MoPages: 35Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel
Manuel D’UtilisationTable des matièresSyncMaster XL22701차례21 주요 안전 사항31-1 사용설명서를 읽기 전에31-2 보관 및 관리41-3 안전을 위한 주의사항52 설치하기112-1 구성품 확인112-2 받침대 조립하기122-3 받침대 제거하기142-4 PC와 연결152-5 도난 방지용 잠금 장치163 사용하기173-1 최적해상도 설정173-2 표준신호모드표183-3 제품 드라이버 설치203-4 제품 조작 버튼 설명213-5 화면 조정 메뉴(OSD:On Screen Display) 사용하기234 소프트웨어 설치304-1 Natural Color304-2 MagicTune314-3 MultiScreen335 문제 해결345-1 모니터 자체 진단하기345-2 고장 신고 전 확인사항355-3 궁금해요376 기타정보386-1 제품규격386-2 절전 기능396-3 고객 등록406-4 서비스 센터 안내416-5 재활용 정보42Taille: 1,4 MoPages: 42Language: 한국어Ouvrir le manuel